Architecture And Cultural Heritage Essay Essay Help Free

Table of Contents Introduction

Depictions of cultural heritage in Dubai’s architecture

Cultural significance of the architecture

Conclusion

References

Introduction Dubai is emerging as one of the most respected architectural sites in the world owing to its renowned structures and remarkable designs. However, it must be understood that the buildings represent more than just the physical; they have a cultural role as well.

Architecture in Dubai is an affirmation of its distinct multicultural composition but in the wake of all this modernization, its inhabitants have sought to maintain their cultural heritage. Through this analysis, it shall be seen how certain buildings in Dubai are indicative of; the need to have a sense of belonging, a reaction to the changes in the society and an attempt to maintain pride and national identity.

Depictions of cultural heritage in Dubai’s architecture Ancient architecture has been merged seamlessly with modern designs in this City. In Shindagha district, one will find the oldest building in the history of Dubai known as the Al Fahidi Fort. This building dates backed to the eighteenth century since it was built in 1799. The emirates’ administrators realized the importance of such a historical building so they placed it under the guardianship of the Dubai Museum.

The latter group would ensure that the Fort remained well maintained and visible. In this same district, one can also find wind towers which are unique structures that resemble typical towers but are shorter in length. Those were traditional buildings that were used by inhabitants decades ago. Perhaps the most outstanding component of architecture in this area is the former Sheikh Saeed’s home (Sambige, 2009).

This building underwent major renovations and has even been transformed into a cultural centre as it is a museum. In it, one will find a lot of information about the history of Dubai and the manner in which its people lived in the past. Even the physical appearance of the building is indicative of the UAE’s cultural heritage. It is shaped in the form of dhow. Previously, most inhabitants used dhows for trading since this was a major form of transport at that time. The practice is still prevalent today as many creeks still possess the iconic dhow.

One can find more of these traditions in another district called Bastakiya. The area is flooded with hotels and galleries that have been built using Islamic imprints. Although these are modern designs, they were inspired by Dubai’s rich history. The same idea can be found in the Palm Islands. These are artificial coastlines that were inspired by the Palm tree which has traditionally been a source of food, trade and much more to the inhabitants of this Emirate.

Many hotels have been built using modern designs but are surrounded by traditional forms in order to show the world the Arabic heritage of its people. For instance, the Madinat Jumeirah imitated a traditional fortress synonymous to the Arabs. One can also find a marketplace within this location in order to contribute towards the traditional cultural experience of the place.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this City, one is also likely to find many other old houses that have been renovated by the administration and turned into historical sites such as the Mjlis Gallery. Here, one can learn about the Arabian traditional lifestyle. Music, cuisine, dressing and other cultural components of art can be found in these locations.

One of the most outstanding buildings is Burj Khalifa; now rated as the world’s tallest building. It was only completed last year in 2010 and has certain features that make it uniquely Arabian. First, the building epitomizes modern interpretations of Islamic architecture.

It is triple lobed and this has always been associated with a flower called hymenocallis which only grows in the desert and actually originates in the UAE. Many other patterns in it are derived from Islamic footprints so it can be said that the building conveys the unique culture of Dubai. Since Dubai has the tallest skyline then it has definitely attracted world attention to the heritage of these people (Krane, 2009).

Cultural significance of the architecture Several buildings in Dubai have been restored and renovated by the emirates’ administrative arm. Indeed Dubai Municipality has been the recipient of many architectural awards including the best restoration project.

The reason why the Municipal has taken a personal responsibility over these buildings is to safeguard the “cultural legacy of Dubai” as described by Engineer Bukhash of the Architectural heritage Department. He asserted that such efforts are imperative in the affirmation of national identity. Indeed the presence of an architectural heritage department illustrates just how seriously people in this Emirate treat their culture. It should be noted that natives in Dubai account for less than thirty percent of the population.

Consequently, it is easy for them to lose their sense of nationhood to the many foreigners in their nation. The state needed to do something about that possibility by establishing or restoring immensely visible and distinct buildings that would symbolize this national identity.

The use of iconography or creation of iconic images such as the Burj Khalifa have illustrated just how important the Islamic culture and way of life is important to the people of Dubai. They have shown the world that this is a component that brings its people together. Many architectural designs have been created in order to create a sense of belonging. This is the reason why one is likely to find Museums and galleries that reflect this.

We will write a custom Essay on Architecture and cultural heritage specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even modern buildings borrow from past preferences thus showing that there is something distinct about the UAE and Dubai in particular. In other words, the natives wanted to feel as though they actually belong to a real place with a real culture. When put in another way, these cultural buildings have served the purpose of enforcing a sense of belonging.

Dubai has often been seen as a place of wealth especially with its shopping festivals and the only ‘seven star’ hotel in the world. Indeed, most of these landscapes are quite western. It would have been quite easy for them to get immersed in the western culture since the same has happened to many places around the world.

These quick and immense transformations in Dubai’s culture may have contributed towards a rigid depiction of the country as prosperous but without a unique identity. Dubai had to work on its brand in order to give it a distinct personality that would make it different from other western or developed nations around the world. In other words, some of these cultural buildings were sending a non verbal message to the world that Dubai is unique and that it has not been submerged by more dominant world cultures.

Critiques have affirmed that this is indicative of a weak confidence in one’s culture. By looking back at the emirates’ past and bringing it to life through architecture, residents in this city were illustrating that they were not sure about their identity and needed to use such a method to convey it. Nonetheless, these are the views of the minority since architectural identities have always been ways of telling the world what is going on in a certain location, district, country or region.

The reason why possession of a unique cultural identity is so important to Dubai is that the world is increasingly getting more inquisitive. Proliferation of internet technologies allows people to access information as a fraction of a second. Societies want to learn and know more about the ‘Other’ in an attempt to bridge the cultural knowledge gap. Most individuals have accepted that they will need one another in the future so they have been working at knowing and understanding others.

If stakeholders reflect about their identities and use architecture as that unique instrument to portray that deep vision then chances are that the concerned culture will have created a domain for itself and will be illustrating that it does indeed have something lucrative to offer the world. Cultural reflection through architecture is insightful and this provides a way of bridging both the present and the past. It may even give indications on how the future could turn out and thus promote culture (King, 2004).

It is true that tourism is one of the many reasons why foreigners flood this small emirate of the world. Inhabitants in Dubai have realized that and have attempted to represent themselves through the visual components of their buildings. It is almost as though these buildings are metaphors which are revealing certain literal and abstract relationships between the past and present eras.

Some of the architecture achieves this through its direct relationship with the past i.e. that the building was designed ages ago which in certain instances, this is revealed through few images or elements that either borrow from historical architectural designs or are inspired by certain cultural components. Sometimes the latter can be found in the natural environment such as the desert flower. All these contribute towards a visual component in tourism.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Architecture and cultural heritage by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sometimes a conservative approach is needed in order to detest against post modernism. It is almost as if these buildings want to defy all other goings on in their environment. Such conservatism is indicative of a form of rebellion against change. Architecture- much like any other form of expression- can be used as a platform for demonstrating how globalization has permeated and affected the lives of different people around the world.

When designs fit into the status quo then chances are that their functionality and visual effects are also indicative of global discourses. However, when a nation is bombarded by international symbols and signs then natives are likely to respond through cultural resistance. Indeed, this problem has been discussed in local media especially concerning western manners and style of dress.

The same debate has permeated into the architectural profession and locals have felt a need to conserve the Islamic way of life through different avenues such as architecture (Asfour, 2004). However, since the global environment is still an important part of the Dubai way of life then architects cannot simply eliminate all influences from the modern era. Consequently, most have struck a compromise between the past and the present.

They have not copied everything from the past but have used influences from the rich cultural heritage of the UAE to create a new and refreshing identity for their way of life. In other words, this is still cultural resistance albeit a milder, less radical and effective way of resisting western cultural domination.

Conclusion A look at some of the architectural designs in Dubai reflects a need to capture past values in stone or concrete. Many buildings have been inspired from the past while others have been preserved throughout history. These conscious efforts may be seen as a way of curving out a cultural and national identity.

On the other hand, they maybe a form of cultural resistance since Dubai has been invaded by numerous external cultures. On the other hand, since natives represent such a small portion of the population of the emirate then architectural cultural identity may be used to reinforce a sense of belonging among its natives who may feel invisible to the foreigners in their land.

References Asfour, K. (2004). Identity in the Arab region. Berlin University of technology conference. 12, 99

Krane, J. (2009). Dubai and the Dream of Capitalism. NY: ST Martins Press

King, A. (2004). Spaces of global cultures, architecture, urbanism and Identity. London: Routledge

Sambige. A. (2009). Cultural identity key to success for Gulf cities. Arabian business, September, 9th

[supanova_question]

A Critique of the Film “Lord of War” Created and Directed By Andrew Niccol Essay (Critical Writing) college application essay help

Written and directed by Andrew Niccol, “Lord of War” is a film released in the year 2005. The film is primarily concerned with the tragic effects of arms trading, especially in the undeveloped countries where these arms find use in the never-ending civil conflicts, and portrays the unsettled lifestyles and precarious living of individual arms dealers (Hamid 53).

The film depicts the intricate and wicked web of illegal arms trading and its global prevalence, reaching all continents and many nations in both developed and undeveloped world. The film, “Lord of War”, challenges the five major arms dealers in the world – the US, the U.K, Russia, France and China, to play a more proactive role in the reducing, or altogether eliminating the trade in illegal arms. Some characters and events in the film reflect actual historical occurrences.

“Lord of War” traces the life of Yuri Orlov, an American with Ukrainian roots, as he joins the illegal arms trade and depicts his steady rise to being a globetrotting arms dealer with contacts and connections in both the law enforcement agencies like Interpol, and the illegal arms trade industry. Yuri partners with his brother, Vitaly, and together they begin to sale and supply weapons to various clients both nationally and internationally.

However, the unpredictable and uncertain lifestyle of arms dealers eventually eats into Vitaly’s conscience, and he is killed in West Africa when he tries to prevent the sale of weapons to rebels whom he witnesses massacring a mother and her child with machetes. Yuri soldiers on alone, and despite being abandoned by his family, he elects to continue with his business and lifestyle; a business he describes as a necessary evil.

The film’s purpose(s), core message, and targeted audience are further examined. The film has several purposes; the first is to show the tragic market-route that weapons manufactured in the developed countries take; eventually ending up killing young child soldiers in civil wars and rebellion conflicts the children have no clue about. In the beginning of the film, the trail of a bullet manufactured in USSR and ends up killing a child soldier coerced into participating in a war/civil conflict in Africa, depicts the global connection of the trade.

The second purpose of the film is to portray the connection between illegal arms trade and other illegal and exploitative dealings like trade in war diamonds, or ‘blood diamonds’. In the film, Andre Baptist Sr, Liberia’s dictator, buys weapons from Yuri only to supply them to rebels in neighboring Sierra Leone in exchange of diamonds mined by unwilling, forced and enslaved miners. Trade in illegal arms funds conflicts for the illegal trade in diamonds to proceed without regulations in a vicious cycle.

The film’s ultimate purpose is to urge action from world powers the US, the U.K, France, Russia and China, and to create awareness in the governments of these countries in appreciating the unwitting role they play as the world’s largest exporters of arms, in fueling the illegal arms trade, and the attendant conflicts shown in the film. A postscript at the end of the movie expressly communicates this message, and effectively summarizes the film’s purposes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Personally, the film was a revelation and I felt enlightened and yet angered when I realized the role that western arms manufacturing companies plays in contributing to deaths in Africa, South America, and other conflict-torn regions. The poignant moments in the film for me were the death of the child solder by a bullet manufactured in Russia, and the killing by a machete of the mother and her child by a Liberian solder.

These two scenes conveyed the ultimate wickedness and inhumane nature of the conflicts thriving on the illegal sale of arms. I feel that the director succeeded in his aim of stirring righteous anger in the audience, and I feel that more effort should be exerted in curbing illegal arms trading.

In conclusion, “Lord of War” is obviously much more than an action-thriller film for thrill-seeking box office audiences – it makes a powerful statement that illegal arms trade should end.

Works Cited Hamid, Rahul. “Lord of War.” Cineaste 31.2 (2006): 52-55.

[supanova_question]

Concept of Diversity in Workplace Report cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Historical and legal context of work place diversity

Diversity problems

Reference

The world has turned into one big global village where people from all parts of the world interact freely in different forums to exchange ideas, views, goods, and services. Globalization has also led to emergence of global corporations that operate and hire workforce from different parts of the globe. Thus, workplace has become a diverse environment where managers, especially human resource managers, need to use multidisciplinary approaches that will suite different cultures in their workforce.

According to Lyon, Dunn, and Sinn (2011), it is important to develop a strong and a diverse workforce to increase the performance of any organization (p.231). In my view, I think understanding and managing a diverse workforce is paramount to the success of any organization. When the manager understands the diversity of his or her workforce, he/she will know how to use the diverse workforce to maximize the benefits of the organization rather than to let it divide the workers.

Diversity in workplace is inevitable given that people have different values, attitudes, and cultures simply because they come from different religions, races, national origins, genders, and economic statuses. For an organization to optimize on these types of diversity, I think it is important to come up with policy guideline that will help to create a good environment in the workplace, which prevents any form of discrimination.

Historical and legal context of work place diversity Diversity in the work place has evolved for years as the composition of employees in different organization changes. For instance, in American about two-thirds of new employees were women and approximately twenty nine percent were non-whites in the year 2000.

This scenario shows a drastic shift from the previous year’s trend where majority of new employees in the American workforce were men and whites. Understanding how this trend has changed over the years will enable managers to know the appropriate strategy employable in dealing with the changing composition of workforce. Traditionally, women and non-white workers were discriminated in workplace and at times mistreated just because of being different.

In my view, I think understanding historical trend in workplace will help managers to adjust accordingly. The department of labor also provides legal requirements that should be followed in all organizations to prevent discrimination of any form especially to the minority groups’ employees. I think it is important therefore for the human resources managers to know what the law demands concerning treatment of diverse workforce.

Diversity problems Stereotypes – these are myths, falsehood, or misconceptions about someone or something. In the workplace, stereotypes show up when a person is mistreated because of a given damaging misconception/stereotypes; for instance, non-whites cannot make good managers.

Prejudices – These assumptions or prejudgments are made about someone or something before getting accurate information about the person or thing. For instance, women are denied some positions in the work place based on the assumption that they are not competent enough.

Discrimination – it is the ability to view a clear distinction between people, objects or anything else. In the workplace, people are discriminated in terms of wages, promotion, hiring, termination, and job assignment due to their diversity.

Privilege – this occurs when one person is treated better than another is just because s/he is different. In the workplace, some people are treated better than others are because they come from a given race, gender, region, color, nationality among other differences.

Reference Lyon, B., Dunn, K.,

[supanova_question]

Children’s mental health Report essay help

The overall well being of a child is a direct consequence of three important factors. These are the child’s health, nutrition and safety. These factors according to (Marotz R. L, 2010) are closely intertwined and dependent on one another. For instance, if a child is fed with a nutritious diet, this will have an overall impact on his/her health.

The child develops positive health due to adequate nourishment and at the same time is prevented from experiencing unnecessary injuries. An adequate and nutritious diet results to optimum blood sugars which improves alertness which in turn promotes quick reactions thus avoiding accidents.

Health is not only an individual’s physical well being but broadly it can be termed as a state of complete physical, emotional, social, economic, cultural and spiritual well being. Health can also be categorized into various categories such as physical health, oral health, mental health etc. Specifically, this paper is going to restrict itself to the latter. A child’s mental health is normally influenced by a combination of factors. Below is a mention of these factors and their subsequent impacts on a child’s mental health.

Self esteem. This is a child’s feelings of self worth in relation to other people. Children with a high sense of self worth are less likely to exhibit negative mental health. Self esteem is developed by parents and teachers alike when they foster an atmosphere of encouragement and understanding for children. However when this is not done, the child is often down on morale and may experience negative mental health.

Stress. Protracted or extreme stress in children contribute to negative mental health. Stressful situations, such as abusive treatment, poverty, unrealistic adult demands, chronic illnesses, unsafe neighborhoods, natural disasters etc can have serious impact on children’s emotional state (Fairbank

[supanova_question]

Employment Law Issue Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Impact on the Work Place

How the employer manages Worker Health and Safety

Current and future trends

Reference

Introduction Employment law refers to regulations, managerial rulings and standards that address the legal privileges and restraints on workers and their organizations. It connects many aspects of association between employers and their employees. Employment law comprises of a wide range of issues that may occur from relationships between the employer and the employee. Examples of these issues include discrimination, Wage- Hour law, Income safety, collective bargaining and worker health and safety.

This paper will discuss worker health and safety as an employment law issue. Worker health and safety deals with protecting the security, health and welfare of workers. It may entail relations among many fields such as medicine, sanitation, safety and communal health. It has developed so much when compared to its beginning in the business industry. The basis for selecting this issue is the fact that worker health and safety has not been given enough attention in the business industry.

Impact on the Work Place Worker health and safety creates a safe environment for workers. It protects co-workers, clients, merchants, relatives, managers and neighboring communities. It has an effect on every employee in every work environment. Those held responsible for health and safety management now have more duties added to their collection.

Worker health and safety enhances and maintains physical, psychological and social heath of workers in all jobs to the highest degree. It protects workers from departures as a result of health risks in their working environments. It also protects employees in their employment from dangers resulting from adverse health factors. It places and maintains the employee in an occupational surrounding adapted to his physical and mental needs.

How the employer manages Worker Health and Safety The employer enhances health and safety practices in an organization. He identifies hazards and determines the health and safety risks involved. He sets appropriate safety controls and gives advices on how to avoid accidents to the employees. The employer also offers training on health and safety.

This minimizes the number of harms and deaths. It also reduces property destruction, legal liability, sicknesses, workers compensation alleges and absenteeism. Classes of security teaching assist in the establishment of a security culture in which employees help in developing appropriate safety procedures in the workplace. The employer should ensure that new employees are properly trained. He should embrace the significance of work place safety to prevent seasoned employees from adversely influencing new employees.

The employer should also systematically assess the working environment. He should endorse measures that reduce sicknesses in the work place. Medical examinations should be regularly done on the employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The employer should establish processes, systems, techniques, requirements and ways to achieve the best possible administration of the risks that cause harm to the workers and destroy property or the surrounding. He should evaluate services, effects, equipment, procedures and work stations by using both qualitative and quantitative techniques to identify the hazards and measure the risks associated.

He should supply his employees with picture identification cards. Visitors should not be allowed access to the workplace facilities. The manager should employ security guards and fix security cameras in the work place.

Current and future trends Today’s business workplace environment is going through rapid changes. The economy is expanding. New industries and employments are rising and workforce composition is shifting. There is also increased knowledge concerning worker safety and heath. Worker heath and safety are thus evolving.

A better worker and safety health programme is likely to be built in the future which involves all parties such as the employees, employers, managers, unions and the government. It is thus clear that, by the year 2020, there will be large improvements in worker health and safety. All nations at this time will be expected to demonstrate a progressive development of employee health services. This will be irrespective of the company size, employment mode, economic sector or occupation (Reese, 2008).

Reference Reese, D.C. (2008). Occupational health and safety management: A practical approach. Boca Raton: CRC Press.

[supanova_question]

A Midsummer’s Night Dream Essay online essay help: online essay help

Introduction This is a play that was written by renowned playwright, William Shakespeare, in a period believed to in the late 16th century. A Midsummer’s Night Dream illustrates happenings based on the marriage of Theseus, and Hippolyta.

These happenings include the adventures of four youthful Athenian lovers and a number of amateur actors, who are controlled by the fairies that live in the forest in which most of the scenes occur. This is one of Shakespeare’s most popular literary plays and has been adapted and performed in many theatres across the globe.

Setting and Context A Midsummer’s Night Dream is thought to have been written around 1590 and 1596. The play is set in ancient Athens and comprises three interlocking plots, ultimately joined at the Duke’s wedding ceremony. The other two plots are situated in the woods, and in the fairyland.

The play draws on a myriad of cultures and mythologies from the Athenian society, for example, Theseus is loosely associated with a Greek hero with a similar name, and the play mentions a number of Greek gods and goddesses. The play also borrows from the English fairy lore, the example of which is Puck, whose character was common in 16th century fables, the craftsmen were also common in London theatres.

Characters Theseus– He is the Duke of Athens and is getting ready to marry Hippolyta at the beginning of the play.

Hippolyta– She is the queen of the Amazons and is Theseus’ fiancée.

Lysander– He is Hermia’s lover and in the end of the play, the two marry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Demetrius– He loves Hermia, but she does not love him back. He previously loved Helena but ditched her when he met Hermia. In the woods, Puck uses the magical flower juice to make Demetrius love Helena, and the two marry together with the duke.

Helena– Is treated meanly by Demetrius, her former lover, and she does many things to win back his love. With Puck’s help, she wins him and the two eventually marry.

Oberon– Is the fairies’ king. He is fighting with Titania over the young Indian boy, he instructs Puck to use the magical flower juice on her and he succeeds in having the boy. He also assists Helen in her quest to win back Demetrius’ love.

Titania– She is Oberon’s wife and they have an argument over the custody of the Indian boy. She releases the boy under Puck’s spell after which the spell is lifted and the couple is united again.

Puck– He is used by Oberon to influence both his wife and Demetrius using the magical flower juice.

Nick Bottom- He is a craftsman and is a member of cast team rehearsing the play Pyramus and Thisbe in the woods. Titania falls in love with him momentarily while she was under the influence of Puck’s spell.

Egeus is Hermia’s father.

We will write a custom Essay on A Midsummer’s Night Dream specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Philostrate is the man in charge of entertainment during Theseus’ wedding.

Peter Quince is a carpenter and directs the group that performs a play at the wedding.

Francis Flute is a bellows-mender and is part of the Pyramus and Thisbe cast.

Tom Snout, Snug and Robin Starveling are also members of the Pyramus and Thisbe cast

Peaseblossom, Cobweb, Moth, and Mustardseed are fairies.

Themes Love

The play illustrates the dark side of love and how finding it can be difficult. Lysander says “the course of true love never did run smooth”, stressing this important theme (Huke and Perkins, 1981).

Although the play focuses on the conflicts arising out of love, or the lack of it, it is not actually a love story and instead, it distances us from the emotions of love in order to mock the torments and pain of those in love. The fairies also joke about love by confusing the lovers through the use of a magical flower juice, thereby implying how winning a person’s love can be difficult, except through magical powers.

Love’s difficulty is frequently explored through misplaced love, in this instance, it is shown through the four youthful Athenians: Hermia, Demetrius, Helena, and Lysander. Hermia is in love with Lysander, Lysander is also in love with Hermia, Helena loves Demetrius but he does not love her back, and instead, loves Hermia. The love scene creates a complex web of misplaced love as Helena and Demetrius’ love are misplaced.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Midsummer’s Night Dream by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The situation is only reversed by Puck while the two lovers are in the woods. We encounter a similar situation between Titania and Oberon. The latter’s coveting of the young Indian prince exceeds his love for the former, and this makes him to place a spell on her, which leads to her being in love with ass-headed Nick Bottom.

Magic and Dreams

The play is about dreams, evidenced by both the title, the events in the play, and in the final act when Puck informs the audience that the play might be nothing but a dream. The play exposes the often illogical and magical nature of dreams. The magic is illustrated through the idea of transformation, both personal and in general terms.

For instance, Helena wishes she would be ‘changed’ to Hermia, but, more generally, she mentions that love ‘changes’ everything it falls upon. While the play is set in mid summer, there are numerous references to May Day. For instance, Helena and Hermia are apparently doing “observance of a morn in May” (Shakespeare, 2008).

Literary Styles Symbolism

A Midsummer’s Night Dream presents several instances of symbolism. The craftsmen’s play in Act V represents the main plot, but in an abridged form. The act of the craftsmen satirizes the theatrical Athenian lovers and gives the play an enjoyable, comedic end. Prymus and Thisbe experience parental condemnation in their pursuit of love, similar to Hermia and Lysander. Romantic confusion as exhibited by the young Athenian lovers is also exhibited in the play as Pyramus wrongly believes that Thisbe has been killed by a lion.

The magical flower juice that acts as a love potion creates confusion in Acts II, III, and IV. The fairies are not careful in their handling of the potion and this causes a chaotic situation in Demetrius and Lysander turn their love to Helena, almost leading to a physical confrontation while Titania amusingly humiliated. The flower juice represents the illogical, erratic, and unquestionably powerful nature of love, which can lead to weird acts that are inexplicable.

Contrast

The concept of contrast is a major feature in A Midsummer’s Night Dream. The whole play is based on groups with opposite attributes, and almost all characters have their opposites. Helena is tall, Hermia is short; Puck plays jokes, Bottom is the casualty; and Titania is beautiful while Bottom is ugly. Besides, the three main categories of characters contrast significantly: the fairies are graceful and magical while the craftsmen are ungainly and simple; the craftsmen are cheerful, while the lovers are always serious.

Works Cited Huke, Ivan and Perkins, Derek. A Midsummer Night’s Dream: Literature Revision Notes and Examples. Celtic Revision Aids. 1981.

Shakespeare, William, A Midsummer’s Night Dream. Literature: An Introduction to Reading and Writing, 4th Compact Ed., Edgar V. Richards. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall, 2008. 1099-1152.

[supanova_question]

Polo Ralph Lauren Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Strategy and Management

Market Mix

Financial Analysis

Conclusion

References

Introduction Polo Ralph Lauren is a clothing company started by Ralph Lauren and specializes in semi-formal casual wear for men, women and children (not as a unique specialization because the company also produces accessories, fragrances and other home clothing, such as home towels).

Its products are however high-end and are well known throughout America and certain parts of Europe and Asia (Kent, 2003, p. 111). The company’s impact in the American fashion industry is profound, and this is the reason most of the company’s products are well known throughout the country. The company’s headquarter is in Manhattan, New York, but it has several outlets in Europe (in locations such as London) and Asia (in locations such as Japan).

Polo Ralph Lauren is an appropriate company for this analysis because it has been in existence for a long time (since 1967) and therefore, there is an immense body of information regarding its strategies and goals.

Emphasis on strategies and goals is made in this case because this study focuses on how the company’s current strategies are designed to meet the company’s goals and objectives. As mentioned earlier in this study, Polo Ralph Lauren was started in 1967 by Ralph Lauren, who only specialized in men’s wear, and more specifically, men’s ties (Kent, 2003, p. 111).

The first store was opened in Manhattan, but in 1971, the company ventured into women’s clothing by starting another store in Beverly Hills, California (Kent, 2003, p. 111). In the early 80s, the company opened its first global store out of America (London), and by 1997, the company had already been listed in the New York stock exchange.

In 2009, the company boasted of having more than 160 stores around the globe, with more than 24,000 employees in 31 countries (Wright, 2011). The company’s current threats are: competition, increase in counterfeit goods and the shaky world economy, which is significantly affecting the company’s sales because recent global financial downturns have eroded customer’s buying power, and more especially, the demand for high-end goods.

Strategy and Management Polo Ralph Lauren’s business strategy is a mix of several strategies aimed at improving the company’s brand presence in the global map, and strengthening the competitiveness of the brand. These strategies are intertwined in a flexible brand strategy, developed along the lines of retail, wholesale and licensing, although the brand has still remained true to its identity) (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company’s mission statement is to “Redefine American style, provide quality products, create worlds, and invite people to take part in our dreams” (ChaCha Search, Inc., 2011, p. 1). The company’s strategic goals are however firmly designed to expand the company’s global presence because one core pillar of the company’s strategy is to continue building and extending the Polo Ralph Lauren brand, by improving the brand’s unique luxury design and quality.

The company also expects to expand its brand strategy by focusing on its advertising and marketing strategies, and through this effort, the company expects to empower its retail stores to further uphold the brand strengthening strategy. This strategy is expected to be further complemented by excellent customer service, merchandize mixing, and visual presentation, which are meant to attract more customers and build on a strong brand strategy, designed to come up with new products (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

The second pillar in the company’s core strategy is to focus on specialty brand retail, where brand differentiation and position stand out to elevate the Polo Ralph Lauren brand above the competitors’.

The company’s third pillar is closely associated with the first, because it is based on expanding the brand’s international presence. This strategy is based on expanding the brand’s operations through new product developments, sensitive to the host’s culture.

The company’s managerial structure is also a strong pillar of the company’s operations. At the top of the managerial structure is the company’s chief executive office, assisted by the company’s vice president.

The company’s chief executive officer has always been Polo Ralph Lauren and since the brand was personally built, the company has been subject to a hierarchical structure of management, where most of the decisions are made by the CEO (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

The management team is also comprised of other highly qualified individuals, with an impeccable academic qualification and sufficient experience in the fashion industry.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Polo Ralph Lauren specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Employee recruitment and selection is undertaken by an independent human resource team, but the employees undergo a thorough vetting process to assess the potential candidates’ experience in the fashion world, and how best they can be of value to the organization. A great part of the hiring process is normally undertaken online and candidates are sourced in the same manner.

After selection, employees are taken through a training and development program, where they are oriented with how the organization works. The company’s internship program is also another strategy the company uses to nurture new talent through training and development.

Market Mix Polo Ralph Lauren’s marketing mix entails the company’s distribution, promotion, competitive and product and price strategies. As mentioned earlier in this study, the company majorly deals in high-end clothing products for men, women and children, but on the side, the company also produces fragrances accessories, towels, and similar house ware materials, which are of exemplary quality, but priced relatively higher than normal brands.

The company’s distribution strategy is characterized by a strong emphasis on the company’s retail outlets, although some of the company’s products are also moved through the wholesale channel. Depending on the market in question, the company majorly uses the two strategies.

With regards to the company’s promotion strategy, a lot of emphasis is laid on advertising and branding, as opposed to public relations, direct selling or similar sales approaches. However, there is also a strong emphasis by the company to enrich its customer experience by guaranteeing high quality customer services.

This is the core strategy used to retain its customers. However, the company majorly relies on its advertising and branding strategies to attract customers. Polo Ralph Lauren’s major competitor in the high-end clothing business is Louis Vuitton. Louis Vuitton’s strategy is also focused on international expansion, but its focus is majorly centered on reaching out to the growing number of wealthy customers in emerging markets such as China and India (Bloomberg, 2007).

Financial Analysis Polo Ralph Lauren’s financial performance has been on a positive increasing trend, considering the company has experienced an increase in revenues over the past two years. With regards to the net income, Wright (2011) affirms that, “The fiscal 2011 net income was $568 million, or $5.75 per diluted share, compared to net income of $480 million, or $4.73 per diluted share, for Fiscal 2010” (p. 2).

When the company’s performance, in terms of net revenues, for the fourth quarter of the final 2011 fiscal period, compared to the same fourth quarter fiscal period, in the year 2010, it is affirmed that, there was a significant increase in net revenue of 7% from ($1.3 billion to $1.4billion) (Wright, 2011).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Polo Ralph Lauren by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company’s profits are determined using the above parameters, it is affirmed that, there was a 3% increase in profit from the year 2010 to 2011. The company’s stock price is also on the upward trend, with the year 2011 witnessing an increased share price margin of 0.09%. The following chart shows the increase in the company’s stock prices:

From this trend, the company seems to be making a positive growth, with regards to its financial performance

Conclusion Polo Ralph Lauren’s strategies are very diverse and dynamic. Though most of the company’s strategies are forthright and tailored to deal with today’s competitive business environment, the company seems to be significantly diverting from its core mission, which is to improve the American style of life and provide an enriching experience to its customers, by providing high quality goods.

However, the company seems to focus more on an international strategy aimed at increasing its profitability and expanding its brand presence. This seems to be a strategy adopted to overcome its competitive challenges.

In other words, it is more outward oriented, than internally motivated. Regardless, the company seems to be doing well, with regards to its financial performance and marketing mix, because it has been able to experience increased profitability in recent financial postings. Comprehensively, the company needs to put more effort in merging its strategies with its core business goals.

References Bloomberg. (2007). Louis Vuitton’s Life of Luxury. Web.

ChaCha Search, Inc. (2011). What Is Polo Ralph Lauren’s Mission Statement? Web.

Kent, J. (2003). Business Builders in Fashion. New York: The Oliver Press, Inc.

Lauren, R. (2011). Growth Strategies. Web.

Wright, K. (2011). Polo Ralph Lauren Corporation Reports Financial Results for Fourth Quarter

[supanova_question]

The Royal Conservatory of Music’ Organizational Change Analytical Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents How events in the case coincide with issues raised in the case

Whether Peter Simon has been successful

Meaning of shift from academic and corporate culture

Advice for Simon in the future

Reference

How events in the case coincide with issues raised in the case The first major event was when the Royal Conservatory of music was annexed to the University of Toronto. This coincided with the successful nature of the Conservatory. Since it was acknowledged as the top piano school, then it was only natural for the institution to associate with one of the top tertiary institutions in Canada. These two entities had one thing in common; they both trained students to become professionals in music.

The next event was the restructuring of the Conservatory. This coincided with the relatively new appointment of Peter Simon as President. He restructured at a time when the institution was marred by a lack of identity since it had lost its traditional role of training concert type musicians to the University of Toronto.

The Conservatory had lost control of its crucial functions and it may have been this issue that prompted Peter Simon to restructure by firing staff. The other event was separation of the university from the Conservatory. This coincided with poor financial management which came with an academic culture. He saw the need to inject a new culture into the Conservatory through a shift to corporate culture.

The other events included introduction of new genres of music through the music path, renovations, creation of a new centre, internet and outreach programs. Each of these latter events coincided with the expansion of the school of music, better financial management and proliferation of technologies respectively.

Whether Peter Simon has been successful Peter Simon has been successful because he has turned around the ill fortunes of the Conservatory. He identified the various problems ailing this institution and came up with a strategy for turning them around. In other words, he identified problems in financial management, human resources, program offerings, technological use, expansion of the institution and organizational culture. He has raised the financial well being of the institution as seen through the many projects he initiated.

The introduction of outreach programs and learning through the arts are new ways of raising revenue and are also indicative of his success in changing the organizational culture and organizational growth. He has also addressed problems in human resources by restructuring and delineating the Conservatory from the University. Issues of technology use have been addressed through the internet outreach programs.

Meaning of shift from academic and corporate culture In any academic institution, focus is usually on instilling knowledge rather than financial gain. This means that an institution may sacrifice some financial gains for educational purposes. One of the reasons why the conservatory held on to all those teachers was because they focused on what they could achieve academically rather than business wise.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the corporate culture, decisions are based on the concept of maximization of profit. In other words, strong financial performance is a priority and if this necessitates firing staff or introducing new and unconventional programs to raise revenue then those decisions will be made. The two notions are incompatible because academic cultures are often slow and bureaucratic while corporate cultures are always fast moving.

Advice for Simon in the future Simon should remember that barrier removal is an important component of change management. Consequently, he should learn to discern possible competing initiatives and opposition as was the case with the University of Toronto so that they do not hamper the process. He also needs to have feedback mechanisms that will help him understand the success of his initiatives.

Reference Scott, A. (2005). Simon Says: As Head of the Royal Conservatory of Music, Peter Simon Has Turned the Place Upside Down, Pushing a Controversial $60-Million Reno Job and Introducing (the Horror!) Acid Jazz and World Music to the Play list. How a Fusty Old School Got Its Groove Back. Toronto, January 2005, pp. 55-58

[supanova_question]

Organizational Behavior for Manager Expository Essay best essay help

Human beings have a tendency to interact with each other by means of communication. It is this interaction that molds behaviors in organizations. Organizational behavior can therefore be demystified as the manner in which humans behave while interacting with colleagues at their work places; this includes how communication takes place in the different levels of management in an organization DuBrin and Young (2007).

The knowledge of this kind of information is a requirement to managers if an organization is to perform optimally and enjoy a competitive edge. In fact, taking the trouble to understand appropriate organizational behavior pays off with; enhanced employees’ expertise in terms of ones technical and interpersonal skills. Also some form of self development is achieved through the fulfillment associated with people getting along and self knowledge achieved.

Besides, efficiency in the organization is boosted and the organization is placed in a better state to provide for its clients in a satisfactory manner. Eventually, a sense of rationality is enhanced by widening the boundaries of what is generally perceived and accepted as common sense. DuBrin and Young (2007) These are some of the rewards Peter Flagstaff and Lindsay Gibson are aiming at to redeem their firm.

Apparently, Flagstaff marketing group is experiencing trouble dispensing and sharing knowledge from within; if this situation goes on unchecked for long then the effects could be catastrophic for the organization. For this reason, Peter Flagstaff and Lindsay Gibson have no otherwise than get back on the drawing board to strategize. At the dinner/focus group the firm’s performance is questioned and it is clear there are a number of issues that need to be addressed.

Flagstaff suggests the main problem as the inability of the firm to keep and maintain record. Documentation of transactions is mandatory for future references in the event that the organization lacks automated systems to do that.

In the likely event that the demands of a client are similar to those already available in the records then it would be wise to borrow the idea and a little modification gives it a whole new perception and the ingenuity of the firm’s creativity is preserved. Alternatively, firms can share ideas through outsourcing.

This is the process through which an organization’s tasks are delegated to the staff in other firms whose expertise overshadows what is locally available. Better yet, the firm’s staff, which should be quick to learn, should tap some of the knowledge and experience practiced by competitors to enhance better performance. DuBrin and Young (2007)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The senior managers should cultivate a culture of experimentation through which staff members are at liberty to practice their innovative skills without the fear of failure. Managers should promote this through rewarding successful proposals and funding of such ventures. This kind of spirit drives the firm into territories no one else has been before and attracts fulfillment that comes with enhanced efficiency. Also, new Ideas in the organization create a sense of change which breaks the monotony of routine thus motivating the staff members.

While at the combination dinner and focus group several issues were raised by the professional staff. Garry was concerned with ideas leaking away to competitors when a member of staff leaves the team. Well this argument is not valid since most states have laws which protect the inventions and innovations of organizations.

The firm is given exclusive rights to implement its invention for a specified duration, after which it is expected that the firm has recovered the cost of its invention and the idea can be borrowed by others. On the other hand, Brenda’s argument seems valid as bureaucracies in some firms intimidate inventors once they are aware of the agony they will undergo to put their ideas across. Therefore, if Brenda was to be assisted with that then she would open up and share more.

Sharon’s argument is not quite valid as it does not have the best interest of the organization. No one can completely depend on himself fully for creativity. The essence of teamwork is basically to allow team members to learn and borrow from each other. Over the years teamwork in organizations has proved to be a strong link towards achieving efficiency. Lastly, Jason and Ann should ensure their creativity is at an all time high even if it means modifying their early ingenious creations.

In conclusion to improve knowledge sharing some changes need to be effected at the flagstaff such as the way in which people in the different management levels interact with each other. The best possible way would be to network their information systems such that information is conveyed freely and fairly. Also, the culture of operating at the comfort zone should seize and everything should be questioned whenever there is room for improvement to enhance efficiency.

Reference List DuBrin, A. J.,

[supanova_question]

The recuperation of a generation Research Paper scholarship essay help

Introduction Oral history is one of the best ancient or traditional methods used to pass information from one generation to another. Aspects of cultural change, education especially on sexuality or health, gender identification and the roles of each individual in the family relied on oral history.

Due to lack of recorded material on critical subjects, oral history becomes the best way to get first hand information. Thus, by use of oral history and narrative/report analysis, my paper critically analyses the way poor people or indigenous communities like those of the aborigine descent are struggling to recuperate from a deteriorating health in their subsequent generations.

Culture erosion, negligence, traumatic past experiences, racism, and colonialism are some of the elements that interplay to hinder the progression of health in the indigenous communities in Taiwan and Canada. The traumatic impact of the colonialists not only eroded the cultural practices, but also altered the health status of the subsequent generations.

Why is health disparity an issue in the western world or Europe especially to those people living in Canada like Aborigines? Which issues contribute to the poor health status the community experience? Mitchell and Maracle cite colonialism as one of the major factors that have led to the deterioration of the health status of the indigenous communities (aborigines) (20).

Due to the invasion of the colonialists, the indigenous people had to succumb to their demands. They also mention Cultural assimilation of the whites as one of the other major issue that had a negative impact on the colonized communities. Unfortunately, the aborigines were not ready to accept the assimilation, which led to conflicts.

Consequently, the colonialists tortured and pressured them to abandon their social or cultural practices and adapt a new culture, which was not only hectic, but also very diverse. Using force and threats, the colonial government was able to establish a uniform cultural practice. Therefore, the traumatic experience inflicted on the minority groups like the aborigines affects the psychology of the subsequent generations.

Mental instability or illness is one of the health crises that the people of most minorities or indigenous communities’ experience. For instance, Mitchell and Maracle expose the deteriorating mental health of the Aborigines in Canada when they say, “mental health issues or issues of imbalance are reflected in high level of depression, additions, and suicides” (15). In addition, the psychological problems have persisted in different generations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, Mitchell and Maracle put the blame of mental illness to the cultural erosion that the indigenous communities undergo. They also mention that the long-term impact of deculturation or diachronic trauma may integrate in the next generations, thereby leaving behind a disturbing legacy (15). The indigenous/minority groups abandoned their traditional healing methods and lifestyle, which could have solved the current emerging health issues.

The adaptation of a new lifestyle, which consists of different eating habit or human diets, leads to lifestyle diseases like cancer, diabetes, and hypertension among others. Colonialism led to adaptation of new cultural practices. The new generation therefore live this adapted culture; they do not have a chance to learn/know about their cultural practices. Therefore, they not only adapt to foreign culture, which is in the school curriculum, but also practice a culture of a society that overlooks their health.

Therefore, the indigenous communities in the west have a task to seek for their forgotten cultural practices, which may also be a remedy to their deteriorating health status. Besides being cheaper, the practices may also be a form of recuperation of the generations that undergo psychological instability.

According to Drew and Godlewska, the colonial perpetrators separated women from men or girls from boys, which denied the indigenous communities an opportunity to appreciate their familial environment (449). They assert that the segregation not only contributed to the erosion of family/moral values, but also led to racism, an issue that currently contributes to health disparity in the affected community.

Due to racial discrimination, the health priority of the minority groups is not an agenda in most government forums. The minority or indigenous people lack proper health care or facilities because of their skin color. Racism leads to discrimination or isolation in social institutions like hospital and schools.

Thus, the inaccessibility of the hospitals is the reason why the people succumb to ailments, which are treatable. Racism has led to isolation of social amenities in the society, which becomes both traumatic and painful to the indigenous communities and sometimes the psychological consequences culminates into mental instability. Moreover, children who live in racially segregated communities end up developing mental disorders, which can affect the many generations to come.

Racism denies the minority groups to access the higher education facilities of their choice, therefore making them to lag behind on the matters of health. Statistical analysis carried out in Canada comparing the health status of the aboriginal and the non-aboriginals reveal that the whites have a stable health record. Therefore, the impacts of the colonialists are the major issues that need remedy to ensure the healing of the indigenous communities.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The recuperation of a generation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Furthermore, Mitchell and Maracle cite the lack of formal education to the indigenous communities that not only locks them out from accessing good jobs, but also denies them adequate information concerning health issues. Health information is critical.

The two scholars call for psychological education to the indigenous people to arm them up incase any member of their families experiences a traumatic event. Most of the higher institutions scrutinize the origin of their students while others bluntly refuse to accept non-white students. On the other hand, the institution that accepts them may lack vital courses within the health sectors, which leaves the communities to depend on the white people in their society.

The menial jobs do not give them a chance to access a good health package. With financial constrains, the indigenous/minority groups are unable to access health insurance systems. Consequently, the treatment cost of chronic diseases like cancer or diabetes among others is extremely high.

Racism promotes inequality, discrimination, and oppression of the minorities/indigenous communities in Europe. The inequality that prevails in Europe is because of the racial segregation. While the whites or the majority enjoy good health, jobs, education and an admirable lifestyle, the minority thrive under impoverished conditions and languish in poverty. The minority are unable to enjoy similar rights in equal quantity hence the poverty.

Although Mitchell and Maracle are unable to unravel the mystery behind the inequality in their society, they intellectually think that the answer may lie within the political docket or sector (14). Besides racial segregation, the politicians want to ensure the minor communities are ‘under their feet’. Therefore, the continuous oppression and discrimination ranges from the health, education to the economic issues. The white community fears for their position incase the minor community elevate their status beyond that of the whites.

Thusly, to keep them under control, oppression and discrimination are some of the tactics that politicians apply. Unfortunately, their uncouth tactic eventually denies the indigenous society right to health because they are unable to either access funds or social amenities concerned with their health. Additionally, the role of politicians is to control the economic and social wellbeing of their nation and therefore, when all citizens are unable to have equal rights, the problem definitely originates from the political sector.

Despite the devastating state of the health sector in the indigenous community, Mitchell and Maracle give remedies to the problem. First, the two scholars from the Aborigine community call for assistance from the health providers/sectors to heal the continually ailing community. Scientists, researchers, historians, and philosophers should converge to form a transformation system that will ensure the community recuperates.

Historians, psychologists, and philosophers should research on the ancient cultural practices especially the cultural degeneration of the indigenous communities like the aborigines since the invasion of the whites. Additionally, the ancient political, social, and economical practices should be under scrutiny as a way to ensure their health problems do not originate from the three elements. Furthermore, psychologists should educate adults from the indigenous communities on how to deal with mental illness.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The recuperation of a generation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, psychological education will assist in the healing of the unborn generations because parents will have first hand information on how to deal with their mentally challenged children/infants (Mitchell and Maracle1). Nevertheless, the healing of the community will not occur overnight but it will be a long process with effective results.

Moreover, Mitchell and Maracle insist on the healing of the trauma that occurred during the colonial times (18). The two writers recommend the study of the emotional and spiritual status of the psychologically challenged individuals. The physical stress and wounds will also lead to a clean or healthy generation free of psychological trauma. The psychological and physical therapy will ensure the indigenous people accept the horrific and terrific incidents, events that occurred in their lives.

The third recommendation is that the education system should include the social, cultural, political, and economic practices of the indigenous communities in their curriculum. Consequently, the people will appreciate their origin therefore learning the effect of the elements on their health.

Similarly, the remedy will enable the community to design an effective methodology on how to heal their generations. Additionally, equal educational opportunities will give the communities a chance to learn on the different emerging diseases or disorders in the health sector or human body.

Therefore, they will be able to not only deal with the disease, but also put up preventive measures against the occurrence of the disease. Communal groups should practice unity, which will enable them to support each other, incase of traumatic event, or stress in an individual. The groups will also enlighten each other on the current issues affecting them in their community.

Finally, according to Mitchell and Maracle “the racism that remains a barrier to progress in (the) of indigenous people(s)” needs abolishment whence all the citizens especially the government or leaders should preach equality (20). Equality will not only lead to eradication of oppression, discrimination, and racism in the society, but also promote good health in the indigenous community. Besides, racism denying the minority communities their rights, it also culminates into hatred in the society, which hinders peace. Establishment of policies will ensure all generations practice equality, which will curb health disparities in the communities or western society.

On the other hand, Geertje asses the impact of mental instability on the family issues and values. For instance, with the use of oral history, he is able to investigate and give the negative effects of psychological instability, which ranges from break down of family ties like marriage, financial instability to lack of peace in the entire or extended families (Geertje 268). Therefore, linking Geertje and Mitchell’s articles, the two write-ups, confirm that familial psychological trauma is possibly transferable to the next generations.

In summary, using oral history, different articles have been able to produce social issues that never existed in records. These issues negatively affect communities, especially in matters of health. Colonialism forcefully altered the social and cultural practices of indigenous communities specifically, the aborigines. Unfortunately, the psychological, emotional, spiritual, and physical traumas persist in the subsequent generations despite colonialism having ended several decades ago.

Drew and Godlewska, and Mitchell and Maracle among others discuss the health disparities that colonialism caused while Boschma explains through oral history how emotional instability affect generations subsequently. Mitchell and Maracle outline the remedies of the health inequality in western society especially for the indigenous communities.

The two scholars recommend psychological treatment, education, and guidance to parents from these indigenous communities. They also call for unity among community members to solve and cater for the health of their fellow people. Finally, the leaders in the West should work hard to eliminate racism and discrimination in their society.

Works Cited Drew, Bednasek, and Godlewska, Anne.”The influence of betterment discourses on

Canadian Aboriginal peoples in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.” Canadian Geographer 53.4(2009): 444-461. Print

Geertje, Boschma. “Accommodation and resistance to the dominant cultural discourse on psychiatric mental health: Oral history accounts of family members.” Nursing Inquiry 14.4 (2007): 266-278. Print

Giltrow, Janet. Academic Writing: An Introduction. Peterborough, ON: Broadview Press, 2009.

Mitchell, Terry, and Maracle, Dawn. “Healing the Generations: Post-Traumatic Stress and the Health Status of Aboriginal Populations in Canada.” Journal of aboriginal health 4.12 (2005): 1-20.

[supanova_question]

Demand: Utility and Marginality Essay online essay help: online essay help

Baskin Robbins relies on the skills and professionalism of its employees. A variety of factors affects the demand for labor in the ice-cream industry, including changes in the price of the good, new technologies, and changes in the number of firms selling similar products. The significance of the price-labor demand relationship is difficult to estimate.

However, whether an increase in the market price of ice-cream raises or reduces the demand for labor will depend on a wide range of factors and circumstances. Skilled employees are the key element of Baskin Robbins’ continued success. They guarantee high quality of its products and increase the marginal revenue product of labor, which improves cost-effectiveness of ice-cream products.

Labor markets are being governed by the forces of demand and supply (Mankiw, 2008). However, labor markets are different from other markets in the sense that the demand for labor is a derived demand (Mankiw, 2008). Simply stated, labor is not the final product sold to consumers but merely a factor of production (Mankiw, 2008).

Numerous factors affect labor demand, including new technologies, changes in demand for goods and services, and changes in the number of firms (Rittenberg

[supanova_question]

Microeconomics Demand: Utility and Marginality Essay scholarship essay help

Professional sports have one of the most competitive and challenging labor markets. Thousands of athletes fight to find their place under the sun. Superstars are common, but true talents are rare. As a result, those who prove themselves unique have sufficient opportunities to win the labor market Olympus. Scarcity is the defining feature of the labor market in professional sports. Scarcity justifies billions of dollars paid to talented athletes who contribute to their teams’ win column (Center for Economic Education, 2005).

Despite its uniqueness, the forces managing the supply and demand in professional sports are mostly similar to those in other labor markets. Hiring practices in professional sports must be regulated, to ensure that athletes are legally protected against discrimination and are offered equal opportunities to realize and improve their talents.

The forces determining wage in professional sports and other labor markets are mostly the same. The demand and supply of labor are the major determining characteristics of wage in any labor market (Center for Economic Education, 2005). The quantity supplied of labor directly depends upon changes in salaries: the higher the wage the more labor is supplied to the market (Center for Economic Education, 2005).

The marginal revenue of product (MRP) usually predetermines the levels of and changes in labor demand (Center for Economic Education, 2005). Two factors affect wage in any labor market: (1) the amount of goods and services each worker produces; and (2) the marginal revenue of this product or service (Center for Economic Education, 2005).

It goes without saying that different labor markets have different characteristics and can be more or less attractive to workers. The labor market of professional sports is well-known for its incredibly high salaries. It comes as no surprise that professional sportsmen are often compared to teachers: the latter, despite the contribution they make to the society’s scientific development and intellectual progress, cannot always make their ends meet.

This difference in wages has little to do with discrimination but is a complex result of numerous economic forces affecting labor markets. Scarcity is the definitive feature of labor markets in professional sports (McLaughlin, 2007). In the meantime, teachers are available in abundance (McLaughlin, 2007).

They can be easily bred to become perfect educators. Unlike teachers, talented athletes are rare, and teams are willing to pay millions to acquire and retain a talent that will move them to the top of the win column. Scarcity explains the dramatic difference in how much teachers and athletes earn. Scarcity also justifies the incredible sums of money paid to prominent athletes in professional sports.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These differences in teacher and athlete wages are directly related to the so-called diamond-water paradox. The latter explains why “diamonds are so expensive and water so cheap, when water is absolutely essential to the life of every human” (McLaughlin, 2007). Again, it is because of their scarcity that diamonds are valued more than water.

Certainly, water may soon replace diamonds and become a luxury, but at present, every additional unit of water acquired is much less expensive than that of a diamond (McLaughlin, 2007). With the abundance of teachers in the labor market, the cost of every new teacher is incomparably lower than that of a talented athlete. Unless the situation changes (which is hardly possible), athletes will continue to enjoy a privileged position in the labor market.

A belief persists that athletes’ salaries cause the prices of sporting events to be high. Athletes have already assumed a role of entertainers, and sport fans are willing to pay billions of dollars for tickets, to watch another game (Chass, 2002).

Contrary to public beliefs, high athletes’ salaries do not affect ticket prices, simply because player payrolls are fixed and do not depend on the number of tickets sold or their price (Center for Economic Education, 2005). Even children know that professional sportsmen make contracts with their teams and have fixed salaries, which do not change over a definite period of time, for example, 1-2 years.

Certainly, teams receive their share of revenues and can generate considerable profits, if they manage to sell as many tickets as possible. Some teams had the price of their tickets increased, after signing superstars (Center for Economic Education, 2005). However, ticket prices increased not because teams increased their payrolls, but because more fans wanted to see the show (Center for Economic Education, 2005). As the demand for tickets increased, teams raised their price to earn better revenues.

In 2000, Steven E. Landsburg discussed the enormous salary of Derek Jeter, who was believed to be worth of $17 million a year (Landsburg, 2000). At that time, $17 million in athlete salaries was beyond reason, but Landsburg (2000) could not imagine that wages in professional sports would have no limits. Today’s highest-paid baseball player Alex Rodriguez is worth of $31 million annually (The Richest, 2011). He is followed by CC Sabathia and Joe Mauer, each earning $23 million per year (The Richest, 2011).

Wages in professional sports constantly increase. Unlike other industries, agents cannot replace their athletes with capital (Downward, Dawson

[supanova_question]

Normative Ethics and the Right to Privacy Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Recent advances in technologies have prompted a new consideration of e-mail, use of e-mail, and its relation to ethics. Millions of users in all parts of the world use e-mail to communicate with each other. In many instances, e-mail is the only way for people to stay connected with their friends, relatives, and family members.

Those who use e-mail always expect to have a certain degree of privacy. However, they cannot guarantee that after their death, their parents or relatives will not have access to their messages. Neither deontological nor utilitarian perspectives justify parents’ willingness to access and read their deceased son’s correspondence. It is a direct breach of the personal right to privacy, which does not lead to any positive outcomes.

In 2005, Susan Llewelyn Leach published a story of deceased US marine Justin Ellsworth and his parents. According to Leach (2005), after Justin’s death, Ellsworths decided that they had the right to access and read their deceased son’s e-mail correspondence. They requested the right to his e-mail from Yahoo!, which refused to give out the young man’s password (Leach, 2005).

Ellsworths sued Yahoo!, and the court ruled that Yahoo had to provide Justin Ellsworth’s parents with access to his e-mail account (Leach, 2005). It goes without saying the decision enraged and horrified e-mail users, who always expected to have a certain degree of privacy in e-mail communication (Leach, 2005). It appears that, after death, families can be granted access to their deceased relatives’ e-mails. The most important question is whether or not it is ethical for a third party to access and use deceased persons’ e-mail correspondence.

Deontological and utilitarian ethical theories can shed light on the relevance and implications of e-mail use in the technological age. Utilitarianism (consequentialism) focuses on the consequences and outcomes of particular behaviors (O’Donohue

[supanova_question]

The Role of the Financial Manager Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Whether or not Chief Financial Officers can make good Chief Executive Officers is difficult to define. Recent trends in business suggest that more CFOs are willing to land in the CEO’s chair. Simultaneously, more companies choose former CFOs to become their CEOs, hoping that the latter will improve their financial and strategic performance.

However, not everything is easy with the CFOs who want to become CEOs. Financial experience may add rigor to future CEOs’ decisions and achievements, but finance departments are not always the best place to train Chief Executive Officers. Only CFOs who broaden their outlook, reconsider business issues from multiple perspectives, and develop excellent relations with people will have a chance to excel as chief executives.

More Chief Financial Officers want to become CEOs. They have sufficient education and experience to manage financial affairs. They possess a perfect understanding of the financial processes affecting firms’ strategic performance.

U.S. and international businesses know numerous examples of successful CFO-CEO transformations. In 1985, D. Wayne Calloway became PepsiCo’s President (Picker, 1989). That was the time when cash flows in PepsiCo were so low that the company had to borrow money, in order to pay dividends (Picker, 1989).

In less than four years, PepsiCo would become one of the most profitable food manufacturing giants (Picker, 1989). The knowledge and financial experience of the new CEO became the foundation of the company’s success in the food manufacturing industry. Other companies followed PepsiCo’s example. In 2005, after the 2000-2001 energy crisis in California, the $11 billion investor-owned PG

[supanova_question]

Drug testing in the US army Essay writing essay help

Drug testing is a frequent object of professional discussion in literature. Much has been written and said about drug testing and its implications for privacy. Thousands of employees are confident that mandatory drug testing is a direct violation of their rights. Others believe that drug testing is needed to promote safety and productivity in the workplace.

The Army Drug Testing Program obligates soldiers and leaders to be screened for drug abuse at least once a year. Despite numerous ethical controversies, drug testing is essential for the lives and wellbeing of U.S. soldiers and those working in the United States Army. It is imperative that those working for the U.S. Army pass a drug test at least once a year, to guarantee their compliance with the norms and standards of military performance.

Drug testing is a frequent object of professional discussion in literature. Despite the growing popularity of drug tests in the workplace, many employees believe that drug testing violates their rights.

Certainly, the current state of drug testing systems is not without controversy: “testing laboratories’ shortcomings can mistakenly brand innocent workers drug abusers, ending their careers” (Zuckerman, 2000, p.A24). This is part of the reason why many employees try to beat the system, diluting their urine samples or purchasing drug-free urine and prosthetics online (Anonymous, 2001).

The United States Army runs a drug testing program, aimed to promote a drug-free workplace environment and secure military operations from drug-related failures. Under the Army Drug Testing Program, each soldier is obliged to pass a drug test at least once a year (ASAP, 2010).

The main goals of the program are (a) to keep soldiers from using and abusing drugs; (b) to let commanders assess the military and security fitness of their soldiers; and (c) to create a foundation for taking timely appropriate actions in terms of those, who show positive test results (ASAP, 2010).

Deontological and utilitarian ethics justify mandatory drug testing in the workplace, including the U.S. Army. From the viewpoint of deontology, drug abuse is a direct violation of the security and workplace standards in the army. As a result, drug testing is not a matter of privacy violation but an effective instrument of detecting those, who use and abuse drugs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Drug testing reflects military professionals’ striving to follow the principles of beneficence, nonmaleficence, and good will. From the utilitarian perspective, drug testing improves safety and security in the workplace. This is particularly the case of military professionals, who need a sober mind and clear reason to successfully meet their military objectives.

Certainly, drug tests’ shortcomings may lead to unpredictable results and hold soldiers responsible for what they never committed. The imperfections of drug testing are a matter of serious ethical concern. Routine drug tests can be extremely intrusive, if other individuals observe the process, to guarantee that there is no urine sample tampering (ACLU, 1997). Drug testing may reveal the presence of other substances and medical conditions in subjects, which is a direct violation of their privacy (ACLU, 1997).

Despite these controversies, drug testing in the army is ethically and legally justified. The U.S. Army was created to protect the country from external threats, but it can become a threat to itself and others if soldiers use and abuse drugs. Military professionals are very similar to pilots, drivers, and emergency rescue specialists.

They carry a great deal of social responsibility for their acts. Most drug testing shortcomings can be easily overcome: advances in technology provide ample opportunities to improve the drug testing process and the quality of drug testing results. Medical professionals must develop drug testing strategies to promote a drug-free atmosphere in the U.S. Army and beyond.

References ACLU. (1997). Privacy in America: Workplace drug testing. American Civil Liberties Union. Web.

Anonymous. (2001). Drug testing: The things people will do. The American Salesman, 46(3), 20-23.

ASAP. (2010). Drug testing: About the program. Army Substance Abuse Program. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on Drug testing in the US army specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Zuckerman, L. (2000). Workers get greater drug test protection. New York Times, A24.

[supanova_question]

The Role of the Financial Manager – Nokia Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Nokia Corporation used to be one of the key leaders in the international market of mobile devices. Nokia is well-known for the superior quality of its mobile devices and navigation products. The company develops and supplies cell phones and smartphones, mobile computers and applications, as well as Internet services like music and messaging (Yahoo Finance, 2011).

Nokia’s current financial profile is not very attractive: the company failed to retain its leadership in the smartphone market and has almost lost its smartphone business (Butcher, 2010). The company is fighting to restore its position in the financial market, and the price of its shares slowly increases. Whether or not Nokia manages to improve its strategic and financial position depends on the quality and efficiency of the new CEO’s decisions and actions.

Nokia, one of the leaders in the international market of mobile devices, is currently listed on the Frankfurt, Helsinki, and New York Stock Exchanges (Nokia, 2011). The latest closing data for the NYSE shows that the price of Nokia’s shares does not exceed $6.02 (Nokia, 2011; Yahoo Finance, 2011).

The 52-week range for Nokia is $5.81-11.75, and it is possible to assume that Nokia is currently near the bottom of its financial performance (Yahoo Finance, 2011). The company was able to improve its financial position in the NYSE, but its corporate future does not look very bright. The company is facing numerous strategic issues. At the end of May, Nokia announced that it would not be able to make any profits on phone sales (Arthur, 2011).

The company feels too weak against its competitors, Google and Apple: the former sells millions of cell phones with Android operating system, whereas the latter has turned its iPhone into the source of unprecedented profits (Arthur, 2011). The popularity of Nokia products in Europe and China is decreasing because of price (Arthur, 2011). Whether or not Nokia manages to improve its financial position depends upon the quality and efficiency of the new CEO’s strategic decisions.

At the end of 2010, Nokia decided to replace its CEO Olli-Pekka Kallasvuo with Stephen Elop, who used to be the head of a business division at Microsoft (Butcher, 2010). Today, Elop is Nokia’s CEO (Nokia, 2011).

Before Elop became the new Nokia’s CEO, he said that his main task was to lead the company through the period of change (Butcher, 2010). Elop was confident that superior financial performance was one of his main professional goals (Butcher, 2010). Little has changed since then: the company is losing its customers and cannot retain its position in the mobile devices market.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company lost nearly 33% in stock prices over the last year (Yahoo Finance, 2011). Its payout ratio is 63.00% and its return on equity is 8.80% (Yahoo Finance, 2011). Apparently, Nokia is in the dire straits of the mobile devices business and needs an entirely new strategy to improve and capitalize its market position. Compared to 2010, investors holding Nokia’s shares have lost nearly 18%.

Nokia hopes that its new CEO will give an impetus to the company’s movement towards new strategic highs. Obviously, the company needs a major move to remain competitive in the technological age.

Positive changes in stock prices suggest that Nokia has a chance to revive itself against its competitors, but to make it happen, Nokia needs an entirely new strategic vision, mission, and direction. Years may pass before Nokia restores its position in the international mobile and cell phone industry. Until then, all Nokia can do is to fight with the ghost mills of its former popularity, while other technological giants are developing and selling brand new products.

References Arthur, C. (2011). Nokia shares dive after sales warning. The Guardian. Web.

Butcher, M. (2010). Nokia’s new CEO has a mobile mountain to climb. Tech Crunch. Web.

Nokia. (2011). Investors resources. Nokia. Web.

Yahoo Finance. (2011). Nokia Corporation. Yahoo Finance. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of the Financial Manager – Nokia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

The Tempest and the Rape of the Rock Essay college essay help near me

Written by William Shakespeare, Tempest is a poem that exhibits the intriguing features of humankind. The poem is set on an island and it explores the characters by giving them a chance to experiment the human nature. Through the island, Shakespeare is able to describe the themes of power while Prospero explores his leadership skills. On the other hand, the poem the rape of the lock by Alexander Pope ridicules the habits of the upper-class people.

Shakespeare uses the island to experiment human qualities of different characters in his poetry. For instance, when Prospero’s brother is forcefully evicted from kingship, he moves to the island, which is like a testing ground for him and Shakespeare uses the island to promote the theme of power.

While on the island, Prospero eventually dominates all the other people on the ship yet his brother had taken his kingship away during his reign in Milan. Shakespeare seems to nurture both the negative and positive qualities of human nature. Intellectually, Shakespeare uses the events at the island to explore betrayal that exists among kingdoms and rulers on earth.

Through the poem/island, Shakespeare highlights the observations he has made in most kingdoms. Shakespeare uses the island to provide the failures of human leadership whereby, throughout his life he has seen betrayal/fights among the royal classes. Furthermore, Shakespeare describes the sexuality and abuse of humanity that goes on in many kingdoms; for instance, Caliban has not only attempted to seduce Miranda, a young girl, but also tried to rape her.

Through the author’s voice, the reader is able to condemn the evil or betrayal of human beings in the society. Additionally, using the island to symbolize the kingdom, the author provides conspiracy that occurs in most kingdoms because Antonio and Sebastian plot to kill Prospero yet he is the ruler/owner of the island. Therefore, Shakespeare not only uses the island as a kingdom to explore his themes, but also to nurture and reveal the characters of different people, which exists in the world.

Prospero is Shakespeare’s principal character who runs for his life after his brother attempts to eliminate him and take over the kingdom (Langbaum 20). Finally, he settles in the island and calls all people to board a ship. He invites people of all classes to live with him in the island ranging from servants/maids to royal class.

Therefore, the island is a testing ground, which gives him an opportunity to learn, nurture, and provide his leadership skills that his brother overlooked. While in the island, he uses his magical power to rock a ship, which has boarded many people.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thus, through the island he manipulates the psychology of other people to emerge as the leader (king). While on the island, he cultures his genuine qualities as a leader. Moreover, his godly like character while on the island leaves the reader to categorize his behavior as a human leader because although he and powers to stop his brother’s hostility, he leaves him to take over, and decides to move to unknown island.

In addition, while in the island, Prospero cultivates the character of his daughter by giving her reasons why the island is the apparent home for them. Therefore, the island acts as a rescue home where he experiments his leadership powers testing the people and eventually emerging as a true leader.

On the other hand, the rape of the lock is a comical poem that ridicules the elite community especially the leaders/upper class. Though holding high position in the society, the high and might let petty issues to sweep their emotions; something that connects the upper social class with the lower social class. The first people that Pope ridicules are women who are self-centered; they care so much their physical appearance rather than their morality.

For instance, though beautiful, Belinda has a wide collection of beauty accessories meant to attract men, which not only makes her outstanding, but also leads her to seek fame through competition. Pope uses trivial events like playing cards to highlight the extent that people in the society can go to seek fame. Due to envy, women are unable to protect each other; for instance, Clarissa conspires to bring down Belinda’s beauty.

Therefore, the competition for trivial things like husbands makes paints women as evil people in the society. Pope also ridicules high men in the society who take pleasure in devouring the innocent young women by sexually assaulting them. In the first stanza, section I, Pope mocks the great or upper class in the society when he says, “what mighty contest rise from trivial things” (line II par.1).

Moreover, by using the element of juxtaposition, Pope belittles the hero nature of Belinda especially when he says, “nymph shall break Diana’s law or soma frail china’s jar” (section II, stanza VII, lines 106-107). Thus, with the use of funny object or non-important things, Pope undermines the mighty in the society achieving his goal of pointing out the loss of virtues among the leaders.

In summary, both Shakespeare and Pope communicate effectively to their societies through poetry. While Shakespeare uses the island to explore his themes, Pope uses comic and juxtaposition to ridicule the elite in the society.

We will write a custom Essay on The Tempest and the Rape of the Rock specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Langbaum, Robert. Shakespeare’s The Tempest. New York: Signet Classic, 1998.

Pope, Alexander. The rape of the rock, 2009. Web.

[supanova_question]

History of United States after 1865 Essay custom essay help

Different countries went through diverse stages of development before they reached where they are at present. The United States of America is no exception. Regarding this, several authors have tried to write books expressing their different versions concerning the history of the United States of America.

This article will focus on Berkin Carol, Miller Christopher, Cherny Robert as well as Gormly James as they render their perceptions concerning the history of the US in the book entitled Making America: a History of the United States since 1865.

This book focuses at large on the political chronology of the United States. Regarding the topic of the book, (Making America) the wellbeing of a country depends at large on the kind of leadership being exercised within the country. Looking at leadership, the book commences by focusing on the colonial exercises within the earlier American society. The authors move on to talk about the immigrant society as well as civilization of the earlier individuals within the United States of America.

The authors did not only revolve around the political atmosphere of the United States, they went further to explain by reflecting a diversity of personal experiences regarding the ethnicities within the American society. The diverse notions from different authors and chronologists concerning the History of the United States are elucidated on a wider basis.

The economical aspect and practices of the people in America has not been left unturned. The authors have tried to elucidate their views concerning the economical practices of earlier American individuals.

In writing the book, Berkin and her colleagues have tried vigilantly to uphold their positive views on the significance of political and social movements (32). The book also tries to explain the significance of the colonial society as well as the political dissimilarities within the history of America. Various conclusions may be arrived at after reading this book. However, the major conclusion that one may come up with is that the political disparities, the immigration movements as well as the social movements are indeed very significant.

Most authors in different books give diverse opinions on the history of the US. Most of the books tend to give the irrelevance of political dissimilarities and the immigrant society (Oates

[supanova_question]

The Effects of Monetary and Fiscal Policy in USA Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

The great recession that began in 2006 following the crumple of Lehman brothers, left the central bankers and superior economies in dilemma. The U.S government aggressively invented ways of curbing the devastating upshots of the depression. Among such outcomes were the disintegrations of the main financial marketplaces. Therefore, the government enacted numerous policies to curtail the vast recession (Yang 4).

Sources indicate that, the policies would positively aid in diminishing the outcomes of recession. However, these guidelines would present some negative consequences to the state’s economy. This paper thus identifies the main policies enacted during that time, and explains the negative consequences emanating from such actions. A thorough examination on duty rates, in addition to “crowding out” is vital in realizing the outcomes (Dennis 2).

In February 2009, legislators enacted “The American recovery and reinvestment act (ARRA) of 2009” aimed at fighting the weaknesses in the country’s economy. The act reinforced numerous roles such as provision of finances to its states. The act aided in funding the edification and the transportation divisions. According to Dennis (2), the act funded projects and assisted the poor individuals in the society.

Apart from the above functions, the act highly helped relief taxes imposed on commodities thus benefiting the business people and the consumers. However, the act led to numerous negative challenges. Sources indicate that, the act would have harmful effects on the economy and especially on micro economy. Dennis anticipates a reduction in the total output as estimated by “Congressional Budget Board” (CBO) (Dennis 2).

The short-term economic stimulus proposed by different entities would finally augment the total government debt. This would be due of the amplified in government outlay or returns reduction. Furthermore, during the recession session, individuals hold their wealth in a way not helpful in funding for private investment.

It is probable that the increased debt would drastically lessen the amount of “productive private capital” (Dennis 2). Finally, the study suggests the “crowding out” of debt on the private ventures. According to CBO, each dollar for the arrears would “crowd out” to about a third of the total value of domestic capital (Dennis 2).

Nevertheless, the CBO lacks the exact figures on the level of crowding out likely to occur in future. Therefore, while making the budget approximation, the CBO decides to incorporate both high and low levels of the crowding out. Additionally, the CBO anticipated amplification in employment opportunities but a decline in wages.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The core reason behind the decline would be the inflated reduction in the GDP (Dennis 3). Furthermore, the ARRA would augment interest charges as the Federal Reserve tries to combat inflation. Although ARRA strives to counter the recession by combating the inflation levels, there exists a high possibility of its recurrence in future due to large amount of funds injected into the economy.

In 2008, the U.S government endorsed “The Emergency Economic Stabilization Act” (Straus 4). This policy permitted the treasury department to provide more capital to the banks through procuring equities and mortgages from the distressed companies.

It did not only accord the treasury the authority to provide the funds but also granted it additional powers. Even though the act played a striking part in reducing the effects of recession, it resulted to a number of limitations. These effects highly affected the executives of financial institutions selling the troubled possessions (Straus 6).

The main types of limitations presented by the treasury were on home compensation usually rewarded by fiscal foundations selling the assets. Sources indicate that, direct buying of the troubled assets held by the organization took course instead of utilizing the bidding processes thus forcing the organization to satisfy certain compensation standards. Such standards fail to work in case of purchasing the assets through auctioning.

The second limitation would arise from application of auction in purchasing the assets (Straus 7). The direct purchase also advocated for some limitations when compensating the executive officers. This would result to adverse effects to the financial institutions run by these bureaucrats.

Furthermore, the act highly governed the process of parachute payments, compensation payments, thus an inflated tendency of recording losses that would result to slow growth of these institutions. In addition, the act prohibited any compensations provision to the employees’ wages (Straus 8). This to an extent would pose numerous challenges thus shortage of security for the cash.

The “The Economic Stimulus Act (2008)” is a congress act enacted in 2008, a time when the effects of recession were at the peak (Yang 4). The congress realized the need to boost the American economy thus its implementation. It permitted the eligible taxpayers and married couples obtain high ratio of discount on the taxes.

We will write a custom Essay on The Effects of Monetary and Fiscal Policy in USA specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, other individuals who never paid dues but earned $ 3,000 and above qualified for these remunerations. It also benefited specific businesses through tax reduction. Despite the taxes reduction, the resultant effects of the policy would be devastating to the U.S citizens residing in native countries.

A current study conducted by professionals indicates challenges for both professionals and immigrants residing out of U.S due to the taxation system (Yang 6). The act demands for imbursement of duties even if one is out of United States. Therefore, a great proportion of individuals result to jettisoning the citizenship thus becoming citizens of the host nation, in an attempt to avoid double taxation. However, in other developed nations, people working abroad are held as non-residents thus illegible for taxation.

Studies show that innumerable applications for citizenship termination languish at many American consulates prior to their processing. This depicts the reasons for adopting the permanent residence for the emigrants (Yang 7). Furthermore, the fiscal guidelines results to barriers thus inefficiency in international trading. With the accelerating growth in globalization, the America’s future competitiveness is likely to halt due to such policies.

The policies enacted during the great recession period are likely to cause long-term consequences. According to Gale and Auerbach (2), the U.S national expenditure would tremendously grow in the next ten years. The 2009 fiscal year estimates indicated a growth in the total fund utilized for medical care purposes thus the imbalances amid the revenues and spending in future. However, the CBO professionals argued that, cutting down the expenditure on medical care, would help reduce the fiscal gap (Gale

[supanova_question]

The Psychology of Serial Killers Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Demographics of Serial Killers in the US

Lack of Sympathy

A Common Background

What Motivates a Serial Killer?

Serial Killers and Psychopathic Personality Disorder

References

Introduction Multiple murderers can be grouped into three: mass killer, who murder three or more persons at one time, spree killers, who murder in three or more places with no time difference, and serial killers. However, for this paper, we will focus on serial killers.

A serial killer is generally defined as a person who has killed three or more people over a period usually more than one month, with a space in between the murder, and whose reason for killing can be pegged to psychological factors (Singer and Hensley, 2004).

Other scholars define it as “a series of two or more murders, committed as separate events, usually, but not always, by one offender acting alone” (Morse, 2011). Frequently, a sexual aspect is linked to the murders, but the FBI asserts that reasons for multiple killings include anger, joy, financial motivation, and attention seeking.

Psychologists have for a long time researched the topic of multiple murders, or serial killers. The main questions that psychologists attempt to answer in these studies are: where does the drive to kill originate? Why is the urge to kill more powerful in some individuals than in others?

Can potential murderers be identified and halted before it happens? Do murderers have sympathy for their victims? These are just a fraction of questions that require answers in order to have a complete understanding of the psychology of serial killers. Unfortunately, no concrete answers have been found and research is ongoing (Castle

[supanova_question]

Concept of the Theory of Behaviorism in Psychology Analytical Essay best essay help: best essay help

The theory of behaviorism tries to explain how human behaviors are molded and the effects that the inborn and social environments have on once behavior; behavior can be defined as a systematic and observable manner of doing things without much of internal mental state consideration, a person’s behavior becomes his habit (Staddon

[supanova_question]

Female Sexuality and Gender Politics in “A fine, A private Place” by Diane Ackerman and “Play-by-Play” by Joan Murray Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

The poems “A fine, A private Place” by Diane Ackerman and “Play-by-Play” by Joan Murray are both concerned with the theme of female sexuality. “A Fine, A Private Place” utilizes the third person narrative voice to express the memories of a woman who fondly remembers a lovemaking experience she had with an unidentified male lover by the shores of an unidentified ocean/sea.

However, the woman reminiscing was at first none the wiser about her lover’s intentions – he had to ask twice before she could understand the nature of his request and intensions (first stanza), and before she realized his manhood was hard: an indication of lovemaking desire.

However, the subsequent lovemaking experience as reflected from the woman’s voice was mutually consented, and the lovers made love intensely and with deep feelings for each other. In “Play-by-Play”, the omniscient narrator poses rhetorical questions as the narrator watches a group of men playing softball and analyses the secrete sexual thoughts and desires of the women nearby(both old and young), as they secretly admire the men’s bodies and reflect on the men’s sexual appeal.

The two poems suggest that female sexuality can be, and is, as expressive as male sexuality. In “A Fine, A private Place”, the female voice expresses the desires and thoughts of a woman during and after a lovemaking experience. These reminisces convey the idea that the female partner is not a passive player during the act of lovemaking, but is an equal partner with emotions and desires too, which have to be fulfilled and catered for in the entire lovemaking process.

The male player remains unnamed and unidentified – ironically, the last line of stanza three has the woman wondering who the man was, yet the woman is able to make love to a point of female climax and complete satisfaction. In the last line of stanza four, the woman reaches her climax as her loins roar and she pants in climactic excitement. The fact that the woman is able to be expressive sexually with a male who is not necessarily her husband portrays a woman who has taken control of her sexuality.

The woman in the poem is not tied down to certain societal expectations that women should be a passive player in both the courting/dating scene and in the act of sex/lovemaking itself (Markle 48). The woman in “A fine, A Private Place” is sexually expressive and is able to take charge of her sexual desires and her own path to sexual fulfillment.

In the poem “Play-by-Play”, the omniscient narrator also highlights the sexuality of a woman being as expressive as that of a man. In the first line of the first stanza, the narrator wonders whether it would surprise the young men playing softball to discover that the women around them are admiring and discussing their sexual appeal.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the second stanza, the narrator further asks rhetorically, but poignantly, whether the men would take offence (as many women do) if they were to know that the women were lusting after them. In these expressive questions, the narrator brings outs the voice of women’s sexuality that has been previously unheard of or ignored. The questions point to the fact that the woman’s desire for sex and the pre-lovemaking bodily admiration for a potential lover is not a preserve of men.

The narrator is not condoning the act of men looking lustily at a woman, as men have been doing for generations. However, the narrator brings out the fact that a woman, too, has very similar feelings and even lusts for her lover, only that the woman prefers to do her sexual longing and lusts in a manner that does not necessarily cause her potential lover public humiliation- a point men should borrow.

The narrator in “Play-by-Play” further busts the female sexuality myth that has long been held – that once a woman reaches her sixties, (past menopause); her sexual desire is non-existent. The omniscient narrator indicates that the old women in their sixties who are also watching the men play softball are actively analyzing the sexual appeal of the softball players, just as much as the young virile women drinking wine and reading books a little further in the field.

The narrator further vouches for the women in their sixties as being the best-placed persons to speak on the matter of a man’s sexual appeal, since, as the narrator states in the second stanza; their experience has been horned through years of being with different lovers.

Again, the fact that these women in their sixties are shown as not having been involved with one lover – or one husband, but are portrayed as having experimented with different lovers, depicts female sexuality as not dissimilar to that of men. The act of old men admiring young women is considered ‘natural’ in a macho male society, but in the poem “Play-by-Play”, the old women are comfortably admiring young men, and have had different lovers, just as men in their sixties would.

These women represent a sexually expressive generation of women. Similarly, in the poem “A Fine, A private Place”, the woman reminiscing on her lovemaking encounter also highlights that, by virtue of her reminiscing, she is currently not in contact with that particular lover. Additionally, one can speculate that she has made love to other men, or is currently courting another man, thus her sexual experiences are varied; therefore, the woman is sexually liberated.

Therefore, both the poems “A Fine, A Private Place,” and “Play-by-Play” portray female sexuality in a much different light than what female sexuality has been thought of, especially by men keen to preserve the status quo and relegate women to secondary and passive roles in sex and lovemaking situations.

We will write a custom Essay on Female Sexuality and Gender Politics in “A fine, A private Place” by Diane Ackerman and “Play-by-Play” by Joan Murray specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Because sexuality is dictated by various historical, social, political, and economic factors, sexuality can be, and has been, used as a tool to subjugate women in all these realms. The subjugation has always been propagated on the myth that women are not sexually expressive. The matter of consent before a lovemaking act has been tackled in “A Fine, A Private Place”. The woman’s lover is portrayed as being mindful of his lover’s feelings and satisfaction throughout the lovemaking process.

In the first stanza, he asks twice before he obtains consent from the woman, and throughout and after the lovemaking act, he further seeks to know whether she is fine and satisfied. Since sexuality is dictated by gender roles, the secondary role of the woman in society is usually transferred to the lovemaking process and her consent on whether she desires to make love or not is never sought – she is viewed as being ever ready, or is expected to be ever ready.

This mentality plays a role in men not being overly concerned with the beastly act of rape or defilement. The poem “A Fine, A private Place” vouches for seeking the consent of the woman, and the woman’s equal status in the lovemaking process. Therefore, sexual expressiveness is parallel to women’s liberation and development within the society.

Furthermore, because the woman is expected to play a subservient role in sex, her opinion on whether her lover or husband uses a condom and on the more significant way of family planning is ignored.

In both poems, sexual expressiveness in the women in the poems points to the need for the women to be recognized as equal partners in not only the lovemaking process, but also in the significant issue of family planning. Women in many third world countries are saddled with child after child even when their mental and physical energies for child bearing and rearing are exhausted (Manderson, Rae Bennett, and Sheldrake 184).

This occurs due to the social and political norms in such countries that reinforce the notion that women have no role in the entire family making process. The family making process is intimately linked to sex and sexuality, thus women’s sexuality is an important social, political, and economic entity. Such practices leave the women in these countries socially, politically, and economically disadvantaged.

In conclusion, the poems “A Fine A Private Place” and “Play-by-Play” portray female sexuality as present, real, expressive, and even honorable. The role of a woman as an equal partner to the man in the sexual realm, as the poems advocate, is the first step in achieving social, political, and economic advancement for women.

Works Cited Manderson, Lenore, Rae Bennett, Linda, and Sheldrake, Michelle. “Sex, Social Institutions, and Social Structure: Anthropological Contributions to the Study of Sexuality.” Annual Review of Sex Research 10.6 (1999): 184.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Female Sexuality and Gender Politics in “A fine, A private Place” by Diane Ackerman and “Play-by-Play” by Joan Murray by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Markle, Gail. “Can Women Have Sex Like a Man? Sexual Scripts in Sex and the City.” Sexuality

[supanova_question]

Democracy Concepts and Principles Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Argument for democracy

Argument against democracy

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Democracy refers to as a form of government whereby the citizens have the right to contribute in making decisions that affect their lives. These rights and freedom are demonstrated through their participation in national debates, proposals development and in passage of important laws and legislations (Mulligan 20). Democracy also to some extend encompasses economic, social and cultural aspects, which enable or rather, enhance freedom and equality in making certain choices.

It also ensures that citizens engage in a free and fair process of political systems by choosing their own representative without any harassment whatsoever. Therefore, democracy fosters transparency, equality and freedom to all the citizens of a given state. In terms of its meaning and application, democracy although has no specific definition, has aroused different opinions and arguments among various personalities with some arguing for and some against it.

Argument for democracy Democracy is seen as the fundamental principal of upholding the rights of people. The proponents of democracy argue that, through democracy, citizens are accorded the freedom to participate on issues concerning their country enjoying a peaceful coexistence as the rule of law applies (Decker and Lim 170).

Therefore, democracy ensures that equality of all the citizens regardless of their language, color ethnicity or any other attributes that may be used upon a given person to deny him his rights is binding. This form of government is therefore seen as the most preferable for states as it has a big room for autonomy. The democratic form of government seems important in ensuring stability, peace, growth and development of a nation.

Countries, which have different ethnic groups have a higher chance of falling in civil wars because of fight over resources and political leadership. In democratic countries, such instances are minimal as the society coexists on the same level. Such differences for instance ethnicity remain covered in the constitutions, which provide freedom of movement to all citizens and which accords rights of every individual to live everywhere.

Therefore, democracies rarely experience political instability or wars because they are united through well-structured systems, which accord equal rights to the citizen of a given state. Furthermore, democracies remain vital because they give the citizens an opportunity to engage in important issues like legislations that affects them. Such freedom and room ensures that people’s ideas and views are used to form the basis of decisions hence helping in ensuring transparency, farness and justice amongst others.

Argument against democracy On the other hand, those against democracy have raised an alarm of certain types of democracies, which do not provide freedom, and equality to their citizens as expected. This arises especially when certain democracies are not well-structured therefore leaving some gaps to be misused by those in power.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, a democracy that is structured in a way that it deny its people from participating in important legislations processes and those whereby some braches of governments interfere with the separation of powers in order for their own favors are not democracies as the repercussions are dreadful. Such democracies are prone to be affected with rampant cases of corruptions, violations of human rights and impunity because of toothless legislative process and protection of certain individuals from facing the rule of law.

Such democracies therefore experience poor governance and therefore do not show any growth or development. Although the majority rule stands out as a phrase used often in democracy, it can also be oppressed by the tyranny of the majority in circumstances where there is absence of constitutional protection and governmental protection of groups and individuals in a given state.

For instance, in democracies, which have a larger majority agreeing to certain issues pertaining to them, they may turn out as oppressive and retrogressive to the minorities.

This clearly demonstrates some weaknesses in democracies implying that democracies lack of perfect per se. Democracy may also be hindered by the people themselves when they do not follow their own conscience or instincts in making decision in political and any legislative processes (Altindag and Mocan 111). There exist various variables influencing their instincts or thoughts like media, and key political leaders making the people to fail exercising their constitutional rights based on their perceptions and opinions.

Such occurrences also demonstrate that democracy is not actually practiced but is just a tool to cover the evils that are being perpetrated by certain governments. An economist like Milton Friedman also criticizes democracies based on its efficiency. For instance, where voters make political decisions without being informed, they remain unaware of many political issues, which make them to be biased on the things or knowledge they posses hence makes decisions which are not well thought out.

Conclusion Based on the expositions made in the paper, it seems evident that many states stand committed towards attaining democracy. As they crave to attain democracy, it is important for the governments to be aware of what democracy entails in order to be able to uphold to it. The proponents of democracy argue on how it promotes freedom, equality and majority rule, which are good concepts and leadership principles.

On the other hand, democracy has its stinky side if it is not well implemented and structured: it turns out to be a bogus good for nothing form of government. Democracies may misuse their power by using the opportunity to manipulate and oppress the citizens intelligently. It is therefore important that states, which embrace democracy, abide by the rule of law providing leadership that is free from oppression and manipulation as opposed to autonomy and openness.

We will write a custom Essay on Democracy Concepts and Principles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Altindag, Duha and Mocan, Naci. Joblessness and Perceptions about the Effectiveness Of Democracy. Journal of Labor Research 31.2 (2010): 99-123.

Decker, Jessica and Lim, Jamus. Democracy and trade: an empirical study. Economics Of Governance 10.2 (2009): 165-186.

Mulligan, Casey. Social Security and Democracy. Journal of Economic Analysis

[supanova_question]

The Belief in God Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Arguments for the belief in God

Arguments against the belief in God

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Arguments have been propounded on whether God exists in reality or merely in the human mind. The two major schools of thought are: belief in the existence of God and the belief that the universe just happened. Within these two schools, again, justifications differ. This work argues in favour of the existence of God, borrowing a lot from the arguments of St Anselm.

In debating the existence of God, St Anselm has borrowed a lot from the bible and from nature as well. He has given examples of the natural events and logical arguments all in support of the idea of the existence of God (Berkhof 36).

Arguments for the belief in God To begin with, St Anselm argues that God’s existence is a reality in the human understanding. The existence of this idea in the human mind, according to this argument, means that there is such a possibility. If there were no such a possibility, then even the thought would not be existing (Berkhof 45).

A different look at the idea revolves around the possibility of God’s existence. Since the arguments for the existence bears no fundamental contradictions, and therefore a logical possibility, then God might be existing in reality. Contradictions in philosophy come about when logical flow lacks in an argument.

For instance, a phenomena existing and not existing at the same time, results into fallacious arguments. The concept of God is free from any form internal contradictions, because by the mere mention one gets an idea of what is meant, the idea of an omnipresent, omniscient, and omnipotent Being (Berkhof 47).

A further argument for the existence of God is derive from a point of an already belief in the existence of God. St Anselm argues that the idea of the existence of God is acceptable. This being the case therefore, that God exists in our minds, and that humanity acknowledges that God is greater that humanity, then God must be existing in reality.

Whatever exists exclusively in our understanding should be, logically, greater than whatever exists merely in the spirit, that is, in the minds. The existence of God is justified in the sense that existence in the mind as a concept limits the idea of God already in the minds of people (Berkhof 49).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Arguments against the belief in God If God were to exist in our mind and not in reality, then the many attributes given to him would be baseless. More so, it would be less convincing in theoretical terms, and even prayers made in God’s name would not be as emotional. Therefore, the thinking that God exists in spirit can only be strengthened by an imagination of a physical God, and thus the real nature of God’s existence.

Should this argument be adopted, then it follows automatically that God exists and that he is greater than humanity. Supposing that the existence of God was considered in light of the argument that God exists in the mind but not in the physical world, then it would mean that God is a Being, above whom there is another being. In logical sense, this argument is a contradiction, standing contrary to the belief that God is omnipotent (Toner 103).

It is also possible that there has to be a moving mover, a Being greater than all other beings, a Being that made all others in to motion. According to St Thomas of Aquinas, to end the long causality chain, there has to be an end, and this end, the Prime Mover, is God. Alongside this argument is an argument that there is always an efficient cause.

A phenomenon cannot by any understanding be its own efficient cause. To put this argument of an efficient cause to rest, St Thomas of Aquinas suggests the existence of God, the beginning of everything there is in the universe (Toner 104).

The concept of possibility and necessity as argued by St Thomas is yet another way of arguing the case. Every thing that exists must have of necessity, a source. In other words, everything possible must, be necessity, have a cause, as nothing can cause itself. Only God caused himself, and all other things are traced back to God. God is the Being that does not need another pre-existing phenomenon to come to existence (Toner 107).

Conclusion The existence of God is further justified by a design-based argument. That nature is well planned and well balanced, that things happen in routine basis, which would have otherwise been impossible were it not that there is a greater Being who orders the universe. There are many things that lack intelligence, but act intelligently. This means that all these have a force behind them, and the force is arguably God (Berkhof 67).

The above arguments lead to a conclusion that God exists, and that he is the all powerful God, the author and finisher of all under and above the sun. Therefore, God does not only exist in the mind, but also in reality.

We will write a custom Essay on The Belief in God specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Berkhof, L. “Systematic Theology.” Grand Rapids (1939). Print.

Toner, Patrick. “The Existence of God.” The Catholic Encyclopedia. Vol. 6 (1909). print.

[supanova_question]

Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl by Harriet Jacobs Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Slavery is an emotive issue which is worth studying. The period under which this slavery was practiced formed a sad epoch in the life of many. Slavery has, thus evoked varied feelings and expressions that reflected what many went through. This is because slavery had a great impact on the people and the nation of America as a whole. This paper will look at the various aspects of slavery.

Slavery in the South It is recorded that slavery started at around 1619. By this time the colonists had large farms of tobacco operational. Tobacco plants were being planted around that year. We are told that around five years later, the first batch of slaves was brought in aboard a ship. These were about 20 Africans who were designated to work as servants in the tobacco firms. After these, the number of slaves brought in began to soar[1]. At one time in the year 1617, it is said, about 3000 African slaves were in Virginia.

Due to the exponential rise in the number of slaves, many legislators began to craft legislation that sought to restrict the rights of the slaves. The slaves were taken as property which could be retained or disposed off at their masters’ will. This meant that owners could now sell the slaves at their own volition. By 1700s there were, thus, a huge number of slave-owners engaged in buying and selling of slaves.

Records show that slave trade in the south was so perilous; slaves were treated cruelly. They were highly discriminated against.

As farming shifted from tobacco to cotton farming the demand for slaves continued. Some of the problems these slaves faced included no pay despite having worked for long hours, poor diet, etc. They also did not get proper housing; they lived in shanties and other forms of dehumanizing settlements, yet the economy of the region depended heavily on them.

The labor was hard as every one of the slaves was assigned duties. For instance, women did household chores such as cooking, clearing the houses of their masters. Men got trained for menial jobs such as carpentry and even masonry as a larger percentage of them were farm laborers[2].

From the life of a Slave Girl, Jacobs introduces her story by giving a brief background of what the situation was. She says that having been born a slave girl, she never knew of the impact of slavery until she was past six years of age. Her father had been trained as a carpenter. He was so skillful that he worked as “the head workman”.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From the introduction that Jacobs provides we learn of what went through the mind of most slaves. For instance she reveals her father’s wishes. She says that her father always longed for the period when he would be free to do whatever he wished. What is ironical is that after working, instead of being paid by his mistress, he was instead the one who paid the mistress two hundred dollars per year. He also did not have a right to his own children. He tried fruitlessly to purchase his own children.

Slave Trade and Colonial Society To establish slavery, the colonial society served as a platform through which the trade could prosper. For instance the colonies to a large extent were autonomous. A good illustration can be drawn from the colonies of Virginia and Maryland[3]. For instance in Maryland, the house of delegates, though part of the British imperial system, was autonomous.

So was the Virginia House of Burgesses. So when it came to legislation. these autonomous colonies could pass whatever they deemed crucial to their own interests. Slaves were also moved from West Indies. There was, however, fierce competition for slaves from the Caribbean and Brazilian farmers. They needed more slaves. To counter this, planters from North America encouraged slaves to have families. Thus, they encouraged buying of slave families.

Slave numbers differed greatly in the colonies. Blacks were in some areas outnumbering the whites. By this, the preservation of their culture was enhanced[4]. The few slaves who stayed in the North stayed in their masters’ homes. For example around 1746 slaves formed about 20% of the New York’s population. Here, they equally worked as domestic servants, some worked on ships, while others worked as apprentices.

However, instances of resistance did not miss. Though they used passive resistance by things such as pretending to be sick, breaking work implements, etc, the Stonno Rebellion that took place in South Carolina was quite a rebellion to behold. It is recorded that approximately one hundred slaves clashed with and killed twenty whites. These slaves were also killed in turn. However, this rebellion did not end there; many rebellions were sparked in many other places in the subsequent years.

Agriculture Since most colonists ventured in Agriculture, though tobacco had remained the main crop that most farmers preferred, the need for other crops and unstable prices many left for other activities such as fish, lumbering. In essence, many farmers diversified their farming[5]. Land was quite limited in the North but the South enjoyed abundant farming fields. These even attracted Germans and the Scotts. The interior provided them with enough land. They, therefore, ventured into farming that could also support them.

Industrialization also made the entrenchment of slavery possible. For instance in the 1700s the cotton gin was invented. This was a machine that speeded up the cleaning of cotton. With the introduction of this machine, most farmers started making a lot on money. With such growth in returns, there was need for more slaves as more land was bought for planting more cotton. It was around 1820s that cotton production became a leading export earner for the US.

We will write a custom Essay on Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl by Harriet Jacobs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Slave Life Slave life had a great impact on the family. The role of the family was what southerners highly appreciated and sought to protect. So population including the white, the slaves and even the free cherished the institution of family. Many felt that family was crucial for the emotional and physical growth, which could in the end bring a sense of comfort to the people. So family life was an ideal sought by all these groups that lived in the South[6].

Jacobs (8) in Life of a Slave Girl gives a vivid experience of how she stayed with the family members including her grandmother. This maternal grandmother happened to be the daughter of one of the planters in South Carolina. She gives the harrowing account through which the grandmother went through. For instance she vividly narrates how at one time she was set free only to be recaptured and sold to other purchasers. But the grandmother was also intelligent and dutiful.

She could engage in cake cooking, cracker making and even at some time she would serve as a nurse. But though she was allowed to produce and keep some of the profit that emanated from what she sold, her major intension was to buy her children. Yet also, with all these money, she did not succeed to buy all her children. Her favorite child was sold out but this did not deter her from soldiering on.

Many slaves in Virginia struggled to have their families intact. Though the privileges sought remained elusive for many slaves. The slaves were under constant pressure that threatened their very family fabric they yearned to uphold. For example, Jacobs in her story, tells of how her maternal grandmother could struggle with saving a very small fraction to buy off her children.

What is more, she tells of how her grandmother’s hard savings were taken by the wife of the slave owner with a promise to return. This never happened as no slave had rights. In fact where there was a pact of any sort with the slave owner, it was never honored[7]. The slave ended up the loser. This situation was quite disheartening to the slaves as they did not have control over anything: their family, their hard earned cash, their destination etc. All that prevailed was being subjected to exploitation and degrading lifestyle.

The slave masters interfered in the family lives of the slaves that even most of these masters chose partners for their slaves. Slaves were not allowed to freely choose their marriage partners.

Dr Flint in the Life of a Slave girl epitomizes the poor view towards slaves. Jacobs (35) tells of how she fell in love with a colored carpenter. Under Dr Flint such a union was not going to succeed. By this, one sees how the masters maintained a strong stranglehold on the slaves. Slaves had no choice to marry the love of their hearts.

Even the mistresses were equally vicious. For example, we are told of how the mistress had once abused a young girl who had told her that a colored man wanted to marry her. She had thus retorted, “I will have you peeled and pickled, my lady, if I hear you mention that subject again”. The relationship did not continue. Brent herself was not allowed to get married to a free slave (36).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl by Harriet Jacobs by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It was common place for the slave masters to make choices for their slaves. They also controlled the relationships. For instance, they could separate the couples they had previously united at will. To further debase the slaves, some slave owners imposed extra-marital partners on the slaves.

The children that the slaves had could be sold at will by the masters. They virtually had control over everything that had to do with the slaves. This, they did, to gain economically. So the slaves did not know their next destination; they were never sure of tomorrow. What they went through was a whole life of anxiety and trauma. This constant torture was what many slaves had to live through.

History has it that the biggest blow happened in Virginia when a lucrative slave trade meant that slaves being sold from Virginia to other parts in the South. This led to husband being separated from wife, child from mother and so on. The kinship networks that had developed over years were completely shattered. Many slaves felt like they were not human beings.

This forced movement shattered that the kinship unity that had taken years to build. It is believed that between 1850 and 1860 over sixty eight thousand slaves had been moved from Virginia to other parts meant that many children became like orphans. The family fabric broke.

Accounts are also given of how the slaves who remained behind got mistreated[8] . They could be lashed with whips. Some children bore scars out of being exposed to dangerous household chores without any form of adult supervision as their parents had been sold out elsewhere.

It should also be noted during the era of slave trade, child rearing was done by members of the community such that in case parents were out for work, other members of the extended family would step in. But, now this could not work since most kinship ties had been shattered through the forced movement of the slaves. Thus, many children became parentless while others became orphans[9].

It is only after some of the experiences emanating from the effects of forced immigration that set out to encourage slave mothers to have complete control of their children’s upbringing. The fathers were denied this right. So mothers physically and emotionally played a major role in the lives of their children unlike the fathers. Actually, the slave mothers were considered the head of their slave families, thus, being the primary care-giver to their children. The slave fathers’ role in the upbringing of their children was greatly diminished.

There were also notable sexual advances made by the master to their slaves. The masters could for instant target married slaves. These sexual advances and interference caused a lot of pain and discord among the slaves. This is especially so keeping in mind the powerlessness with which the slave males felt. However in certain instance the slave males could react and this drew retaliatory responses. So the revolters would be lashed, forced to separate or some even got murdered for their resistance to these advances.

Since most slaves could not hit back at their masters, they in turn heaped all the frustration to their spouses. Sometimes when the wives told their husbands what they had gone through, the husbands were powerless to hit back at the masters’ advances. So, many female slaves underwent constant sexual abuse from their masters with no place to go for recourse.

Many would therefore resort to tactics of even lying to their spouses to avoid the suspicions. But the result would be wives giving birth to children of mixed color. Out of such frustration some slave couples resorted to alcoholism, violence and even adulterous escapades. Others lost faith in the institution of marriage completely.

Slave Law The laws governing slavery were several and they determined the future of slavery. For instance one Virginian law stated that Africans were to be servants for life. One ridiculous statute even went further to bequeath the role of family headship to the mother.

It thus demanded that if an Englishman had a child with a black slave, then the child would only be considered free depending on the status of the mother. One sees that the traditional role of the father as the head of the family was reversed here. This went against the tradition of most slaves.

What is even more frustrating was that most colonial legislatures eventually adopted this. Eventually, the children that were born out of these slave mothers would be in turn be the property of the slave owners. To save the amount they could incur in buying slaves some slaves could prefer impregnating the slaves.

The laws actually advanced the institutionalization of slavery. This was achieved through preferment of harsh penalty; families of slaves were taken up by the families of their masters. The roles of the family heads were taken by the master. However, the laws restricted between whites and black, mulatto and even Indian descent. If such a situation would occur then the punishment was banishment from Virginia forever.

Every slave state had own legislation developed since 1660s. There were courts established to deal with issues to do with slavery. Thus each state had its unique laws governing the issue of slavery. Some of the laws for instance demanded that the slaves had no right to ownership of anything including own children.

They were not allowed to own property or enter into a contract. Thus any contract made that included a slave, was deemed null and void. Thus, since marriage is usually considered a contract between two consenting parties, the masters invoked this statute even dismantle the unions that existed between the slaves[10] .

Thus, husbands would be separated from wife at the master’s will. So, parents’ only love could not be free to marry her because she was a slave. According to the law if the marriage could have been successful then it meant that their children would be considered slaves as the law prescribed that the children always assume the status of the mother (who was a slave) and not the father (in this case a free person)[11]

Slaves who faced charges got tried in non-jury courts. One can see that the intention here was to deny them a fair hearing. In most cases, the sentences were handed with a view to serve as an example to any slaves who could venture in crime the others had ventured in. Thus, the punishments were dire.

Many would be imprisoned for life while other would even be hung. The long life sentence would be accompanied by lashes and hard labor. Some slaves were even burned at the stake in the full glare of the public. Others were castrated on top of whips.

By a1681 law, it was legislated that any children that were born of white servant women were to be considered free. Otherwise the law was clear that the status of slaves was to be one that never changed[12]. Slaves were to be slaves for life. In Maryland, marriage between white women and black men were highly prohibited. To discourage this, the law made it clear that any white lady who got married to a black slave became slave herself.

Fighting Back Many slaves bore this frustration with great anger and frustration. They plotted resistance. Many slaves like Denmark Vesey plotted the capture of Charleston but one of the slaves revealed the plot and this ended in 36 of the slaves being captured and sentenced to death. Another one, Nat Turner organized a revolt. This revolt led to the death of many white masters. Though many fought back the laws then made it very difficult for them to achieve their goals[13].

Some slaves, faced with such frustration ended up taking away their own lives. Jacobs tells of a lady who threw herself into the rivers after she was being pursued to be stripped and whipped for a minor mistake and therefore she threw herself into the river[14].

Conclusion The American slavery was quite an emotive issue. Most slaves were black, save for a few exceptions. Thus the degrading spectacle that many underwent greatly affected them psychologically. Even after being declared free, many former slaves still exhibited a certain taint of inferiority. They lacked the confidence after harrowing acts of degradation they had witnessed.

However, some slave owners educated some slaves but with the intention of having them serve them better. They were therefore exposed to their culture, religion and even discipline to make them submissive. The slaves were made to believe that their way of life was inferior. But this did not last long as witnessed from the revolts that ensued. Actually, what Jacobs has shown in her autobiography is worth pontificating about.

Bibliography Deyle, Steven. Carry Me Back: The Domestic Slave Trade in American Life. New York: Oxford University Press, 2005.

Gudmestad, Robert H. A Troublesome Commerce: The Transformation of the Interstate Slave Trade. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 2003.

Jacobs, Harriet. Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl. Web.

Rawley, James A.,

[supanova_question]

Dr. Tram and the Vietnam Conflict Essay best essay help

Dr. Tram wrote a definitive book about the Vietnam War from around April 1968 when she worked as the chief medical officer in a field hospital in central Vietnams mountains (Tram 2). She volunteered to offer medical services to the soldiers in the war torn areas, and mostly she wrote down her experiences in her diary.

In this diary she described her daily encounters with soldiers, her feelings about their pain, and feelings about the American soldiers among others. Dr. Tram made a difficult decision to stay with the soldiers in the war fields, I say this because despite her rich background, she took great risks unexpected of women in her times, and I believe if she were alive today she would have earned a place in the Vietnamese history books.

Dr. Tram’s gives us different view of the Vietnam War, it gives a victims view of the war and the perpetrators. Being a North Vietnamese she made a very bold decision to go to the war torn South Vietnam, since at that time North Vietnam was a different country from the south (Mydans 34).

She specifically went to Quang Ngai province to work as a doctor in the hospitals and clinics in the areas of the Duc Pho areas mostly controlled by the National Liberation Front or the Viet Cong. Unfortunately she was ambushed and killed at her twenty-seventh age when she was returning to her hospital from one of the clinical visits.

From her perspective we learn of how the locals felt about the American involvement in the war, we learn that she hated the Americans with a passion for the killings and bombings they did to their country, for maiming her country men and in general were of the pain they underwent in such periods. The abrupt stop in her work shows us how life can be cruel and unfriendly and the war never cares about any one.

We also realize that in these times she missed her mothers love and she was weary and always longing for her mothers caring arms (Tram 2). Despite the American soldiers being perceived by the rest of the world to be hard fighting, hard loving and hard living; we realize they were brutal as it is relieved in the book. It seems as if she was driven by an inner desire to love and care that made her risk her life in the war fields.

Dr. Tram was driven by love and passion for her country men and a desire to see them liberated. She would often stay in Hanoi to attend to the patients and soldiers and every weekend visit her family in the evacuation sites (Mydans 35). She felt the pain, the insecurities and the fear the soldiers experienced and in most cases she would criticize herself for never rising to occasion or being weak while the rest sacrificed their youth for the sake of liberation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Due to this passion and love she operated on the wounded soldier in unimaginable primitive conditions and was often without drugs that could save their lives. She was always at pain when she saw them die in her hands when she could nothing to save them. She sacrificed her life for the sake of the soldiers and for the sake of her country.

Due to this sacrifice she has entered into the official pantheon of wartime heroes that is inclusive of a number of brave young women who also risked their lives. A hospital has been built and a stature erected in memory of her at the remote site of her clinic in Quang Ngai Province.

I believe if she was alive she would a living testimony and icon of many, and probably she would scold the current selfish regime in which people are mindful of themselves more than their fellow countrymen. She would greatly oppose the trend where the people do not sacrifice for their fellows but sacrifice their fellows instead. She also might probably not agree with the much honor bestowed upon her at the expense of the very many that died in the war.

In conclusion Dr. Tram’s diary gives us the real picture of the war, by describing the situations the soldiers encountered, the longings for their loved ones, and the harsh conditions they were in. It also shows how love for one’s country can make him make a big sacrifice for its benefit.

Works Cited Dr. Tram, Dang Thuy. Last Night I Dreamed of Peace. Trans. Pham, Andrew. New York, NY: Three Rivers Press. 2007. Print.

Mydans, Seth. “Diary of North Vietnam Doctor Killed in U.S. Attack Makes War Real.” New York Times 26 Jun. 2006: 34-35. Print.

I would like to thank the following person for helping me put this paper together: Chen Xu, worked with me 4 hours.

We will write a custom Essay on Dr. Tram and the Vietnam Conflict specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More De Liang Liang, worked with me 4 hours.

[supanova_question]

“Al-Zawahiri appointed al Qaeda’s new leader” Essay (Article) essay help: essay help

The essay is a critical analysis of the article titled “Al-Zawahiri appointed al Qaeda’s new leader” which was posted on the jihadist website published on June 16 2011 by the CNN Wire Staff. The article talks about international relationship between American and the Islam community which has been viewed for the past decades as deteriorating as results of terrorism.

It is worth noting that the issue of terrorism has been a hard nut to crack in the entire world and has continued to cause sleepless night to a number of countries (Shimko 127). Since the death of Osama Bin Laden, the leader of al-Qaeda’ the group was reluctant to accept his death.

After consultation and coming to terms with his death, they settled on Al-Zawahiri his long term deputy to take charge of the group, “Hereby the General Command of the Qaeda al-Jihad — and after the end of the consultations — we declare that Sheikh Dr. Abu Muhammad Ayman al-Zawahiri…” (CNN Wire Staff par. 4). The individual has been linked with the attacks in Kenya and Tanzania leaving close to 300 people dead and over 5000 injured.

The United States of America government placed a reward of 25 million dollars for information leading to his arrest. During an attacked launched by the U.S in Afghanistan, his wife and three of his children died. From the article it is evident that Al-Zawahiri hailed the fallen al Qaeda leader Osama bin Laden. He said in reference to Osama “went to his God martyred because he said no to America” (CNN Wire Staff par. 5)

The appointed leader had harsh words for the Pakistan government and claimed that Americans are not fighting al Qaeda who will not stop at anything other than confronting their oppressors.

The posting although did not talk of pro-democracy uprising, it is clear that their policies will not be shifted and promised to support such groups as Taliban in fighting NATO and U.S. analysts hold the opinion that Al-Zawahiri will have a difficult task in leading the group. They assert that he has no charisma as that of his predecessor. My view however is contrary to theirs.

Having in mind that he was born in a wealthy family just like Bin Laden, and then he will have an easy time motivate the group and give them direction since Bin Laden did a lot of work in shaping the entire group as well as imposing chain of command. Despite the claim that he commands no loyalty from members, this does not warrant the assumption that he won’t propel the group in carrying out attacks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In my humble view, the leadership of Al-Zawahiri will definitely worsen the relationship of America with other Islamic countries particularly Egypt where the leader has roots. This rests on the view that the membership of the group will expand making American to receive opposition from all quotas.

Interestingly, it is evident that even after the killing of Osama bin Laden, al Qaeda will not stop on their activities and the chances of them revenging are high. However, it is not easy to establish the timeline for the revenge. This thus calls the American authorities to be on alert at all times and change their strategies for curbing terrorism if need be. The following statement summarizes their desire to revenge, “will remain on the path of righteousness as a coherent, solid, cemented rank…” (CNN Wire Staff par. 10)

References Shimko, Keith. International relations: Perspective and controversies. New York: Cengage Learning, 2009. Print.

Al-Zawahiri appointed al Qaeda’s new leader, 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Burning Down of the Village in Platoon Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Background Information

Critical Analysis

Conclusion

Works Cited

Background Information US soldiers went into war in South Vietnam and had the duty to organize how they will attack and outmaneuver Vietnamese soldiers. The US Soldiers were assigned to the 25th Infantry Division and immediately an arrival they started digging foxholes, to shield them against bullets and attacks from enemy soldiers.

This was one of the best platoons stationed in Vietnam but in recent days, it had suffered from heavy combat operations. After this unit was acquainted with the surrounding environment, it was set to carry out its first night ambush. The soldier on watch out fell asleep while the others were preparing themselves and the North Vietnamese Army walked into the ambush site and killed most of the troop members including private Gardner, many others were injured.

After the attacks, the soldiers organized themselves and followed the enemy into the north of their bunker, where along the way they encountered a mutilated body of one of them tied to a post. Unless we understand the major reasons why soldiers decide to become offensive, we should not condemn their actions whenever they are fighting battles which they have slim chances of winning.

As the soldiers were advancing northwards, they came into a village where they believed the Vietnamese soldiers were hiding. They inquired from the villagers about the presence of soldiers in their midst but got no reliable information though they found a lot of food and arms cache hidden there. Suffering from loss of their colleagues to enemies and defeat in combat, the soldiers started murdering and torturing both men and women, they came across(Halberstam 78).

Critical Analysis Sergeant Barnes held hostage one woman and asked her husband information which could help capture their enemies but the husband gave no reliable information and Barnes killed the woman. The soldiers set the whole village on fire as a last attempt to quench their frustration and defeat and they resorted to gang rape of young girls but Sergeant Chris stopped the raping.

A closer look on this scene shows attempts by American soldiers to win war against their enemies but they did not understand the terrain. The Vietnamese soldiers knew their land very well and knew when and where to ambush from.

The Americans lost so many soldiers, they could not outsmart their enemies and so they started the village fire as a last attempt to make their enemies come closer so that the Americans can attack them. The enemies did not respond but attacked the platoon again on yet another patrol and the Americans lost many soldiers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, the soldiers could have started the fire so that they could scare the villagers to reveal information about the whereabouts of the Vietnamese soldiers.

Usually the villagers should have persuaded the soldiers to prevent spread of the fires but the villagers were not shaken by these actions of the Americans and that resulted to deaths of many of the villagers and the total destruction of the entire village. The villagers could not reveal any information, which could lead to the arrest of their own soldiers since they knew that this could lead to severe punishment from their soldiers and further more they respected the security from their own.

Burning down the whole village was meant to show other villagers nearby that American soldiers were very serious in settling for nothing other than cooperation from the civilians to get help to ambush Vietnamese soldiers since they had killed many Americans.

On the other hand, the village, which was burnt is the one where Americans found hidden food and arms cache so they believed that by burning down the whole place, Vietnamese will not find a place for settling down while planning another ambush and this will as well cut off any food supplies they were expecting from villagers.

Burning down the entire village on the other hand was a scheme, which was meant to burn the bodies of the people killed so that no one will have a clear count of the damage done. This was aimed at concealing evidence of the killings (Oliver 98).

Conclusion Soldiers have used the scotched earth policy as a tactic for spreading fear to opponents. This as well helps to deprive off their opponents food and shelter supplies and so the opponents may be weakened in one way or the other and at the same time, the opponents will not find some well-hidden resting place for planning ambushes. This is the same strategy used by Americans to enable them to get time to plan attacks but lack was not on their side since eventually they lost the fight.

Works Cited Halberstam, David. The making of a quagmire. Ed. New York: Knopf, 1988. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Burning Down of the Village in Platoon specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Oliver, Kendrick. The My Lai Massacre in American History and Memory. Manchester, England: Manchester University Press, 2006. Print.

[supanova_question]

Lessons from the dreams of peace Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Thuy’s description

Humanity

Hardworking and sensitive

Caring

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The story is about the Vietnam War and Thuy’s contributions towards peace achievement (Guthrie). The story reflects on a period of high instability as the American troops invaded the South Vietnam city, usually inhabited by poor peasants.

She was amongst the few North Vietnamese readily willing to fight for peace (Guthrie). The phrase “last night I dreamed of peace” was highly utilized during the fight for independence in Vietnam (Tram 2). The idea behind independence is attaining peace and liberty. Therefore, it is important to describe the key lessons learned and virtues illustrated by this story.

Thuy’s description Thuy is the name mostly used by her friends. She was 23 when the American troops attacked the country. Participating in such a difficult undertaking at such tender age was relatively extraordinary (Guthrie). Being acquainted with treating skills as a medical science graduate, she deterministically put her skills in practice.

This depicts how significant it is putting our skills in practice for the benefit of the society. She walked for long miles devoid of knowing what might occur on the way. This immensely depicted her determination in any undertaking she was set to do. Guthrie describes her as a diligent person who never let any patient suffer as long as she could intervene by any means. In the hospitals of the Quang ngai, she could treat 80 seriously wounded soldiers alone (Guthrie).

Humanity The humanity in her culminates to her preaching for peace. In her daily endeavors, she was highly convinced that peace would restore in future. Despite the bombing of the three key hospitals, the burning desire to support lives gave her more strength. It is a lesson for us that challenges are part of life and people should embrace them for a successful end in their accomplishments.

After the destruction of the hospitals, she ended up purchasing some of the necessities for performing the operations (Guthrie). She bought Novocain in place of anesthesia for performing both minor and complicated operations.

Hardworking and sensitive Thuy portrayed hatred for the Americans by regarding them insensitive since they were killing innocent people. She depicted her desire for peace all through the war period. She considered the attackers as inconsiderate since they mercilessly killed young innocent fellows (Guthrie). She willingly devoted herself to saving the dying.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More She extremely wept when defeated to save a dying soldier. Through this, it is clear that life is important thus not advisable terminating it. Additionally, she sympathizes with the Vietnamese soldiers at war. She was empathetic about their situations, which is a virtue lacking in many people (Tram 2). She described them as lonely and missing love from their dear ones. Thuy is sensitive in the sense that she could treat many cases at a time. Therefore, we learn the significance of such a virtue in our lives.

Caring The source highly depicts the high level of intelligence she depicted thus her capacity to perform some extra ordinary duties easily. The idea that she attended a great proportion of soldiers depicted her caring nature, which is important in life. The story also depicts the importance of the parental love (Tram 3).

As indicated in the source, Thuy strongly yearned for the parental care despite her growing age. Through this, it is clear that living alone some times hard thus, the need for someone close to share the challenges in our lives. Thuy finally looses her life while fighting for peace. From Thuy’s experience, it becomes that people should embrace their independence that resulted to peace. This is because many people vanished for its attainment.

Conclusion In summary, the story of Thuy presents numerous lessons that are important in our living. The author describes her as caring, determined, highly sensitive to people’s sufferings, and hardworking. She is a great peacemaker and ready to intervene in the fight, despite the challenges. She works with the goal of saving the soldiers lives with the sole hope of achieving peace in future.

Works Cited Guthrie, John. Last night I dreamed of peace by Dung Thuy Tram. 2007. Web.

Tram, Dung. Last night I dreamed of peace: the diary of Dung Thuy Tram. 1968. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on Lessons from the dreams of peace specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Analysis of the Book “International Business” by Charles W. L. Hill Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

International Trade Theory

Internalization theory

Vernon’s Product Cycle theory

Limitations

Mercantilism

Theory of Absolute Advantage

References

Introduction International Business has been written by Charles W. L. Hill. This book is not only inspiring but it is also quite enlightening. The author has a Ph.D. in industrial economics from the University of Manchester’s Institute of science and Technology. He has a vast base of knowledge in teaching. This combined with his excellent skills in writing and global consulting has put him in good stead to write this book which a master piece is touching on numerous issues in international business.

The book has tried to explain the interlocking relationships between such factors as the various economic theories, government policies, business strategies, organizational structures etc in influencing the global economy. The author has maintained a detailed integration of the various chapters where great emphasis is laid upon the decision-making implications of every topic that the book covers. This paper will specifically restrain itself to highlighting the most relevant issues covered in the various chapters.

International Trade Theory Several theories about inward Foreign Direct Investment have been advanced. These include; Vernon’s Product Cycle theory, however, the following has also been extensively discussed, Mercantilism, absolute advantage, Comparative advantage, opportunity cost, terms of trade, gains to trade etc (Charles, 2008). This paper will however restrict itself to looking at some theories which have been conceptualized and advanced in relation to inward foreign direct investment (FDI).

Internalization theory This theory was conceptualized by Buckley and Casson (1976). It largely basis its argument by inferring that licensing possesses three main disadvantages when it comes to consolidating and making good use of discovered foreign markets. These disadvantages are as follows;

It reasons out that investing firms stand the risk of transferring vital knowledge, skills and even machinery to potential offshore business rivals.

It also hold the view that through licensing a firms ability to control such vital areas as manufacturing, marketing and strategizing for profit maximization is restricted.

This theory also reasons out that licensing posses a great challenge to a firm when its competitive advantage is less dependent on its products but rather on its management or marketing strategies.

By and by, internalization theory is a relative analytical way of scrutinizing the behavior of Multinational firms. Internalization theory enhances the scrutiny of the competence and helpfulness of different mechanisms that a state can put in place so as to organize o manage financially viable self supporting relationships in international trade.

Rugman (1976) and (1979) have made it quite obvious that Multinational firms have the benefit of accruing a stable flow of income than indigenous firms of comparable size, and are also able to scheme for better industrial conditions in foreign countries.

Having read quite extensively about this theory, I must confess that I am in concurrence with most of the views expressed about about the effects of licensing and impacts of multinationals in FDI but I am of the opinion that this theory fails to recognize the following; It does not put into focus the fact that most of these multinationals repatriate all or most of the accrued profits back to their mother countries leaving the indigenous population with very little or nothing to show for it.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These huge companies some of which has larger turnovers than the GDP of some of the countries they invest in have also been known to subvert the activities of third world governments resulting in untold suffering for the masses there.

Vernon’s Product Cycle theory The theory of international product life cycle was conceptualized in the 1960s by Raymond Vernon. This theory holds the view that a firm commences the exportation of its core products which is followed by a subsequent venture into foreign direct investment as these items of trade take on new dimensions as they move on through different stages of their life cycle. In the long run a nation’s exports will turn into its imports.

Even though this theory was originally modelled around the U.S economy being a major exporter of manufactured goods, other countries have made stringent strides towards industrialization and hence it is applicable elsewhere in the world. In the 60’s, the U.S was the leading exporter but recently it has become a major importer since other countries have become more innovative. To explain this phenomenon, Vernon’s international product life cycle theory makes the following observations;

The early stages of production is characterized by products that are not standardized. This implies that issues such as price elasticity communication within the specific industries and products are clearly inherent. However, as these products start to attain maturity in the market, there is a subsequent change in conditions too.

Standardization starts to take effect and this results into greater demands for these products. With increase in demand, offshore markets are encouraged to produce such goods since conditions there offer better opportunities to cut on the cost of overall production due to cheap labor and availability of raw materials.

Hence, firms from the industrialized nations for instance the US are forced to set up production lines in these emerging offshore economies. This results in a reduction in exports. Further maturity of markets in both the industrialized countries and in the offshore markets translates into more standardization.

With reduced costs of production in the offshore economies, pricing emerges as the main competitive criteria. This eventually prompts the international producers to then start exporting back to the developed countries. Hence, going along the tenets of this theory and the evidence adduced as above, one can correctly infer that the more standardized the product becomes the more likely the location of production will change.

We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of the Book “International Business” by Charles W. L. Hill specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Limitations This theory however has some limitations as follows; First it fails to acknowledge that most of the technologies that are transferred from the developed nations to the less developed nations are more often than not obsolete and insensitive to the conditions on the ground of the adopting countries, Vernon also fails to recognize that there might be challenges posed by laws governing intellectual property when it comes to transfer of technology.

Mercantilism Mercantilism can be defined as an economic doctrine which holds that governments should take a strict control of foreign trade so as to maintain national prosperity and security. It advocates for a positive balance of trade. It had it dominance in western Europe between the 16th and 18th centuries. Though it is frowned upon by most Western governments today, it thrives under the guise of neomercantilism which is usually practiced in many Asian countries.

This was usually characterized by the following ; high tarrifs on manufactured goods, market monopolization, exclusive trade with colonies, huge export subsidies etc. however this theory has several criticisms namely: (john Lock, 1960) argues that prices vary in proportion to the quantity of money. He further argues that the world’s wealth is not fixed but rather it is constantly being increased by labor. The theory also fails to acknowledge the benefits of comparative advantage.

Theory of Absolute Advantage While advancing this theory, Adam Smith was trying to counter mercantilism. It is argued that countries cannot become rich at the same time by following mercantilism due to the fact the exports of one given country are the imports of another. He observes that for nations to attain concurrent wealth, then they need to practice free trade and take advantage of their respective absolute advantages.

However, in my opinion the theory of absolute advantage fails to explain why free trade can be advantageous for some trading partners when for instance one country / trading partner has absolute advantage in producing all the goods.

It is there difficult for countries that are disadvantaged to join the free market and compete with those that are more advantaged. Such countries produce cheap goods that cannot compete with the developed countries. Its hard for such countries to pay for the expensive imports. Some countries are more favored climatically as well as being endowed with natural resources.

References Buckley, P.J.

[supanova_question]

1. discuss the primary goals of vulnerability and remediation domain; why is this important? 100 words length 2. identify the makeup of the digital forensics team. defend your answer. 100 words min custom essay help

discuss the primary goals of vulnerability and remediation domain; why is this important? 100 words length 
2. identify the makeup of the digital forensics team. defend your answer. 100 words minimum 
3. Whitman and mattered (2018) discuss the configuration and change management (CCM) in the implementation of the new system. Why is it important to document such changes in the new system. Who would approve or disapprove such changes? explain your answer 300 words minimum 

[supanova_question]

Evolution of Solar Energy in US Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction Solar energy in the US has gone through various transgressions over the years. This paper looks at the various transgressions that it has undergone. This paper will focus on the evolution of oil as an energy sector in terms of its consumption and production. This will be analyzed using graphs and a discussion of the data provided. A conclusion on the same will be provided at the end of the paper.

Literature The policy of solar energy in the US is established by the federal, public entities and the state that addresses energy issues of production, consumption like the standards on gas mileage. The policy on energy may comprise of international treaties, legislation, energy conservation guidelines, investment incentives and other techniques in public policy. Over the years, some proposals have been made on various mandates.

An example is a proposal that the US should never import a large amount of oil as in 1977 (Parra 85). There has been no policy on oil that is comprehensive in the long-term; although a great concern has been issued on this failure. 1922, 2005 and 2007 saw the passing of three policy Acts on energy. This was made up of a number of provisions for energy conservation for instance Energy Star program and energy development program, which contained financial inducements and incentives and renewable and nonrenewable energy tax incentives.

The United State has not endorsed the Kyoto Protocol since they prefer reduction of carbon emission to be determined by the market so that global warming is reduced to manageable levels. A number of proposals have been made on reforms on energy policies that are aggressive, including the requirement for a decrease of the emissions from carbon dioxide. Cleaner, renewable and sustainable development on energy has also been encouraged.

During the colonial era, policy on US energy was that free timber use for industry and heating. In the course of the 19th century, an approach to coal and its transport use and heating, was highly emphasized. Whales were turned into lamp oil. Gas produced from coal was later limited to lighting use (Bahrman 46).

In 1986, lighting was effected by Natural gas in America. Its importance has grown to usage in the industry, power plants and homes. In 1973, the extraction of natural gas reached its highest level. From then on, the prices have gone up considerably

The US solar energy demands were achieved by coal in the 20th century. Most of the homes in the urban areas had a bin of coal and a furnace of coal. However, demand for petroleum products have surpassed demand for energy produced from coal. This is because they are easy and safe to use and not because they are cheap. Coal has always been cheaper than oil to date. Automobile industry has emerged as the main consumer of oil.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After World War II ended, boilers utilized in heating oil replaced steam engines run on energy derived from coal. Moreover, electricity plants that utilized petroleum were constructed. Later on, electric cars that utilized oil replaced buses run on gasoline

During the energy crisis in 1970, majority of discourses in the US focused on the importance of using solar energy as a viable source of energy. The Federal Energy Department was tasked with the responsibility to formulate strategies that would later be adopted to enhance the use of renewable energy technologies.

For example, the maximum speed allowed for all automobiles was set at 89km/h as one way of reducing demand for oil. This measure would also result in a reduction of the amount of carbon emissions in the environment. In 1978, an energy Act was initiated which resulted to alternative energy forms.

About 84% of US energy is received from fuels. This energy is consumed for industry, domestic use and transport. The rest of its energy is acquired from hydro stations and nuclear stations. The US citizens make up about 4.9% of the world’s total population but the country’s economy uses up to 24% of the total oil produced globally to meet the growing demands of its industrial sector.

On the other hand, the US has a mere 2.9% of the world’s total reserves. Its offshore drilling activities produces a paltry 5.9% of the total world supply.. Oil is mainly consumed in the form of diesel and gasoline for cars, trucks and buses in the US (Parra 78).

Also, the US automobile industry consumes over 60% of the total energy used in the country. The US is also a major producer and exporter of food stuffs. However, in 2008, it started plans to convert over 17% of its grain produce to ethanol to meet energy demands. For example, over 24.9% of corn was converted to ethanol. The percentage the directed corn oil to fuel is, therefore, expected to rise.

Utilities have increased their rates to yield more profits that would offer them a sustained profit, estimated at of 12.7% with respect to cost of operations. Changes in the costs of operation in the production of electricity streamline directly to the consumer. The US government has provided considerably bigger subsidies than to renewable energy in the period of 2002 to 2008.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Evolution of Solar Energy in US specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The production of the world grain went up by 250% when the Green revolution turned agriculture internationally amid 1950 and 1984. Green revolution energy was given by fossil fuels in fertilizer form. Critics of Malthus are thus, rendered irrelevant since the global supply of hydrocarbons continues to increase unabated. For example, the US imports a significant amount of energy from Canada.

Data

Fig. 1

Source: Veziroglu, Nejat. Alternative Energy Sources: Solar energy. Washington: Hemisphere Pub. Corp e

It is evident in the above figure that oil reserves in the US increased up to 1970 and then started to reduce. The level of oil in the reserves has varied over the years. There was minimal consumption of oil up to 1970 when the rates of consumption increased making the level of oil in the reserves, reduce greatly.

Petroleum use had overtaken demand for coal energy in 1950s. The rising demand for oil products in the US was attributed to the discovery of petroleum deposits in Oil abundance Oklahoma California, and Texas. The country was able to use advanced technology to extract oil deposits in these areas at a lower cost.

Fig.2

Source: Veziroglu, Nejat. Alternative Energy Sources: Solar energy. Washington: Hemisphere Pub. Corp

The above figure shows that the production of oil reached its peak in 1970 and started declining. By 2005, the amount of petroleum imported in 2005 doubled the domestic extraction of oil. This increase in imports and production shows how the need for oil has grown and fluctuated over the years.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Evolution of Solar Energy in US by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The increase in oil imports shows how much oil is needed in US for consumption as they are among the leading countries in oil consumption. The rise in oil production by US proves how much oil was produced in the US. As petroleum imports rose, US foreign policy adopted a political tone in the Middle East. The US was more preoccupied with protecting the Persian Gulf while at the same time supported Saudi Arabia, one of the major oil-producing countries in the world

Study Oil occurs naturally, is flammable, and it contains a compound blend of hydrocarbons of different molecular weights, and organic compounds obtained in geologic formations under the surface of the earth. Petroleum deposits are via a drilling process. Afterwards, it is separated and refined through a heating process. There are a number of products such as plastics, kerosene, paints, and fertilizers that are produced from petroleum. It is also applied in the production of a range of materials.

Oil greatly differs in its outlook with regard to its constitution. It is normally dark brown or sometimes black. In the reservoir, it is found combined with natural gas, which creates a gas cap on top of petroleum as it is light (Beattie 41). Oil may also be uncovered in a semi-solid form combined with water and sand.

Oil is mostly used in the production of energy. Over 82% of hydrocarbons found in petroleum are converted into energy fuels such as diesel, jet gas, and petrol. Lighter grades of oil manufacture the harvest of these products, however, the global reserves of oil have been depleted hence oil refineries are gradually having to manufacture oil and bitumen, using very costly and complex methods in the manufacture of the required products.

Since the mid 1950s, petroleum products have been used as the major source of energy because they in plenty of supply, yield more energy and are portable. Oil is the raw material for a number of petroleum is the main source of a number of derivatives such as plastic products, fertilizers, chemicals, pharmaceutical products, among others (Behrman 95). One of the main sites that petroleum deposits are abundant is porous rocks found in the upper part of the earth’s crust.

Oil is a combination of very big numbers of various hydrocarbons; alkanes are molecules that are found commonly. There are different types of oil, based on the diverse mix of molecules that represent the physical and chemical futures of the oil. For example, oil extracted from the earth may differ in terms of color and viscosity. Alkenes are referred to as paraffin and are hydrocarbons that are saturated with branched chain or straight chains that only contain hydrogen and carbon with a general formula of CnH2n 2.

Oil is composed of liquid, solid and gaseous hydrocarbons. A well of oil generates primarily crude oil, with a quantity of gas coming out of the solution can be burned to produce gas. The ratio of hydrocarbons in the oil mixture greatly differs in different fields.

Alkenes and a variety of aromatic hydrocarbons are the major components of petroleum while other organic composites are made up of sulfur, oxygen nitrogen and several metallic elements such as copper and iron. The precise molecular composites greatly vary, but the quantities of chemical components differ over rather narrow boundaries.

There are deteriorating amounts of benchmark oils that are produced every year, so oil is majorly what is delivered. The real oil that is traded may be reduced to Canadian oil delivered at Alberta. The oil industry is engrossed in global processes of refining, extraction, transporting, and exploration, and advertising oil products.

The biggest products in terms of volume are petrol and fuel oil. As noted above a number of household and industrial products such as pesticides, solvents, plastics and pharmaceuticals are made from petroleum. Oil is a vital raw material to majority of industries in the United States and other countries around the world. All economies of the world are run completely on oil. The world’s consumption of energy is accounted for by oil (Parra 56). In consumption, patterns in Central and South America are 44% while in America is 40%.

For example, the US economy used up about 23% of the total world oil supply in 2004 although this figure fell marginally in 2007 to about 20.9%. Majority of the industries operating in the United States are located in California, Nevada, and Washington and Hawaii states. They mainly produce, refine, advertise, transport and distribute petroleum products such as diesel, fertilizers gas and other derivatives to consumers.

Oil has been consumed since the olden days and is very significant across different societies, even in economy, technology and in politics. The rising demand of petroleum is due to the major technological advancement in the automobile industry, the transformation of the aviation sector and the increased use of plastic materials in economic activities. Ignacy Lukasiewicz invented the process of distilling kerosene from petroleum.

This gave a cheaper option in the whaling of oil. There has been a tremendous increase in global demand for oil for lighting purposes in the 21st century. The military hostilities witnessed not only during the World War II but also in the major parts of the Arab world are attributed to oil. During the twentieth century, the exploration of oil in America made the user a leading producer in 1900. As the production, of petroleum in US reached its peak in 1960, but it is the time that US was outdone by Russia and Saudi Arabia.

Today, almost 90% of the fuel needed by vehicles is from oil. 40% of the total consumption of energy in US is met by oil. It is accountable for just 1% of the production of electricity. US are among the top three countries in oil production. Big amounts of the total oil in the world subsist as unconventional sources.

Whereas enormous oil reserves are extracted from oil sands, most notably in the United States, a number of challenges such as logistical and technical still abound since it requires enormous amounts of heat and water to extract petroleum from the earth’s crust. As a result the offshore drill exercise done in the US is not sufficient to meet the country’s enormous demand for petroleum.

This implies that the US has to rely on oil-producing countries such as Saudi Arabia to meet its oil demands. After the downfall, of the pricing systems managed by OPEC in 1985, and a net back pricing experiment that was short-lived, the countries that export oil implemented a mechanism that is market linked (Behrman 32). In 1988, this approach was enormously endorsed and is now the main method used to determine the value of crude oil in the international market.

The agricultural sector has recorded enormous growth as a result of rising demand for fertilizers, pesticides, and other farm implements such as tractors and combined harvesters. Almost all the fertilizers and pesticides are made from oil. When oil is burned, it releases carbon dioxide. When oil is burned together with coal, it becomes the biggest contributor to the enhancement of atmospheric carbon dioxide. Since the occurrence of the Industrial Revolution, atmospheric carbon dioxide has risen progressively, impelling global warming.

The amount of oil spilled in the course of accidents has varied from a few tons to thousands of tones. A great impact on the ecosystem has previously been proven by smaller spills. Sea oil spills normally cause more harm than the spills on land, because they can for many nautical miles and spread in thin slicks of oil that have coated the beaches (Beattie 43). This is very dangerous to the life of sea birds, shellfish, mammals and various organisms that it covers. Oil spills control is hard and needs ad hoc methods, and a big amount of labor.

The demand for petroleum in the 21st century is attributed to the growth seen in the automobile sector. Although the 2008 financial crisis affected a number of sectors in the economy including the automobile industry, statistics reveal that the number of vehicles produced and sold during this period increase marginally.

It has been projected that future oil exploration activities are likely to decline since oil producing countries- in spite of the fact that they have enormous reserves- are experiencing rising cost of extraction. The discovery of new oil reserves normally result to high costs of extractions which may render the whole exercise meaningless. The need for advanced extraction technologies that will reduce extraction costs cannot be understated

According to Herbert’s Peak theory, the production of oil in the near future will eventual reach a maximum level then drop further as reserves are depleted (Vietor 66).

The year 1965 is known to have been the peak of oil discoveries globally and the and afterwards, the production of oil has exceeded oil discoveries each year since 1980. Hubbert used this theory to forecast US oil production at the peak on a date from 1966 to 1970. This forecast was based on the available data at a moment in his 1956 publication. It is hard to forecast the peak of oil in any region because of ignorance or accounting transparency in the international oil reserves.

According a number of scholars based at Oxford University, majority of OPEC members submitted highly inflated oil reserve reports in 1980s due to competition from other oil producing countries. The International Energy Agency articulates that conventional crude oil production in US peaked in 2006. Given that almost all economic sectors depend majorly on oil, peak oil may lead to total market failure.

Besides conversation, more energy is consumed every year. Energy powers a continuous technology array that makes life simple, enjoyable and productive. Even though, we need to minimize our use of oil, and opt to alternative sources of energy that are renewable, we should not limit ourselves to using it but rather find a good way of powering it.

Figures 1 and 2 in this paper have shown that there have been remarkable changes in oil consumption. The two figures are related in the sense that they both result to oil consumption in US (Veziroglu 56). An increase and a later decrease in the level of oil, in the reserves, coincide with an increase and a later decrease in the production and importation of oil. In other words, they both agree that the consumption of oil has increased over the years.

Conclusion It is evident that solar energy is not a new idea. During the Industrial Revolution, it was questionable whether there will always be abundance in fossil fuels. If solar energy had been put to use several years ago, solar heating panels could not be opted for as an alternative that would reduce costs (Vietor 13).

The price setting of energy is now the most common system due to competition. A high risk of a borrowed cost of capital has been foreseen because of the market volatility and the future cost of energy. With the current economic situation, we cannot handle subsidies that are directed to financial burdens of the consumer. Economical and solar marketing career may be the best alternative to go for in the future solar energy evolution.

Works Cited Beattie, Donald. History and overview of solar heat technologies. Cambridge, Mass: MIT Press, 1997.Print

Behrman, Daniel. Solar energy: the awakening science. London: Routledge

[supanova_question]

Introduction to Contemporary Society Essay custom essay help

Introduction Human societies consist of individuals and groups of individuals with different needs, interests, and aspirations. Furthermore, different individuals are endowed with different qualities. For instance, some are physically stronger than others while others are intellectually well endowed than others. Some have special talents and abilities which distinguishes them from the rest of the members of a society.

In addition, we all belong to different and unique socio-economic, ethnic, and cultural backgrounds which profoundly impacts up on our social standing (Perry

[supanova_question]

Antioch Unified School District Essay college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Readiness and Emergence Response in the District

Conclusion

References

Introduction Antioch Unified School District is one of the biggest school districts in the state of California. It is comprised of elementary schools and high schools. The school district serves more than 19000 students in the city of Antioch, California (AUSD, 2011). With the high population of this school district, it is necessary to have an effective and efficient disaster management programme to ensure the safety of students while at school.

To achieve this, the school district has come up with a number of programmes which ensure that all the schools in the district are well prepared in case an emergency occurs. These programmes have been working well and in the year 2010 the school district received a grant from the Department of Homeland Security to improve on its project (AUSD, 2011).

Readiness and Emergence Response in the District Antioch Unified School District is one of the most successful school districts in the United States which has shown a lot of progress in emergency readiness and response. It has a number of programmes that have made the school staff, students, parents, guardians and other community members to be well prepared in case disasters strikes. These programmes include: prevention, preparedness, response and recovery (U.S Department of Education, 2010). This ensures that all students are safe while they are at school.

These programmes have been effective in the control and prevention of drug and alcohol abuse, crime control and other gang related activities. They also support the well being of students, creation of safe environments in schools and promotion of programmes which teach the students to have desirable characters and be good and responsible students in future.

To achieve this, the school district has collaborated with local law enforcers, social institutions, parents and guardians. They work together as a team to ensure that all these goals and objectives are achieved. This has been very effective since it ensures that students are safe whether they are in school or not.

To be ready for disasters, the school district has a number of facilities and equipments. The facilities which the school district has include: technology support, education technology, data systems, system support and maintenance and operations. It has also implemented several policies and guidelines which have to be followed by all the schools in the district.

Furthermore, the school district has formulated a plan for readiness and preparedness management for schools (REMS). The plan has several goals, objectives and activities which ensure that the school district is well prepared. Formation of C-REMS, school site safety plan and training are the goals of this plant.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The plant is working well since all the schools in the district have understood and can implement emergency basics such as in the event of fire, disease outbreak and so on. However, there are some improvements which need to be conducted to ensure the efficiency of the programme. The amendments include: provision of up to date machinery and equipments, intense training of teachers, students, parents and guardians and the formulation of an efficient communication method in times of emergency for an efficient reunification process.

Due to these needs the school district requires more money to fund new projects and improve on the ones. This will ensure that the success of the projects will continue to perpetuity due to the sustainability of the projects. The government should therefore give the school district grants to keep the projects going.

Conclusion The emergency and response projects of Antioch Unified School District have been successful. The proper planning, dedication and executions of these projects should be credited for this success. However, there are some improvements which need to be done to ensure that the projects become more effective and efficient. That is why the school district is applying for a grant from the government in order to get funds to run and manage the projects.

References AUSD (2011). District at a Glance. Antioch. Retrieved from https://www.antiochschools.net/

U.S Department of Education (2010). U.S. Department of Education Awards $28.8 Million to School Districts To Improve Readiness and Emergency Response Plans. U.S Department of Education. Retrieved

[supanova_question]

Two Historical Art Periods Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Art works differ significantly across different fields and time periods. Some art works appear to have stemmed from the minds of individuals or from social and ethnic influences. Others have been influenced by the designs and features of earlier periods. These are frequently a continuation of or response to artistic designs (Stokstad, 2008). This essay will evaluate and identify where art originality and stimulation originated. It will discuss classical and renaissance historical art periods

Discussion Classical Art Period

Classical art started at around 500 B.C to 323 B.C in the course of the rise of the Greek Kingdom. The social condition, which contributed to the advent of this style, is that the Greeks during this time honored the human figure via sculpture in extremely naturalistic detail.

After the Romans defeated the Greeks, they still considered Greek culture and sculpture as exclusive. They, therefore, brought into their country thousands of inventive Greek art works and duplicated them in large numbers. This historical art period saw alteration in the design and function of statues.

Sculptures became more naturalistic and the mechanical talent of Greek sculptors in portraying the human form in different poses substantially improved. Sculptures began to portray actual people. It is during this period that the names of personal sculptors became known. The art of this classical period naturally appears to be official and restrained (Bohr, 2010).

During this period, the human structure started being portrayed in movement of postures, especially in athletic movement. It was also the start of the Greek bodily ideal. The male body was represented as robust and fit whose physique was twisted out of a marble. Women were frequently naked on top and covered on the bottom or totally exposed. They had smooth abdomens, busted hips and legs and small sized breasts.

One of the key features of this historical period is the controposto posture of the sculptures. The sculptures had an S-curve with one leg being ahead of the other and carrying the body’s weight. Artists during the classical period treasured balance, and synchronization. The figures were frequently more ideal than in actual life. Bodies of the sculptures looked lively, and movement was believable. Faces expressed no emotions and clothing was not used. There was no significance of perception (Onians, 1999).

The sculptures of Harmodius and Aristogeiton are an example of artwork done during this period. It was put up in Athens to denote the defeat of the tyranny. It was the earliest public headstone to the actual people. It is also during this art period that sculptures were put to use. The reason as to why artists deviated from the classical period is that works of this period subsisted only in portions (Bohr, 2010).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Renaissance Art Period

This is a historical art period in western history during which art was revitalized. The shift from the classical period to the Renaissance period took place during the 4th century BC. The social condition, which contributed to the advent of this renaissance style, is the increase in territorial tussle taking place all through Europe.

Living people subsequently had enough to do. They had to comprehend how to live in the good mercies of their rulers. With the large exclusion of the Catholic Church, then the people had to dedicate themselves to the comfort of art.

Another social condition that led to the advent of this style is the fact that, in the course of the 15th and 16th century, businesses prospered in Italy and people obtained wealth. These wealth families began supporting the artists. The new monetary support and liberty led to a radical change in the behavior and beliefs of the artists. They, therefore, out rightly discarded classical art emphasis on religious convictions hence starting an insurrection in the art field (Boyle, 2001).

Renaissance artists wanted art that illustrated joy in human attractiveness and life’s happiness. It was more life like compared to the classical art. Renaissance artists examined perceptions or the distinctions in the way things appear when near or far way. They painted in a manner that demonstrated these differences. Consequently, their paintings appeared to have some depth (Elkins

[supanova_question]

Business Law: Case Study essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Analysis

Conclusion

References

Introduction A friend was contracted by a businessman to paint his house. The agreement was that he should use green paint to paint the face of the shop. However, the friend used a color similar to green and the businessman refused to pay him. A question arose as to whether this amount to substantial performance or it amounts to inferior performance.

The writer feels that this amounts to substantial performance and not inferior performance since the other parts painted were in accordance with the agreement. The only problem was with the paint used on the front of the shop and this amounts to substantial performance. The businessman was not therefore right to deny the contractor his payments (Liuzzo

[supanova_question]

Out of the Matt Term Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

It may seem like a surprise how the world is interconnected through a web link not seen by many. As human beings, we do not pause to think how interconnected things are.

This is one of the reasons why there is a lot of violence in the society. We are filled with too much negativity and this leads to a lot of harmful actions; all this because we do not see the interconnection between ourselves and other things. When we fail to be mindful of others, we only feed the negative energy in us and this result in violence. Being mindful gives us a chance to reflect on our impending actions.

It also feeds and nourishes the positive energy of peace, patience, and courage. As such, we become mindful of others and see things in a new light and this gives us the chance to extend natural warmth and love towards others. What this means is that being mindful of our behaviors and our impending action is the power that feeds our tendencies to remain nonviolent on other beings.

In this life, all things are interconnected and as such, everything we do has some ripple effects capable of either causing harm or good. Back in college, I remember a day when I had to sit on the balcony for several hours feeling desperate after failing in one of the units. I recall banging my hands on the table before going to bed, only to toss and turn all night long.

This kind of violent behavior tends to build a lot of frustration among students, leading to failure in the examinations. I had a very hard time maintaining a spirit of nonviolence. That evening, m mind was preoccupied with thoughts about my past and how I had reacted to the tough unit.

In a moment, I realized how such negative violent behavior towards the unit had affected my attitudes and in effect my studies. I should have been mindful and restrained myself. This helped me to change my attitude towards the unit. Such a reflection and mindfulness of my behavior helped me to create a connection between my behavior and failure in examinations (Lasater 20).

Due to the realization of the interconnectedness of things, my behavior has significantly changed. I am a naturally cordial and polite person who is very courteous about the words that I use, lest I offend anyone. I recognize the power of words to either build or destroy somebody.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More I am lucky now to have a large pool of family and friends whom I turn to during difficult times. My house is always open to everyone. I am also keen to be mindful of my behaviors as I know it may affect not just my life, but that of others as well. I am now adopting a more healthy eating habit by avoiding the harmful food styles and such other living habits as over sleeping, overworking myself , and the way I treat others.

I am also learning albeit slowly the important of buying only what I need to consume to avoid wasting food (Haskvitz 54). The notion of nonviolence has helped me to find peace of mind, soul and spirit. It has also helped cement my relationship with others, God, and nature.

Being mindfulness about our actions and the notion of nonviolence is also relevant on the global scale. Many of the world’s greatest rivalries and injustices have been settled effectively through nonviolence. Those who are really concerned about justice resulted to nonviolence as the only way of appealing to their enemies.

This is being mindful of their action of not turning to violence when demanding for justice. Such figures include Martin Luther King junior who sought to win the opponent with friendship and humility. By propagating nonviolence not only did King bring the change he wanted be but also helped bridge the gap between the white and the black races in America (King and Carson 67).

A lot of problems in the world today can be attributed to one thing; failure to pause and be mindful of the consequences of our actions. At a personal level, I have known the power of letting my natural warmth led me to express love to others. Nonviolent verbal and nonverbal behavior has helped me establish a healthy base of friends.

I am now mindful of my behavior and this has led me to alter my life and adopt a more beneficial behavior socially, health wise and economically, leading to a more balanced peaceful life in mind, body and spirit. On a global scale nonviolence creates social order, societal harmony, and the realization of justice.

Works Cited Haskvitz, Sylvia. Eat by choice, not by habit: practical skills for creating a healthy `relationship with your body and your food. California: PaddleDancer Press Books, 2005. Print.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Out of the Matt specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More King, Martin. Stride Toward Freedom: The Montgomery Story. Mississippi: Beacon Press, 1987. Print.

Lasater, Judith. Living Your Yoga: Finding the Spiritual in Everyday Life. California: ` Rodmell Press, 2000. Print.

[supanova_question]

Peloponnesian war Research Paper cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Major causes of the war

Development stages of Peloponnesian war

Archidamian (431-421 BC)

The peace of Nicias

The Sicilian expedition

Consequences of the war

Works Cited

Introduction The Peloponnesian war is still widely studied in the history of Western Civilization. It was the second war that lasted between 431BC and 404BC. Athens and her empires (Spartans) engaged each other fiercely in the war.

The main catalyst of the war was intense conflict that had dominated Athens and Sparta. The very conflict was also evident during the earlier wars in Persia (McKay et al. 205). The genesis and progress of the war was heavily documented by Thucydides. He attributed the rising Athens imperialism power as the major cause of the war. One of the devastating impacts of the war was witnessed in Athens.

The latter dismantled its empire, a move that divided the entire Greek state. The division left Greece powerless to prevent Persian Empire from reclaiming their Asian possessions (Encyclopedia Britannica (a) par. 8). Nonetheless, the works of an Athenian historian named Thucydides provides a lot of information on Peloponnesian war. Modern scholars have tried to make several interpretations to the war by critical reading of Thucydides account (Bagnall 122).

Major causes of the war According to McKay et al. (555), any major war may be triggered by either known or unknown forces. In order to explore the rationale of this war, clhistorians have borrowed much from Thucydides’ writings. Thucydides, an Athenian General, wrote an account of the Peloponnesian War. However, some historians doubt if he ever took part in the war since some of his documented works are surprisingly vivid and coherent to qualify for a third-person narration (Encyclopædia Britannica (b) par.18).

According to Bagnall (122), the major cause of the war as accounted by Thucydides was the indiscriminate expansion of Athenian power. The increased power, presence and authority of Athenian were by far and large, linked to economic dynamism and Periclean Imperialism. Moreover, the increase in Athenian power instilled fear on Sparta.

The latter retaliated by developing a grudge that would eventually lead to war (Encyclopædia Britannica (a) par. 6). Besides, the Spartans had always enjoyed great power and since Athenians had overshadowed their presence in Peloponnesus, retaliation was the best way to go in order to resume the powerful position. According to McKay et al (566), the above explanation could be equated to Greek Culture at that time which viewed life as a perpetual struggle among human beings to gain advantage.

According to Thucydides, Sparta army had no reason to fear Athenian rise to power since their army was larger and well equipped. At the beginning of the war, the Spartan army was estimated at 2000 cavalry and 30,000 hoplites as compared to Athens who had only 1200 cavalry and 13,000 hoplites (Bagnall 182).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, Athenian navy was stronger than Spartan although the interest of Spartans in the sea was limited. Their only passion was in Peloponnesus. As such, they had no reason to fear. According to Bagnall (192), the fear could be linked to Corinth, the Spartan leader who feared Athenian imperialism in contrast to fearing the size of the army. Imperialism had set a ground for Athens to compete on an equal basis with Sparta for Aegean and western colonies.

Investigation over the reliability of Thucydides account of the war has always interested some scholars who view him as a partisan of Athens and that his account could mislead the audience altogether. According to Encyclopædia Britannica( a, par.12), if indeed Thucydides was a partisan, his works could have hidden the fact that Athens was the aggressor.

In addition, other scholars have viewed the reason to be too simplistic to cause such an overwhelming war. Wars have always been associated with differing political and ideological beliefs between two opposing sides, but Thucydides account lack any explanation on the above factors (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 6).

Bagnall (202) suggests that Thucydides may have been embroiled in a conflict that would have arisen between the supporters of democracy and oligarchy. In addition, the Dorian’s and Ionians cultural and racial differences were different and could be a basis of conflict. He refutes Thucydides as a reliable source of the event leading to the Peloponnesian war for it ignores the main ingredients that fuel any war (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 12).

Thucydides used the events of the 50-year period before the war to arrive at his ideology of what would have sparked the war (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 19). Bagnall (221) refutes Thucydides explanation since the historical events before the war were not enough to justify the war.

He perceives Thucydides account as an escape strategy since he could not personally understand why the war broke out. Thucydides account shows that Pericles had prepared for the war by assessing the strengths and weaknesses of Athenian army long before the Peloponnesian league (McKay et al. 596).

As a strategy to gain advantage over Athenians, Pericles had built a wall between Piraeus and Athens. In addition, he increased his reserve find with over 6,000 talents. According to (McKay et al. 616) the strategy was amount to cause conflict with other states. He adds that Thucydides could have accounted Pericles imperial ambition as another reason the colonies went to war.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Peloponnesian war specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More McKay et al. (602) concludes that Peloponnesian war can be attributed to several factors rather than the mere fear created by Athenian imperialism. The conflicts that existed between Athenians and the Peloponnesian league are myriad. Hence, it is not possible to pin point a particular incident as the major cause of the war. He advocates that the causes of this war should be viewed as a complex string of related factors such as conflict between democracy and oligarchy.

Development stages of Peloponnesian war Historians classify the war into three parts namely the Archidamian war (431-421 BC), the peace of Nicias and the Sicilian Expedition (420-413 BC) and the Ionian war (412-404 BC).

Archidamian (431-421 BC) The Archidamian period war that spanned for ten years was named after a Spartan king, Archidamus. The honor was for his contribution to the cautious policy that the Spartans employed during the start of the war. It was also due to the fact that he had directly opposed going to war with Athens (Encyclopædia Britannica (b) par. 16).

The Archidamian stage saw each of the two opposing sides come up with strategies aimed at achieving victory in the war that each side hoped would be short (Bagnall 112). The Spartans adapted a traditional strategy that involved gathering a large and powerful hoplite army at Corinth’s isthmus. The hoplites would have guaranteed Spartans victory if Athens attacked while a reserve Peloponnesian army would guarantee attack Athens in Attica if they decided to hide behind the walls of Attica (Bagnall 121).

Spartans chose the above strategy as it has brought them victory in all the previous battles against their enemies. However, the Athens proved to be experienced in war a thing which made the war to prolong than each of the sides had anticipated. Athens had a big empire and held a supreme position at sea a situation that put them at an advantage, and thus could not be forced to surrender. The position also made them not to fall onto Spartans trick to fight back when their territories were invaded. The sea ensured they had a constant supply of grains and other commodities even if Attica was ravaged (Bagnall 122).

Pericles, on the other hand, exploited Athens strategic position and planned to gather his army inside Athens and deserted Attica to the enemy (Encyclopedia Britannica (a) par.17). His strategy was to lure the Peloponnesian army before the walls of Athens, and then attack their coastline at ease. Athens was at an advantage since the Peloponnesians could not carry on for long as they had to return home to harvest so they can refill their supplies (Bagnall 144).

During the first year, the strategies of the two sides seemed to be working since they proceed according to plan. Archidamus army invaded Attica but Athens remained adamant to attack (Bagnall 144). Spartan had invaded Attica in the hope that Athens hoplites would offer resistance of which they would attack fiercely and the plan was to end the war as soon as possible. Since no amount of provocation would make the Athenians hoplites to fight back, Peloponnesian had to retire and disperse after several weeks.

When they finally withdrawn, Athenians took the opportunity to equip a fleet of 100 ships and they raided Peloponnese. In addition, Pericles got his army out of Attica, and they raided Megarid as a revenge of Attica invasion (Encyclopædia Britannica (b) par.46). According to (Bagnall 145) their strategies of relying on attrition to win the war was what made it difficult to predict and measure how long the war would last, and if it would end in the first place.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Peloponnesian war by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The following summer saw the Spartans adapt a direct attack strategy. Led by their King Archidamus they invaded Attica and destroyed most of it (McKay et al. 662). The Athenians reacted to the attacks by attacking the Spartan navy, but their strategy was proving to be too expensive.

In addition, the Athenians got a blow when their leader Pericles died from a plague that claimed more a third of Athenian citizens (McKay et al. 615). The Spartans took the weakening advantage of Athenians, and attacked Plataea of which they managed to subside by 427 BC. The success victory to seize Plataea made the Spartans think they were winning the war, and a wrap up they invaded Attica again. However, their calculation was wrong, and Athenians suppressed the Lesbos revolt in 427 (McKay et al. 665).

They also embarked on a more aggressive attack where they invaded western Greece also managed to gain possession if Minoa island and in turn reclaimed a strategic position to the port of Megara. Under the leadership, of general Nicias Athenians succeeded to seize Isle of Melos, countryside of Tanagra and Locris, also tried to attack Westside of Greece to not avail (Bagnall 148).

As the war progressed, Athenians were receiving more courage to launch more daring attacks. The regained confidence drove them to invade the island of Sphacteria, and they captured 292 Spartan soldiers. They also adapted another strategy in an attempt to damage Spartan economy, where they built a fortress at Pylos from where they used to receive runaway slaves and helots (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 28).

The war continued as each side tried to outdo the other and each attack led to disasters after another. It came a time when both sides saw the need for a peace treaty as no one was ready for surrender (Bagnall 149). The peace treaty was called the peace of Nicias. Athens had survived the Archidamian war and this did not settle well with Spartans who always viewed themselves as superpower. Another war was not far from being fought as Spartans would take any available opportunity to show their mighty.

The peace of Nicias Like any other conflict, the Peloponnesian war claimed lives, destroyed fortunes and eroded patience of both the Spartans and Athenians (McKay et al. 667). The harsh situation forced them to look for a chance to make peace agreements. The period is named after Nicias, the leader of Athenian as he was in charge of negotiating for truce (Bagnall 146).

After negotiations, a thirty years period was agreed on. The war was not to be ended but a call for a cease fire was initiated. However, this was never the case since violence erupted yet again. The period lasted for seven years only that was full of skirmishes (Encyclopedia Britannica (a) par. 28). During the peace period, Athenian was able to recruit many citizens into the navy and when they eventually found a leader another war was could not be prevented.

The Sicilian expedition The new Athenian leader in the name of Alcibiades came up with another strategy to build up on his uncle’s strategy. Initially, Athens exploited the strategy of defense, but with Alcibiades on board Athenians could now figure out how to defeat Spartans (Bagnall 146).

The Athenians under the leadership of Alcibiades planned for the Sicilian expedition amidst strong opposition from Nicias because he did not trust his nephew. However, all his strategies to persuade the citizens to refuse the expedition fell on deaf years as Alcibiades who was a good speaker convinced the citizens to support the cause (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 26).

As days progressed. there was nothing to stop the expedition and as a tradition Alcibiades and Nicias were elected the commanders of Athenian army, and another commander Lamachus to be the mediator incase of any differences between the two. The Athenian army that was sent to Sicily was very large almost exhausted their treasury (McKay et al. 592).

The expedition was doomed to fail from the onset since having been accused of a crime in the eve of the expedition; Alcibiades was arrested along the way. When he was being taken back to Athens for charges, he managed to escape in the sea and later joined the Spartans side where he gave them all the secrets of the expeditions (Bagnall 148).

Athenians had made a gross error to withdraw Alcibiades while he was the key architect behind the expedition. There were several setbacks that commenced when they failed to attack Syracuse (Bagnall 132).

In the process of assaulting Syracuse, Lamachus was killed leaving Nicias a lone leader. Nicias was not a good leader when it came to conducting invasion as he only excelled in defense. He was slow and missed several great opportunities, which led to many of his mean being killed. Back home the Athenian assembly had heard of the devastating news and they sent him more men for reinforcement (McKay et al. 658).

Athenian army was ill equipped, and they could not win the war. Thus, they concentrated to keep their fleet save to take them back to Athens. However, Nicias kept postponing their departure from Syracuse, and the Spartans ambushed their fleet cutting off any transport back home (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 22). The Athenian army adequately short of supplies resorted to cross to Sicily, which were their sympathizers.

However, this was not to be as Spartans laid an ambush for them as they were crossing the river. They slaughtered most of them, capture the rest and enslaved them. It is reported that very few Athenians navy made it home. The Sicily expedition which is recorded in Greek history because of the large number of the army involved, ended in defeat for the Athenians (Bagnall 138).

Consequences of the war The war turned out to be a catastrophe for Athens. She lost her empire and also never regained any political influence in the region (Encyclopedia Britannica (a) par. 36). However, she managed to preserve her wealthy status in the region. On the hand, Spartan won the war but was ill equipped to deal with the victory phase.

The expertise of her leaders and the governance structure were not appropriate to the big region (Encyclopedia Britannica (b) par. 18). It never built a new empire, and her attempt to lead Greeks failed. The defeat of Athens left Greece disunited, and vulnerable to future attacks. Scholars equate the Athenians defeat as a Greece defeat as only she was capable of creating a united Greece (McKay et al. 694).

Works Cited Bagnall, Nigel. The Peloponnesian War: Athens, Sparta, and the Struggle for Greece. New York, NY: Thomas Dunne Books, 2006. Print.

Encyclopedia Britannica (a). Ancient Greek civilization, 2011. Jun. 23 2011, web. .

Encyclopedia Britannica (b). Peloponnesian War. Encyclopedia Britannica Online. Encyclopedia Britannica, 2011. Jun. 23. 2011, web. .

McKay, P. John et al. A History of Western Society (9th ed.). Urbana-Champaign: Bedford/St Martin’s, 2008, Print.

[supanova_question]

The Internet’s Good and Bad Sides Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Background

Argument

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction This is the era of the information age. Currently there are over two billion internet users in the world. The internet is the fastest growing market place and many companies are increasingly adopting internet related technologies to tap to the growing market. The internet also has been the source of multi billion companies like Google and facebook that solely derive their revenues from the net.

These companies and many more have products that have made sure millions of people are hooked to the internet for work and leisure. Because it’s a virtual place that is not very limited, the internet has been on the receiving end of both criticism and praises.

It’s a fact that the internet is an employer to millions of people who work and do business online. However, its also a known fact the internet is a place for many people to waste time and many companies have tangibly proved that productivity falls when employees engage in internet related activities (Marzilli 34).

Similarly, the internet is the source of many online relationships that people form with virtual partners that normally lead to the breakage of their marriages or stable relationships. The negatives that have characterized the net have therefore led some critics like William Gibson to declare that the internet is a just a waste of time. It’s not any better than the entertainment technologies that preceded it. In fact he thinks its worse. This paper will therefore seek to determine if the net is a waste of time and if so, in what ways.

Background Did you know that Facebook has over 700 million users today? Did you know that many other social networking sites like Twitter and My space account for hundreds of millions of other online users? Did you also know that Google is the biggest search engine in the world that helps users access virtually everything that one would want to research on? According to Nielsen Online, facebook, twitter, and Myspace combined captured over hundred million users in 2009.

According to Nielsen therefore the gap between human beings virtual and physical continues to dim. It’s important however to understand that the problem is not sing the internet. Rather the problem is the activity these billions of users of the internet engage in. in a survey in 2005 by America Online and Salary.com, many workers over 44% cited the internet as the biggest distraction (Mahill 32).

The internet was fist invented to connect people. Today, it still plays that very important role. In fact, there is quite a lot of useful collaboration that is as a direct result of the internet. Take for example research (Johnson et al 54). Many research fellows in the world interact between each other stationed in different universities thousands of miles away exchanging ideas that have positively changed the world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The internet is also increasingly being used as a place to discuss parties and other social events that bring many people together. Everyday the news media is filled with news of unsuspecting women and men some of them underage lured by criminals and trafficked to various parts of the world through the internet (Herbert and Samantha 59).

It’s hard for one to imagine his son /daughter being sent away from school because they posted inappropriate pictures online. Many politicians have lost their careers through the information thy post on the net. What we can decide from the above is that the internet is a great source of unlimited invaluable information and at the same time a place with unlimited ways of wasting time.

Many experts have asked themselves many questions about the good and bad sides of the internet. Much as they acknowledge its importance, it’s hard to remain objective and concentrate on the good side without casting the eye wide and seeing the ugly side of it (Katz and Rice, 45).

The internet was invented to connect with people, true. The internet is still crucial in everyday running of the world, true. On the other hand, the internet is the root of some of the bad evils that have befallen many people, true and the internet is the beginning of what Gibson described as a place to daydream waste time and watching other people’s lives while we destroy ours. According to Gibson, the bad side of the internet outweighs the good.

Putting oneself in Gibson’s shoes, one can’t help but ask some very hard questions about the net. What good is there for one to spend half of his/time discussing about the lives of other people? What good comes out of sitting the whole day, consuming vast amounts of energy and fantasizing about other people’s lives?

Alternatively, what good comes out of someone sitting the whole day creating malicious programs that lead to the collapse of vast networks of data and sometimes con of money out of people. It makes no sense at all for one to stay online and take surveys that pay a hundredth of a dollar. Millions of people are engaged in such activities that promise huge unrealistic incomes.

According to Gibson, uselessness stems from the fact people spend a lot of time online doing nothing productive on the internet. As a result the internet has introduced a culture of people who only think about leisure without working. While that can work ideally, it’s quite unworkable in the realistic world.

We will write a custom Essay on The Internet’s Good and Bad Sides specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even if the idea that money can work for one hence he/she can have all the time to engage in leisure was workable, it will still be impossible for one to engage in endless leisure. Gibson therefore feels that the advantages and disadvantages from the internet cancel out each other and result the nothing comes out of it. He further fears that failure to halt the trend will lead to people especially young people acting life and living in fantasy

The scary part is that the internet is yet to fully evolve to reach its epitome. The evolution no doubt will bring along numerous advantages and along with it deadly consequences for all users of the internet. What needs to answered however is whether the leisure trend that is associated with the world is on its way to usurping the productive trends that laid the foundation for the internet (John 76).

Argument Many experts have expressed their own views that support Gibson’s view while others appear to be on the contrary. Ott and Sarricks believe most of the information stored in the internet can be justified to be useless.

The sad thing about it is that the information is packaged to appear important potentially misleading many people who otherwise should be engaged in productive activity (166). Gibson in his argument about the uselessness of the internet admits that though he likes surfing the internet and derives considerable pleasure from doing so, he cannot compare it to the television.

Television according to him is far more beneficial and apparently does not waste time like the internet, well during the “good old times”. Its difficult to determine the accuracy of the Gibson’s charge. However, anyone can find a number of faults with the TV as with the internet. Like surfing the internet, clicking on ones TV remote control will introduce to numerous unnecessary programs comparable to the useless information on the internet.

West admits that the internet has revolutionalized the way information is accessed (74). Information according to him that took weeks to compile may take a few hours. Now who can object to that as an great time saver? West adds that the wealth of information available in soft form online far outweighs the information that is available in soft copy (74). However, West faults the vast amounts of information on the internet as its main undoing.

Like Otts and Saricks he concurs that most of it is useless. Further more it will take someone a long time to sift through the information to com up with anything logical and concrete ( 25). The quality of the information has been called to question. Its no secret that most qualitative and useful intelligence information is sold online. So why avail it and claim at the same time that its available on the information superhighway.

According to Mahill, social interaction is very important it every human being’s life (130). Human beings have different interests and those that have less rely on the media for a bridge of the gap that5 the have. The internet has come in handy and kept people engaged instead of being bored.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Internet’s Good and Bad Sides by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More That is pretty much like Gibson’s view. However, Mahill faults television, social media, e-mail, texting and texting all that have an internet element in them for providing too much entertainment to appoint where the individual is overwhelmed. He adds that people are finding it increasingly difficult to process the information and entertainment that the internet accords the (130). Mahill authoritatively declares that people are overloaded and the usefulness of the internet is drastically being put under the microscope.

Conclusion He coinage “the internet is useless” is too blanket to sum up the benefits that the internet offers as well as the disadvantages. Depending on the angle from which it’s looked at, there are going to be a lot of pros and cons concerning the service. However, focusing on the disadvantages, it’s difficult to ignore the fact that the internet thing is quickly turning to an “overact”. There is a lot of entertainment on the net.

In fact, one can easily prove that there is over entrainment that exceeds supply on the internet. But, who said some people don’t like it? Are social sites minting money out of the net? Can from instance Larry Page of Google describe the internet as useless? The simple answer is no! Therefore, the solution lies in a little bit of policing of the net where stringent regulation will control what flows in and out of the net. Without that, am afraid Gibson’s generalization will become true.

Works Cited John, Hamilton. Internet. London: ABDO, 2004. Print.

Mahill, Wendy. Embracing a Feeling Heart. London: Xulon Press. 2011

Marzilli, Alan. Policing the Internet: New York: Infobase Publishers, 2005. Print.

Samantha, Moppett and Herbert, Ramy. Navigating the Internet: legal research on the World Wide Web. New Jersey: WIN Press, 2000.

Johnson et al. Computers: tools for an information age. New York: Prentice Hall, 2002. Print.

Rice, Ronald and Katz, Everett. Social consequences of Internet use: access, involvement. Massachusetts: MIT Press, 2002.

Saricks, Gibson and Ott, Bernard. The Back Page. New York: ALA Editions, 2005. Print

West, Christopher. Competitive intelligence. New York: Palgrave Macmillan. 2001. Print.

[supanova_question]

The Immigration History in the United States Research Paper online essay help: online essay help

Introduction Organization of states, countries and nations is characterized with boarder rules that govern movements; such movements include the transfer of people, goods as well as services across the territories. Immigration refers to the movement of people from their country into another with the aim of staying in that country permanently. Such immigrations are said to be illegal if they contravene the established laws of the country they are moving into.

Complications over implementation of laws on immigration on the other hand arise due to full acquisitions of rights in the country into which a person has moved to. This paper seeks to argue that parents who are illegal immigrants should be deported to their own countries even if their children are citizens of the United States because they (parents) should follow the legal process. This paper will look into the history of immigration in the United States, legal provisions over illegal immigrants and their impact.

History of Immigration in the United States The history of immigration into the United States coincides with the history of the states. It is for example hard to consider who the true natives of America are owing to the fact that most of the American races trace their origins of ancestry to other countries.

One of the first races of people to have been reported in the United States for example were a group from Asia that is reported to have moved into the region about twenty thousand years ago. This group has been accredited for the ancestry of the United States’ current considered native population.

The instance of significant immigration into the land is associated with movements of Europeans and Asians into the region in the seventeenth century. The information and perception that had spread over the United States’ vast resources for instance attracted Europeans who were interested in exploiting the resources.

Consequently, there was immigration of people from other continents that were in most cases forced so as to help in supplying labor for the Europeans investments. Such were the historic movements of slaves from regions such as Africa, the Caribbean and parts of Asia (Rapid, 2008).

According to Anderson (2010), there was an overwhelming immigration into America in the seventeenth century with respect to the then population in America as well as the populations in the countries from which the people came from. He argued that about seven hundred thousand people had moved to settle in the United States by the year 1760.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is also estimated that America received more than two hundred thousand immigrants from the then United Kingdom in a span of thirty years that ended in the year 1660, about seventy five thousand immigrants from Germany were also realized in the same time frame a century later with more than a hundred thousand Irish people being realized in the country in the same period as the Germans.

This sequence of settlements established a trend that is still being realized as people moved into the United States in search for greener pasture. These movements were spread over to the nineteenth century with Germans and Irish populations forming the majority of immigrants.

The attractive environment that was portrayed in America together with unfavorable conditions in other parts of the world has however been the major reason for such experienced immigration. The immigration has over time been diverse to realize global representation of global populations in the United States (Anderson, 2010).

The move towards restricting Restrictions of immigration into the United States have been in existence for centuries now. It started with discriminatory moves that were meant to discourage immigrants and further legislations that were made to restrict the movements into the United States.

A legislation made in the year 1882 in the name of “the Chinese exclusion act” (Anderson, 2010, p. 8) for example provided for measures to restrict Chinese people from becoming American citizens and established the ground for deportation of any Chinese who would be found in the American land without constitutional certification. Subsequent legislations followed in the twentieth century with enactment of bills that were established for the sole purpose of controlling immigration.

Legislations such as quarter laws of the year 1921, immigration act of 1924, displaced persons act enacted in the year 1948 and immigrations and nationality act of the year 1952 among others are some of the provisions that have been made to restrict immigration into the United States and the legislations further made it clear that such moves are illegal.

The movements however persists with foreigners streaming to the United States without proper validated documents and with the intention of settling in the country so as to enjoy the benefits of the celebrated economy against the fact that such moves are illegal and carry judicial penalties (Anderson, 2010).

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Immigration History in the United States specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Arguments for strict measures against illegal immigrants The fact that people continue streaming into America and yet they clearly know that the acts are illegal presents the burden of forcing the authorities to implement the established laws on these individuals. There are a number of reasons as to why such immigrations should be restricted even apart from the evident fact that the American constitution restricts some manner of influx across its borders.

Impacts of Immigration The truth is that immigration has a lot of impacts on America and the people of the United States in general. Whenever a significant movement of people is realized into the nation, there is a resultant impact that range from economic to social factors. One of the reasons for immigration which is the level of hardship in other regions, causing citizens to move for better economic situations has been a factor that draws attention of individuals globally towards America.

According to Sari and Ker of Harvard University, such individuals will be motivated towards countries that have better or even best conditions for their needs. They also express the fact that once individuals have been driven by economic strains in their countries and they move into the United States, they cause an economic impact in the American economy. One of the economic impacts that are caused by these immigrations is the level of competition that natives of the United States are subjected to in the job market.

The inflow of immigrants into the states that are in most cases driven by the search for better paying jobs has seen an absorption of these immigrants into the job markets in the states. Though a level of discrimination is occasionally realized when the immigrants get into the country with respect to the salaries offered to them on their arrival as compared to those offered to Americans on the same jobs, these discrepancies are corrected to convergence with time.

It is actually reported that immigrants are accorded similar treatments as the natives after about a decade and a half of their stay within the United States (Sari and Ker, 2011).

With an assumption of a fixed economy, this gradual assimilation of the foreigners into the job market has the implication of displacing Americans from their jobs or even instigating lowering of wages as they are normally willing to work for wages that are lower that what the natives demand.

This competition is a disadvantage to natives as employers would opt for the cheaper labor as long as the legal systems allows them the freedom to exercise market forces in the labor market. This costs the American people and as a result calls for government’s protection that includes elimination of the immigrants by deportation (Cair, n.d.).

Another cause for deportation is the increased responsibility on the government over immigrants. In the bid to fulfill its responsibility to its citizens, the government of the United States undertakes expenses that provide free services to people. Services such as “free education, employment opportunities and healthcare” for example form a significant percentage of the federal government funds.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Immigration History in the United States by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tolerance over immigrants who are at the same time not accounted for in the statistics and planning thus establishes strains on the government’s estimates and provisions. Adjustments onto the increased needs for services provided by the government also imply an increased level of expenditure by both federal and state governments as they offer services to these immigrants.

Though the United States is an economically stable territory, the federal budget is still yearly faced with deficits that can be avoided if the government was able to cut on some of its expenditure. Deportation of these individuals will provide an avenue for reducing the federal expenditure that is being channeled to these immigrants either directly or indirectly, knowingly or ignorantly (Porter, n.d.).

The Role of Legislation Though legislations were formerly enacted in order to restrict immigration into the United States, further laws have again been enacted that have significantly been promoting illegal entry into the states. Acts of parliament have been witnessed that offers amnesty to a number of groups thus promoting illegal entry of people. As a result of the amnesties, the federal government has been forced to even advance assistance to illegal immigrants instead of taking actions against them.

The available set of amnesty is being blamed for the current estimate of about eight hundred thousand people moving into the country illegally on a yearly basis with the aim of eventually finding a final settlement. Such favors and leniencies are also blamed encouraging foreigners to illegally stream and settle in the United States.

Amnesty that was constitutionally offered in the year 1994 to individuals who had entered the country illegally and those whose entry validity had been revoked is one of the moves that are seen to be attracting more illegal immigrants.

There is a high chance that individuals will continue to illegally stream into the United States with the hope that they will one day be granted a similar amnesty into being citizens. There have also been a number of amnesties that have been based on a number of factors such as political interest, region of origin and even social factors like humanitarian crisis.

The NACARA amnesty that was granted in the year 1997 for instance allowed people such as “Salvadorans, Guatemalans, and Eastern Europeans” (Porter, n.d., 67) to unrestrictedly settle in the United States.

Another amnesty that was granted with respect to people of Haiti for instance allowed all of them who had been staying in the United States and who had previously applied for citizenship to be legalized. Further legislations have since then been enacted so as to allow for not just the illegal immigration, but also the legalization of these immigrants into the American system. This means that the constraints that are associated with these immigrations are being promoted at the expense of the natives.

Leniency The leniency that has in the past been offered to illegal immigrants such as amnesty being offered to individuals as long as their relatives are citizens has also been promoting the illegal inflow with the immigrants hopping that they will one time be granted citizenship on the basis of their relatives being citizens of the United States.

Legislations that have been passed with respect to education of illegal immigrants and aliens such as the DREAM act that was approved by the senate in the year 2005 have also been promoting entry with the aim of gaining favor though the education system.

According to the legislation, there should be some moderation to these categories of students and further opportunities are offered on completion of their schooling that could lead to them being legalized as citizens of the United States. It can therefore be agreed upon that some attachments acquired in the United States can grant illegal immigrant legality into the citizenry of the states.

Such opportunities thus form the basis of immigrants who will take advantage of any such available attachment so as to gain legality in the country and exploit the opportunities which are available.

Consequently, it can also be agreed upon that a move to control illegal immigration in the United States should be strictly applied without considerations to such attachment.

The fact that a person is an illegal immigrant should be enough to call for prosecution of the individual without consideration of the existence of a relative in the states or even any acquired attachment such as education among others (Porter, n.d.).

The fact that the United States is itself facing strains in its budget and the responsibility that is put upon the government to make provisions for people under its territory also calls for measures to regulate the number of people who are moving to further strain the federal budget and expenditure.

Courts in the United States have for example reiterated that the federal government has the responsibility of making provision to the people of America. Interpretations of sections of the United States’ constitutions have also been made to cover any person living in the United States under this category to be provided for.

This means that once an individual has gained entry into the United States, he or she is entitled to all benefits that Native Americans are entitled to. Further interpretations of the same would mean that the federal government does not have a grip over its budget since its estimations are subject to unpredictable needs that arise from illegal immigration.

The same strain is as well registered in the government’s expenditures in two ways. The first impact is the continually budgeted expenditure due to increasing population inflated by immigrants. Similarly, significant level of immigration can cause an unnecessary strain in the budget that might call for reconsideration of the budget. The only solution to these is the total elimination of the illegal immigrations (Carabelli, n.d.).

Review of census of the American population has also been a clear indicator that there is a problem worth discussion with the issue of illegal entry into the united stated. According to the census of the year 1980, more than two million people were realized, in Columbia alone, as undocumented aliens. This also calls for measure to counter the crossing of American boarders (Passel

[supanova_question]

Comparison of US and Germany Cultural Differences Essay college application essay help

Introduction Peoples values and beliefs on how they behave and interpret experiences either in groups or individually make up their culture; therefore, culture is a “community or group of beliefs and practises with which you share common experiences that shape the way you understand the world” (Bibikova and Kotelnikov, 2002).

One of the most notable figures in the field of social research who have extensively researched on the subject of culture and how it differs across regions and communities is Geert Hofstede. Hofstede’s study on the issues of cross-cultural differences in communities and organizations has been the culmination of several works of research notably, Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind (1991).

It this Hofstede’s findings that provided the first ever most reliable framework of managing cultural differences and understanding cultures behaviours across regions that shall be our focus in this paper as we get to analyze and discuss several components of cultural differences for two countries namely United States and Germany.

Hofstede’s Cultural Dimension theory In order to understand the wider context in which we shall analyze the cultural differences of the two countries mentioned above it is essential that we briefly discuss the concept of Hofstede model. Foremost, most of Hofstede research setting that formed the basis of his early findings was based on multinational organizations such as IBM from where he started investigating the phenomenon of cultural differences across regions.

This is because business is one of the best environments under which culture of a community can best be examined in practice; besides this, family obligations, marriage and other similar experiences such as death and illness provides good forums in which cultural values and differences can be learned. In both circumstances cultural practices are formed by deeply held cultural values toward employment, trust, wealth, power and communication (Hooker, 2008).

There are four distinct categories that Hofstede used to develop his framework of cultural differences; these are uncertainty avoidance, power distance, individualism vs collectivism and masculinity vs feminity (Hofstede, 1991). Power distance is the degree to which power is shared evenly in a community as well as the extent in which the community recognize and accepts this variation in power distribution among itself; this is notably one of the key findings of the Hofstede’s model (Hofstede, 1991).

“A high power distance culture” opts for strong leaders and has high regard for authority and hierarchical bureaucracy such as in US which is a typical example of this, while “a low power distance culture” prefers autonomy and personal responsibility (Clearlycultural.com, 2009). We shall discuss this particular component of Hofstede’s cultural dimension model in a later section and how it differs in the context of US and Germany.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second component of Hofstede’s model is uncertainty avoidance; this is described as the degree to which people need laid down regulation and structures in order to function effectively (Hofstede, 1991). Countries that score high on uncertainty avoidance usually strive to put in place laws and regulations that are structured to reduce the factors of uncertainty in general while countries that score low on uncertainty avoidance have none of this.

The third component is Individualism vs. Collectivism; this is the degree to which people support self-centredness vs. the group interest; in the culture of the individualism, independent self-control is highly esteemed while in a shared culture, individual requirements are less significant than the needs of the collective group (Arrindell, 2003).

Finally, there is Masculinity vs. Femininity; this is a measure of how societies attach values and importance to their cultural gender roles and how this gender expectation differs across regions (Arrindell, 2003).

Comparison of US and Germany Cultural Differences Power Distance

Based on Hofstede’s model that we have so far discussed, we can now be able to analyze the cultural differences between these two countries on the four major components that make up this cultural dimension framework. The power distance scale for instance is a reliable measure that was developed by Hofstede to measure the extent that community members tolerate or accept the inequality of power distribution amongst its members.

Now based on this scale United States has a score of 40 while Germany has a score of 35 (Clearlycultural.com, 2009); a casual look at this scores indicates that they are very much close together which means we expect similar behaviours and characteristics in this two countries as far as the issues of power distance are concerned.

Foremost, the fact that US has a power distance score of 40 which is higher than that of Germany by 5 implies that it is more inclined as a country to accept inequality in power distribution and consequently its citizens are more likely to bestow much power and authority and trust to particular individuals.

In the same way Germany is also inclined to behave in the same way when it comes to power entrustment among its leaders and will consequently cope well in such circumstances but slightly less than US citizens. So let us briefly look at the two countries political and governance system and determine if this behaviour is indeed reflected in their systems.

We will write a custom Essay on Comparison of US and Germany Cultural Differences specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For US there is evidence that the people are comfortable with entrusting individuals with much power and authority in a system that they respect. It is certainly because of this high power distance score that they opt to elect a single person to run the country whose office has all the power concentrated in it; besides this, they have senators and governors who also have their fair share of power concentrated in their offices.

What Hofstede is arguing in his model is that no individuals can support or tolerate for that matter such a governance system unless they are comfortable with it and have respect for such unequal distribution of power such as is the case for US and to an extent in Germany as well.

In the case of Germany we realize that the tolerance of unequal power distribution is a bit toned down when compared to US; this too is evidenced by its political and governance system. For the case of Germany there are two principles who are at the helm of the country and responsible for overseeing it which is a clear indication of efforts to distribute power and authority across two individuals; these are the Chancellor and the President.

The Chancellor is the one with the mandate to oversee and manage the day to day activities of the government and is therefore the “head of government” while the President is concerned with management of the country from a wider perspective and is therefore the “head of state” (Hofstede, 1991).

It is then no wonder that German has indeed less tolerance for unequal power distribution and consequently scores less on power distance scale compared to US. Even so, for these two countries the power distance score ratings are just average when you compare with the highest score on the scale of 80 as is the case in Middle East countries, incidentally where most often the president is also a spiritual leader.

Uncertainty Avoidance

Uncertainty avoidance determines the extent to which a society will go to put in place structures that mainly comprise of laws, regulations and standard operating procedures just so that they can limit the occurrence of uncertainty. Countries that have low uncertainty avoidance will have less of such structures in place while those that have high uncertainty tolerance will have many laws and regulations to manage all sorts of uncertainties that might arise.

Because uncertainty avoidance is a cultural phenomenon countries that have much tolerance or less tolerance of it will have systems in place that reflect the same. Germany uncertainty avoidance at 65 is considered high since it is well above average while US score on the same is 46 which is way below.

What this implies is that US will make less efforts in putting into place structures that are aimed at reducing the impact that uncertainty might make on its systems while Germany on the other hand will appear to be obsessed in trying as much as possible to institute laws that are meant to avoid uncertainty as much as possible. So let see how this is actually reflected in the behaviours of these two countries respectively.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Comparison of US and Germany Cultural Differences by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More One of the major ways in which uncertainty avoidance is assessed in societies is through analyzing the nature and commitment of the people to religious beliefs; this is because in countries that have high uncertainty avoidance much effort is made towards establishing a common belief rather than having a multidimensional or lack of it since this will be confusing.

This is the case for Germany which can be considered to be more religious than US and which in fact has one of the oldest and strongest parties that have religious affiliations; the Christian Democratic Union; in fact the current sitting president and Chancellor have been elected through this party (Arrindell, 2003).

In US, this is not the case and there is in fact no party that has religious affiliations, rather United States has just two parties, Democratic and Republican; even on its constitution, the US has gone to great lengths to separate religion from the government at all costs.

The other obvious way in which a society can be assessed on its uncertainty avoidance is by analyzing the systems that it has put in place in general; in Germany even in terms of city designs and planning it is very different from US.

Germans in many respects appears to be very methodical, systematic and well organized in most respects such as in terms of infrastructure, urban planning, housing and even in enforcing its governing laws. In US and on a direct comparison with German this can’t be said to be the case since the level of urban planning, infrastructure and so on cannot be said to be of the same level with that evidenced in German.

Individualism vs Collectivism

In this respect the Hofstede scale focus is on assessing the extent to which individuals in a society are predisposed to function as individuals or work as a team as a result of their cultural orientation; based on this scale Germany is rated as having a score of 67 while US has a much higher score than Germany at 91.

What this means based on Hofstede interpretation is that US is largely an individualistic country than Germany by far; in fact, in this particular component US has the highest score overall worldwide which means its considered the single most individualistic country in the whole world where collectivism or communal collaboration have little if any place among US citizens.

German is not so far off on this scale and would still be considered individualistic oriented but not to the same extent as US; indeed, this we find to be the case when we analyze the cultural behaviours of both these countries on this one particular component.

The most common way in which individualistic orientation is exhibited among societies is in the way that they attach value to personal success and the amount of responsibilities that they expect individuals to shoulder.

Thus, on a very broad benchmark, individualistic countries place much emphasis on capitalism system which is actually the hallmarks of this cultural orientation that they most often have perfected while collectivism societies will probably embrace communism. In the case of US the individualistic behaviour exhibited by their culture is certainly one of the highest and is a testament of what is most often described as the “American Dream”.

Consequently because of the systems and cultural orientation that US had put in place in line with this cultural behaviour of individualistic a person is more inclined to be successful in US singlehandedly than is possible in a country that has low score on the same, in this case let’s say like Germany. In a country like Germany on the other hand as much as it is individualistic it also places much emphasis on family relationships and to an extent cultivates close family ties as well.

Masculinity vs Femininity

In terms of masculinity the US and Germany have very similar behavioural culture with Germany having masculinity culture of 66 while US has 62 (Clearlycultural.com, 2009); this implies that on this component both countries are very much similar to each other.

The Hofstede masculinity score in this case represents a measure of the extent that masculinity in relation to femininity is expressed across societies; in German for instance men are more assertive, success oriented, dominating, power hungry and aggressive compared to women which is also the case in US.

All these characteristics are best illustrated in various forms such as in the way that jobs are distributed between male and females; indeed, for both countries the management jobs in many organizations are often taken up by men which is a clear indication of male masculinity

Conclusion We have looked at the various ways in which Hofstede’s model of cultural dimension applies to different societies in different regions of the world; indeed as we have seen Hofstede cultural dimension framework is consistent with the actual cultural behaviours and country specific systems that exist for each of the two countries that we have discussed.

It is clear that the data we have does support Hofstede’s model of cultural dimension in more than one way and more importantly confirmed to us that US and German are as similar and different with each other in exactly the same way that Hofstede model has predicted.

References Arrindell, W. (2003). Culture’s Consequences: Comparing values, behaviours, institutions and organizations across nations. Behaviour Research and therapy, 41: 861-862.

Bibikova, A. amd Kotelnikov, V. (2002). Managing Culture Differences. Web.

Clearlycultural.com. (2009). Making Sense of Cross Cultural Communication. Web.

Hofstede, G. (1991). Culture and Organizations: Software of the Mind. New York: McGraw-Hill Publishers.

Hooker, J. (2008). Culture differences in business communication. Web.

[supanova_question]

Concepts of Human Sexuality in Society Essay essay help online free

Introduction In her book, Bonk: the curious coupling of science and sex, Mary Roach joins other scholars and experts such as doctors and scientists in explaining human sexuality in a very interesting manner. The author begins by exploring the works of Alfred Kingsley who was well known in the 1940s and 1950s for his sociological surveys in the USA.

He interviewed interviewing people about their sexual lives which later resulted in publishing of the best sexuality volumes (Roach 18). Although Kingsley was not the first researcher on human sexuality, he provided the foundation through which Mary Roach based her fascinating and interesting works on.

The book Bonk covers different topics and subtopics. Examples of such subjects include plastic mechanical penis cameras, hands free breath and the energy orgasm. It also talks parts talking about the crooked penis. The author also covers topics dealing with sex machines and the correlation between G-spot and the clitoris.

The book goes further and even provides more than expected about sexuality. She discusses a whole topic about pig insemination while another section discusses how scientists in the Middle East region used to fit rats with polyester pants in order to uncover the fabric’s negative effects once an organism was sexually aroused.

Lastly, the book has a section discussing in detail about the vaginal photoplethysmograph, a device that is used to measure the amount that the vagina is engorged with blood and also sexual arousal. In Bonk, the author covered everything she could about human sexuality resulting to a very fascinating book that you may stay for long before you can read in detail similar information.

Sociological perspective

Mary Roach in her book, discussed human sexuality using the different perspectives such as biological, medical and of course sociological. In this discussion, we shall not discuss everything but our interest will be towards the sociological aspects of human sexuality. The history of sociological perspective discussing about human sexuality dates back in the 1950s from the works of Kingsley.

As indicated above, he interviewed thousands of American women and men enquiring about their sexuality. Although he did not use the sampling technique so as to ensure his results were not biased, he collected views and observations concerning sexuality from different people. From that period on, other researchers have also done researches based on the same subject.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Most theories in the field of sociology, when researching about human behaviors, assume that human behaviors are usually acquired through a learning process. Despite this, they do not refute that there are other force which can influence these behaviors. This was confirmed by Irvine (440) when he indicated that “although how we are sexual is determined by biology, how, when and where we are sexual is usually determined by the cultural settings in which we find ourselves in”.

Sociologists have discussed human sexuality based on two theories although two other minor theories have also been introduced. The four theories are symbolic interactionism, scripting theory, sexual exchange theory and the sexual strategy theories.

These theories explain that objective reality does not exist. They explains that what we go through is the reality and it has been achieved through the social settings which we exist in They give the example of language which is usually used as a means through which people share their experiences forming meaning to a certain phenomenon they have passed through.

The symbiotic interactionism

The theory is based on the works of George Herbert. In this theory, objects are usually given meanings through communication. Human sexuality itself is not viewed as a subject alone but also as an object. The theory gives people them to copy others. When an individual views him or herself as the object, it leads to a decision making process due to the fact that most people act in a way which promotes the positive character or aspects about them.

Sociologists approach symbiotic interactionism by using two approaches. The first approach is the structural symbiotic interactionist which mainly concentrates on how an individual is able to define the situations he or she is faced by thereby being able to form and understand the realities in which they live in. Scholars also argue that this approach is best used when doing a one on one interview or a participant observation where the researcher’s main intention is to uncover how the individual interacts to different situations.

Structural symbolism however, is concerned with how social structure affects the personality and the self limitation of the reality. The sociologists who base their research on this approach use statistical surveys in a bid to try and understand the relationship between behavior, perception and the location within a large institution which makes a social structure.

Human sexuality studies reveal that symbolic integrationists are concerned with the way in which their sexual beliefs and practices are formed from their sexual experiences. To them, institutions such as religion, family, economy and medicine among others are the ones which influence sexuality of a person (Foucault 18).

We will write a custom Essay on Concepts of Human Sexuality in Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Religions such as Christianity in places such as the US, approach human sexuality by dictating that marital relationships are the appropriate context of sexual intimacies. To make sure that everybody access and understands this information, the church leaders usually inform their followers whenever they meet or through the existing church documents.

Economic institutions on the other hand influence human sexuality through capitalism. A household requires income. The level of income then influences the number of children likely to be born in a family (Teachman, Tedrow

[supanova_question]

the Fallacy Ref Meme List web link. https://imgur.com/a/QDbyt#0 I have attached a copy of the link where you can refer to it. https://drive.google.com/file/d/1PQAq-EYghvuBizKnCOpfPjMw7QtKDe1a/view?usp=drivesdk argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

These files consist of an image of a professional sports referee and some text that briefly explains a logical fallacy (Logical Fallacies are covered in Chapter 8). Choose one of the images and look up the logical fallacy the image is referring to. In a discussion post, explain the logical fallacy (SOME of these are listed on page 183 in the textbook) and provide an example from a website. Comment on at least two other student’s posts and provide more examples of the fallacy that the student chose to research.

[supanova_question]

Generation of Unique Idea as a Success of the New Product Development Process Essay essay help free

Table of Contents Problem Analysis Method

Idea Generation Software

Product Road Mapping Method

Experiments

The Delphi Method

The success of the new product development process hinges upon the uniqueness of the ideas generated. Sources of ideas for new product development can be obtained from the customers, the employees, or experts. Methods of idea generation include problem analysis, use of idea generation software, experiments, product road mapping, and the Delphi method.

Problem Analysis Method This method focuses on the inadequacies of the organization’s product to come up with ideas for developing improved products. The company issues its customers with questionnaires addressing problems with its products. Based on response from the customer, the administration comes up with a list of possible product ideas.

This method is used by organizations that want to maintain customer needs by reinventing current products and services to suit the changing customer needs. For instance, this idea is applicable in developing cell phones with applications that make the users life easier, for example, smart phones.

Idea Generation Software This method uses computer software to generate new ideas for new product development. Software that can be used includes Axon Idea processor, barnstormer, and concept draw map. The software prompts the user to type in hints of the idea they want to generate. The software uses the hints to come up with plausible ideas that the user can select from. This method can be used to create a new design for sporting shoes suitable for individuals with leg or feet injuries.

Product Road Mapping Method In this method of new product development, a creative team carries out an analysis of the organization’s current products and services since their inception. The analysis helps to identify how the product has evolved over its life cycle and avoid redundant ideas.

The creative team then analyses how consumer needs have evolved over the product life cycle before carrying out analysis of the market environment to determine how customer needs are changing. This helps the organization to determine which ideas will be most feasible for new product development. New ideas for making household appliances can be developed using this method, for example a fridge with a water dispenser.

Experiments In this method of new product development, a creative team uses trial and error method to come up with product ideas. The creative teams develop many prototypes of plausible products before reviewing the results. This process continues until the teams develop a unique and new product to the market. Paint manufactures can use this method to mix various colors of paint until they develop a color that is unique and appealing to customers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Delphi Method This method of new product development uses experts to come up with new ideas. An organization creates a panel to review the expert’s idea. The experts are given an opportunity to present their ideas to the panel and the panel reviews the ideas and then gives feedback to the experts on how to improve them. The panel then selects the best idea for new product development. New ideas for clothing line can be generated using this method.

The various new product idea generation methods are appropriate in different industries. Each of the methods has its advantages and disadvantages. Nevertheless, the problem analysis method is the most useful. It helps the organization to develop products which are already accepted in the market and such strategy helps to shorten the product development time by eliminating or cutting short the testing phase.

[supanova_question]

Children Day Care Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

This is a summary of observations made in a children day care. The day care has eight children of between two to three years of age with three childcare workers and the Director. The children’s profile including their photos, as well as the childcare workers have been prepared and stored in a designated folder in the custody of the administration.

The building blue print is consistent with the set up of the facility. The day care class is spacious and allows comfort for the little children. There are effective transitions between the children’s activities due to space. The activities are well handled and are preceded by advance warning such that in case of an emergency, evacuation would be well orchestrated. Childcare workers have setup classroom rules and routines that they periodically examine.

The shutoff valve is located outside and is in an accessible place. As recommended by Marotz ( 200), the day care centre has a set procedure to follow in case of a fire within the facility or within the adjacent buildings. In each room of the day care, there are well-displayed evacuation procedure to familiarize the staff and visitors on the procedure.

The day care has the required number of water hoses, fire evacuation cots, fire blankets and fire extinguishers installed in strategic areas of the building. The childcare workers practice regularly, the fire evacuation procedures, which provide them with fire training that also, include evacuation drills with children. The building does not have long hallways or staircases and the classes are located near the assembly point. However, hallways and all the exits are always kept clear of any obstacle all the time.

In case of a fire emergency, the childcare workers have specific evacuation responsibilities. In the day care, there are three childcare workers for every eight children. In an emergency, two caregivers are supposed to move all the children from the class to the external evacuation assembly point that is located right outside the classroom door. Two childcare workers should put fire emergency cots outside before placing the children in them.

The caregivers are also supposed to take with them keys to the main date. Every person within the facility must follow the caregiver’s direction. Once everybody is assembled at the evacuation point, every child is marked off on the attendance sheet. The third childcare worker has the responsibility of turning off all appliances in the kitchen, laundry and closing off the outdoor area and picks the children emergency food supply.

The Director of the day care on the other hand, is supposed to call the fire department, and collect a call list of all emergency personnel in the area. The director’s main responsibility is to collect staff and visitor sign in/out record as well as to confirm the number of children and childcare workers present. The director has to inform the parents of the evacuation once all the children are safe.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On a personal opinion, this day care is a safe place for the children, childcare workers and the visitors. Adequate safety measures are in place in case of an emergency. The day care is in a simple facility, which is easily accessible, with a playground and well protected with high chain link fence around it. The choice of play equipment is as recommended by Marotz (206).

Works Cited Marotz, Lynn R. “Health, Safety, and Nutrition for the Young Child.” Wadsworth Publishing, 2000. 206-230.

[supanova_question]

30 question Quiz and answer to discussion question in 150 words a piece. college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Log into jsu canvas to access the quiz. https://jsums.instructure.com/login/ldap The user name is J00741254 The password is Candyland! The two discussion question are 1. Discuss how the technical properties of the WPPSI–IV differ from those of the WISC–V. 2. Discuss the following two-part question: When should young children be given an intelligence test? What would results be used for?

[supanova_question]

you are a teacher in a preschool or childcare setting working with children 3 to 5 years old. You want to promote growth in each of the developmental domains: physical, cognitive, social, and emotional. Using the Assignment 3: Promoting Development and Developmentally Appropriate Practice Template, choose five (5) activities for each domain, identify the materials that you will need for each activity, and describe how it promotes development (give your rational for choosing the activity). Include at least one (1) reference that supports your rationale. Please be sure that each of your activities is developmentally appropriate for your target age. You will have 20 activities total for this assignment. PLEASE WRITE IN COMPLETE SENTENCES AND FULLY DESCRIBE YOUR ACTIVITIES AND RATIONALE. best college essay help

Directions: Imagine you are a teacher in a preschool or childcare setting working with children 3 to 5 years old. You want to promote growth in each of the developmental domains: physical, cognitive, social, and emotional. Using the Assignment 3: Promoting Development and Developmentally Appropriate Practice Template, choose five (5) activities for each domain, identify the materials that you will need for each activity, and describe how it promotes development (give your rational for choosing the activity). Include at least one (1) reference that supports your rationale. Please be sure that each of your activities is developmentally appropriate for your target age. You will have 20 activities total for this assignment. PLEASE WRITE IN COMPLETE SENTENCES AND FULLY DESCRIBE YOUR ACTIVITIES AND RATIONALE. USED ATTACHED TEMPLATE

[supanova_question]

Hope of Children Charity Organization Operations Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

The organization

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction International relations are important to all organizations especially non-governmental organizations because they help in establishing links with other organizations, which are important for the organization in meeting its goals. One such organization is Hope for Children. It is a non-political, non-sectarian and non-profit making organization.

It is an international organization working in more than thirty nations in the world with full-time representatives in Uganda, UK, India, Ghana, Sri-Lanka, Zimbabwe and the Philippines. Its aim is to improve the health of children as well as giving them a future and aiding their acceptance in their societies. This paper details the operations as well as the working of Hope of Children Charity Organization.

The organization This organization has been operating in the last seventeen years under the leadership of Dr. Robert Parsons. It is accountable through its set constitution to its executive committee of trustees and members (Parsons 23). Its major objective is to help the orphaned, disabled as well as the exploited children especially those found in the developing countries.

Developing countries are mainly composed of poor populations with millions of people living below the poverty line. As a result, many children in the developing countries do not get access to the basic human requirements exposing them more risks in the society. Some besides being malnourished lack access to education resulting into an uneducated population in the society, which is unable to pull itself out of poverty (Jere and Behrman 24).

Communicable diseases and HIV/AIDS also play a major role in rendering many children in the developing nations vulnerable to many hardships in life. In addition, developing countries experience wars weakening the countries’ economy thus unable to provide for the basic needs of the less privileged in the society. Hope for children addresses the hardships that children in most developing countries experience.

The organization not only focuses on the needs of poor children but also the entire society where the children belong. It works with grass root projects in these nations with the aim of getting those who are not able to get aid support or assistance from elsewhere. These projects incorporate all the members of the society that the children belong. By so doing, the organization helps in bringing sustainable development and the eventual elimination of poverty in these societies.

Hope for Children work through a dedicated network of volunteers and international staff. They act as full time representatives in many nations to ensure that the organization achieves its aim. These representatives help in the establishment of grass root projects in the developing nations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They do so by identifying the needy children and coming up with a way to help in assisting in their situations (Jacoby and King 350). An example of such a project is the rehabilitation of street children in Kenya. In some cases, the organization not only helps the needy children but also the less privileged individuals in a given society. For instance, in Sri-Lanka the organization has set a project in Batticaloa District.

The people in this region live in extreme poverty especially after the 2004 Tsunami struck the region. Research has shown that there are nearly 48,000 disabled people in this region. These people not only lack the basic needs but also suffer much discrimination from the rest of the society. The organization has embarked on building schools, vocational training as well as outreach for families to help in overcoming the situation. Currently, the organization has numerous projects worldwide thus in need of more resources.

Hope for children draws its resources from well-wishers. It relies on the generosity, passion and the commitment of other companies in supporting their work. The support, which is mainly in form of donations include direct financial contributions to the organization’s projects, products as well as services.

Quite a number of the workers of the organization are volunteers who are committed in helping the organization succeed in its projects. Examples of organizations that collaborate with Hope for Children are Comic Relief in Ghana, British Airways, Sterea Limited, Jet2.com and Vedams among others. Most of them not only offer their services in the projects but also help in financing the organization’s projects. With the help of donors and volunteers, the organization has been able carry out its projects successfully.

The support that the organization receives has helped it to grow significantly. Parsons says that the organization began with £5,000 and now has a turnover of over £1 million (1).With the substantial support it has received from international organizations; Hope for Children has widened its scope in most developing countries.

Conclusion Through its well-established international relations, Hope for Children has been able to succeed in assisting the less privileged in most developing countries. The organization encourage the participation of needy children as well as their families in processes that enhance the well being, self reliance and long term sustainable development of the children.

The organization achieves this through the provision, promotion and advancement of children rights to basic needs including education and healthcare aimed at sustaining long-term development. Donors and volunteers play a major role in enhancing the success of the organization’s projects in the developing nations.

We will write a custom Essay on Hope of Children Charity Organization Operations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Jacoby, Henry, and King, Emmy. Early Childhood Nutrition and Academic Achievement: A longitudinal Analysis. Journal of Public Economics 81.3 (2001): 345-367.

Jere, Behrman. The Impact of Health and Nutrition on Education. World Bank Research Observer 11.1 (1996): 23-26.

Parsons, Bob. A History of Hope: Hope for Children, 2011. Web. https://www.hope-for-children.org/our-story

[supanova_question]

1.Find a video clip for each of these models: Montessori, High Scope, Reggio Emilia and Head Start. YouTube is an writing essay help

1.Find a video clip for each of these models: Montessori, High Scope, Reggio Emilia and Head Start. YouTube is an excellent resource. 2.After you review each video, describe five characteristics you observed about how each program is conducted. Please include the URL address for each video you review. 3.In addition, write a 500 word essay about which program you prefer and why.

[supanova_question]

Diversity Training of a Multicultural Workforce Term Paper essay help online

Abstract Diversity training of a multicultural workforce in the military is one of invaluable ways used to build a strong military workforce. Diversity training opens people’s mind, changes their attitudes towards each other thus promoting productivity. The military personnel appreciate and respect each other when they understand the importance of cultural diversity.

Recognized talents are maintained and improved. The military not only work for the U.S. but also is prepared to work internationally with people of different cultures. Training increases, competency and communication barriers are broken enhancing productivity. So as to make full utilization of diversity, planning is an important tool. It is a roadmap to achieving the goals of the military.

Introduction The U.S. military consist of five major groups: “The Army, Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps and Coast guards” (Powers, 2011, p. 1). Varvel (2000) has adopted the following definition for cultural diversity, “Cultural diversity refers to the differences in age, ethnic heritage, gender, national origin, marital status, physical ability/qualities, race, religion, economic status, education and sexual orientation” (Varvel, 2000, p. 4).

Women and people from different races and ethnic groups are being recruited in the military at the present time. An analysis of diversity training in a multicultural workforce to personnel serving in the United States military reveals that it yields many benefits. The benefits accrued from such training are critically analyzed in this paper.

Globalization and International Competency Diversity training equips the workforce to extend its service to other countries where other languages are spoken. Diversity training thus breaks the barrier of language in many countries. The image created by diversity training is dynamism and the military workforce is able to interact effectively with people from different cultures.

Diversity training creates a good image. Since the goal of the U.S. military is to reach even outside the U. S., a diverse military workforce creates a good platform of influence. Good management in the military is an important tool because it helps in integration of the talents and the skills in different people. Management helps in planning and implementation of the proposed strategies (Preson, Casey,

[supanova_question]

Description of the Water Resource Problem (Origins) Research Paper essay help online free: essay help online free

In the recent past, fishing operations in some of the globes most prosperous fishing grounds in the North Atlantic Ocean have been shut down. However, this did not really astonish adherents of the fishing industry. As time elapsed, numbers of several species of diverse fish has dwindled progressively. This has majorly been due to the fact that there has been overfishing in the area. Simply put, the fish have been brought in faster than they can replicate. Consequences of the shutting down include loss of thousands of jobs.

However, from the time of closure, the number of fish in the area has gone up. On the other hand, it is hard to predict how long it will take to recover fish stocks due to the weight of the impact of past fishing activities thus enabling commencement of large scale fishing activities.

This problem is not exclusive to the North Atlantic Ocean but is actually widespread in majority of the large scale, commercial significant fish stocks in the US, which have been fully subjugated or basically “overfished”. A large percentage (over 20%) of fish varieties has been depleted globally.

Depletion of this resource is due to the demand of fish in the world, which has seen significant growth (Crisp, 2003).This demand has seen an influx of enormous boats in huge intercontinental convoys with high-tech fishing gear. They devastate the recovering fish population in an effort to collect larger amounts of fish.

Sealing off of these areas educates man on how technological advancements in the fishing industry have a negative impact on the environment. These impacts need to be checked to safe guard endangered fish species as a result of our actions. This should be addressed within the first three months.

The elimination of nodules of manganese from the floors of the ocean will result in a big difference regarding the condition of the oceans resources. This is widely considered as the responsibility of the United Nations Convention on the law. This act will be aimed at fortification of the ocean resources. The safeguarding of the ocean waters will create a favorable environment for the survival of the endangered species. This can be effective within a period of four years (Stowe, 2006).

The regulation of oceanic fishing helps to curb the increased acts of overfishing. With overfishing being a major predicament, stern actions must be put into effect for the issue to plummet. The reduction of the numbers of the vessels of fishing will be efficient in regulation of overfishing. However, the capacity of the fishing vessels should be put into greater consideration. Their sizes should be capped in order for the initial large stocks of fish to be attained.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The regulation of fishing by fortification of most of the endangered species will create awareness and consideration amongst individuals on the harm and gap they have caused to marine life. This will entail the restoration of the most fished species. Managing of the ocean resources by closing of fishing sites during the times of reproduction should be effected to limit these aggravating acts of excessive fishing.

This being a global issue, there is need for the increase in the number of government subsidized researches on the oceanic ecosystems. The provision of education to the citizens on the importance of protection of marine life will bring great improvements to the condition of the oceans. There is need for the maintenance at large of the surroundings of the ocean to evade the issue of jeopardizing the lives of marine life.

Different notions concerning the issue of marine life being in danger from diverse fishermen and environmentalists have been welcomed. Most of them tried to attest that overfishing is behind fish being in danger of near extinction. This article tries to assess the perceptions Pete Dupuis, a commercial fisherman and Jeremy Jackson of the Scripps Institute of Oceanography regarding the possibility of overfishing being behind the decline in the stocks of fish. Resolutions from these two individuals have also been outlined.

Pete is a commercial fisherman who works in shifts at the Pacific Ocean. According to him, he has a boat that holds an enormous amount of the targeted fish which is swordfish, tuna and big eye. He has attested the presence of large fleets of big fish in the seas which he claims have risen to 90 percent.

He however sounds cynical as he asserts that the ocean is vast and he still attains the largest catch ever. Pete prefers research and a policy that will cater for the balance of both economic and environmental concerns to closure of fishing grounds (Berg

[supanova_question]

Leadership and Commonality Displayed by Ivo Andric Research Paper college essay help online

Introduction About the Writer

Ivo Andric is a renowned writer with a sense of patriotism explaining the difference between the general bond and interest in individuals. The author’s reputation hangs on the fact that he seems to maintain a balance between the cruelty of some public figures and the commoners (Healy 34).

In this regard, the commander in question displays as an autonomous player in the constitutionalism of any establishment. It is with profound easiness that the distinctive characteristics emerge, with the main objective of a central system of assessment for any actions taken by superiors over the subjects

Brief Overview of the Story

The story focuses on a powerful outlaw leadeer who is caught by a commander. He has a serious infection and, therefore, he endures sufferings. The commander is presented a dynamic character who is torne apart because he should place a loving husband willing to return to his wife and a strict leaders should should destroy enemies. The commander’s wife contronts a real challenge as she sees’ her husband’s cruel attitude towards the prisoner (Andric 110).

Main Body Criticism of the Story

The writer seems to center too much attention on the commander such that, no much attention describes the captive held. Therefore, critics are often against the idea that the whole story rotates around the commander. The woman’s role is not extensively defined as she is only entitled to views and opinions (Bozovic 29). She might be empathetic of the captured outlaw but is of no much help since she is afraid of the husband. Hence, opponents are of the view that the happenings should not be tailored towards similar location.

It is beyond a reasonable doubt that since, the captive is a substantial head in his group that his villagers and troops must be on the look for him. It is not quite striking as to why the writer should only concentrate on the commander while it is clear that the fundamental principle is conflict. For any officer, who feels betrayed by the guards corrective action is taken promptly (Bozovic 29). Once the leader is aware of Zhivan’s relationship with the captive, logic has it that he should be at least punished if not fired.

Revelations Related to the Story

Bearing in mind the critics opinions, some features clearly highlight the leadership endured in some communities. It is evident that Lazar was a substantial leader and a threat to the commander, which explains why he kept him in a secluded place to ensure he does not disappear. They seem to have been enemies for quite a while, and whenever an opportunity pops up, revenge would be inevitable. She is eager to follow up on the happenings and the husband’s intentions towards Lazar, by ear stopping on the conversations.

Lazar possesses a strong personality with intense courage to endure the trauma imposed on him. Even so, at some point he feels overpowered by the pain and almost gives in due to the mounting pressure (Andric 111). He exhibits qualities of a true leader, who never sacrifices his allegiance at the expense of his subjects. However, many questions arise on the range of sacrifice he is willing to do, and disclaimer of the agony.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Supposing there is no controversy at all, then how will the leaders exert their influence on the people. What then should be the way out for conflicting parties, and how should they settle their differences for the mere advantage of the people at the stake. For sheer satisfaction of all and sundry, limitations are enacted so as to secure a better living environment, obtain better living conditions and a tranquil surrounding to maintain a conventional coexistence.

Key Messages/Themes/Symbols of the Story Use of Imaginary

The key messages displayed in this article are leadership and cannons of undesirable authority. Regardless of the conflict involved between parties, there is a harmonious way of solving problems, not necessarily involving torture and abuse. The main image shown is the fact that there has been feuding between the two leaders. There is also a feature of wife submission to the husband, as the commander’s wife is extremely passive to correct him in case of any mistakes done.

There is the use of imagery in the story, as it explains the foul smell coming from the outlaw’ wound and the different ways he tries to get concern for his situation (Bozovic 29). Cruelty is shown both by the commander and the bandit, in that the outlaw has been relentless in dealing with those opposed to his ideas and opinion, while the commander seems to use the full practice of justice by initiating ways of compelling the outlaw to disclose his friends whereabouts and denounce their deeds.

The outlaw is believed to be the head of a retaliating group from the government or the administration at hand. There is no other explanation as to why people must rebel against the constituted laws. On the other side, the government may be misusing state funds; this propelling rebels amongst the subjects. It is evident with the rivalry that is showcased in the story. The commander’s wife is a trademark of a treasured family setup involving a generous and well-hearted wife who submits to the husband.

Opposition to the Critics

It is not appropriate for the critics to bring about the issues of the outlaw friends since, by them showing up, the story will shift focus to the entire group. The wife’s’ place in the story is not clearly defined, and her job is not to question the husband’s decisions regardless of whether they oppose the moral values (Talmor 86). She is only seen to reflect deep on the atrocities committed, and the way she can help is by keeping her own mind as the husband has a bitter attitude.

Simply put, the commander should look into the reasons as to why the outlaws function rather than torturing the victim which might even lead to his death without the mere knowledge of the other banned group members. The commander lacks the virtue of tolerance and understanding, all he does is to persecute the outlaw with agony (Norris 272). May be if he gave the outlaw a chance to explain his activities then, the other troops could be caught without compromising any situation.

My Opinion

This story simulates to disillusioned happenings of the commander’s attack activities and coarse boldness. It points to the cruelty expounded by leaders on any delinquent found guilty of any offence. With such a view of things, then the problem would have been resolved without anybody being hurt. Lazar is a self-proclaimed person, and his ego drives him towards causing trouble to the civilians who go against his wishes. In essence, it should not be too hard to get them if only he did not use harsh punishment on them (Talmor 90).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Leadership and Commonality Displayed by Ivo Andric specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lessons Learned from the Story

In my generation, this story can be easily read and understood. Nevertheless, to say that they will enjoy is categorically different since, the story does not seem to bring about the passion expected from an attractive piece of writing. For, any feature to engage the reader’s opinion, it should have a steady flow of events and a powerful humor. The idea of the outlaw being tortured every now and then does not bring the purest view of events, and is also tiring and boring to read about the same issue with no amusement at all.

May be if the story was centered in more precise setting and characters then the value of humor would be employed. Nonetheless, lessons can be learned from the entire story, of exercising persistence and lenience to the inferiors. For the leaders, they should not dwell so much on punishing those who wrong them but, should be determined to find a solution so as to circumvent problems. Dialogue is the best alternative to retrieve individual differences rather than fighting.

This article also depicts the qualities of an exemplary leader which enable them to exercise their mission effectively. In this regard, different fields of disciplines should be taught so as to encourage people to trust the leadership. If people have confidence in the leaders, then no rebels will be encountered. Honesty, trust and integrity, should be the virtues exercised by the leaders. On the other hand, people should exercise patience on their leaders and follow their decisions, which are based on their content (Bozovic 29).

Works Cited Andric, Ivo. The Slave Girl and Other Stories about Women. Central European University Press, 2009. Print. pp. 107-112.

Bozovic, Marijeta. Rev. The Slave Girl and Other Stories about Women. by Ivo Andric. Central European University, 2009. Print.

Healy, Tim. Forum: What Shall We Read?: These Stories Are Ours, Ivo Andric, The Bridge on the Drama. Conversations on Jusuit Higher Education, 30.26 (2006): 34.

Norris, David A. “Ivo Andrić: Bridge between East and West [book review].” The Modern Language Review 82.1 (1987): 272. Print.

Talmor, Sascha. “Europe Ends at Travnik: Ivo Andric’s Bosnian Chronicle.” European Legacy 3.1 (1998): 84-99. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Leadership and Commonality Displayed by Ivo Andric by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Impact of the Media on Society Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Society plays significant role in socialization of young generation by influencing their values and attitudes. Traditionally, socialization process took place under well structured units such as family, religion and schools. However, due to shift towards modern and technologically oriented society, news media is largely controlling socialization process.

Over the years, media usage by teenagers between ages of eight to eighteen has been increasing (Rideout et al. 2). On average, teenagers spend more time watching movies, listening to music, chatting on-line with friends on social networks as well as playing video games. This has left little time for them to engage in other activities such as interacting with parents.

Technological advancement has also enhanced accessibility to on-line and mobile media which is widely used by young generation. Mobile media through cell phones, laptops and iPods have increased exposure of teenagers to outside world. The exposure has increased usage, which in turn increases media opportunities to socialize teenagers compared to other social structures such as family.

Media usage patterns profoundly reflect on opinions and attitudes of an individual (Multz 38). Different media platforms differ in what they represent to the audience when presenting similar or same subject. Media presentation may not always be biased (O’Brien 11).

Besides, media business is less concerned with broadcasting facts; it gives priority to analysis and subjective assessment which may touch on few factual details. Such an analysis influences political attitudes and opinions of the audience due to technique and order used in presentation of news. Moreover, family may play a role in political socialization but ultimately, media has greater impact owing to change in family structure and increased exposure as well as usage by young generation.

Agenda setting by media dictates the nature of information that is availed to the public (O’Brien 11). Usually, cognition process in individuals depends on available information. If an individual’s exposure to information relies on media, opinions of individual will profoundly depend on such information.

However, advanced technology generation coupled with various media platforms has led to less reliance on media since individuals do not have to fully depend on a single source of media to gain knowledge on specific subjects. There is a wider prerogative to evaluate information from different sources before forming an opinion.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, various kinds of communication offer audience opportunity to access accurate and unbiased information. This assists individuals to form their own opinion after evaluation of information available from various sources thereby mitigating the effect which media had before in the course of influencing attitudes and opinions.

Over the years, politicians have also made use of media consultants to set their agenda for political campaigns (Trent

[supanova_question]

Socio-Political and Economic Environment of Latin America Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction The twists and turns of the decade have left their mark on the ecocultural background of Latin America. Down from strains to changes and reforms the economic setup has let a memorable picture of progress. A lot has gone by over the years with change making an impression on the cultural value of the economic heritage. Undeniably the economy is a relevant and pertinent beacon for culture enthusiasts.

Argument Cultural Roots

The last few decades have seen the various trading blocs make attempts at harmonizing the competition from the great internal markets with the lesser external markets. It is during this period that organizations such as the Latin American integration association have been formed in attempts at providing a central source of control. This has been motivated by growth and expansion in population and consequent demand attracting more interest to cities and towns which are considered the hub of culture.

Towards the end of the 19th century the debate for and against harmonization has come to the attention of both economic and cultural scientists who have resolved to give socialism and communism in an attempt at sticking a compromise. Questions of economic gaps also continue to claim the greater share of attention with the gap between the haves and have-nots widening by the day.

The question of blending the traditional and more generous culture into the al too capitalist setup has created an even greater platform for the entertainment of socialist and communist ideas that continuously provide solutions to cultural deficiencies brought about by modernization.

Historical Roots

The historical pretext and antecedent is rather impressive contrary to general opinion. A common denominator in all indigenous population was their affinity to commerce and economics in the strict since of trade. Clearly every regional segmentation bears a connection to this cultural artifact in one way or another (Smith 2005).

The term Latin America was developed to represent the differences in ethnicity culture size and population of the regional divide as well as the shared colonial experiences that made a great impact on the economic pace of the region in the late eighteenth and mid seventeenth century.

Countries and states made a break for identity in the economic realm by aggression and a heightened appetite for modernization that saw traditional rural setup gradually give way for modern industrialization. The shift from mass media to the modern day multimedia played an even greater role on characterizing the ideological and social rebirth of the region as a whole.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Families no longer took turns to harvest each other crop or assist each other transport their produce to the market. The interpersonal gap grew even bigger especially after the world wars that spread a shiver and fever of suspicion in that spilled on into the cold war and post cold war 19th century (Appelbaum et al. 2006).

Cultural Periods

According though the structuralisms and dependentista scholars Latin Americas economy has survived two main regimes. The first embraced the concept of externally dependent economy based on the premise that Latin Americas dependency on the external world would promote growth if regulated by a powerful state(Bethell 2008).Gradually the approach was found to fail substantially and was found only to be viable as far as the colonial days was concerned.

This subsequent failure led to the second totally different literal regime based on the contemporary thinking of the new world. Latin America was no longer on its needs and it did not need to be nursed by a powerful state. The time had come to let her crawl on her own. This motivated their capitalist ideas into supporting the local market over and above external aid and assistance. This marked the beginning of the long struggle to the current day economic status (Mignolo 2005).

Conclusion Little by little the present generation is picking up the progressive state. The dream that never was of making Latin America among the most developed country still thrives in the culture and practice of its people. It remains in the teachings and stories as well as traces of books and journals that have been left to keep a record of the progress the coming generations have made.

Economics as a cultural artifact has a long and rather impressive story that has often been ignored and belittled by many. Every society’s cultural heritage is pegged to the level of trade and exchange and Latin America is of no exception. The society continues to adapt by mounting leadership from within the ambit of indigenous societies with the object of searching for more creative ways of meeting the challenges that are brought by the century.

The future lies not far off since the social political environment is positively aggressive and competitive (Smith 2005). This means that the coming generations will need to adjust their strategies to meet the demands of the contemporary market. Such changes would include letting loose the conservatist cultural approaches and cutting some slack for the modernist movement. Most of all governments need to embrace the tradition of change and facilitate this progression.

References Appelbaum, et al. (2006). Race and Nation in Modern Latin America. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 87-107.

We will write a custom Essay on Socio-Political and Economic Environment of Latin America specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Bethell, L. (2008).The Cambridge History of Latin America.Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Mignolo, W. (2005). The Idea of Latin America. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell. pp. 77–80

Smith, P. (2005). Modern Latin America (6 Ed.). Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.

[supanova_question]

The Syrian Protests Essay (Article) college essay help near me

The Syrian Protests Syria is at a critical stage following the recent domestic unrest that has attracted international attention. The anti-government protests began in mid-March this year with citizens calling for meaningful economic and political reforms. Unfortunately, the military-backed government responded to these calls violently; killing hundreds of anti-government protesters. More recently, there has been much international condemnation over the government’s use of lethal force against the protesters.

Nevertheless, the Syrian government blames armed groups of violent attacks on the citizens and “unarmed” security forces killing 300 soldiers. The Syrian unrest has many implications in the region and the government’s attack on peaceful demonstrators is likely to affect Syria’s international relations. The Syrian government’s response to the uprising has been excessive use of force to quell the violence and consolidate power.

The International Community’s Response The Syrian government’s response to the protests is likely to affect international relations in many fronts. Firstly, the international reactions to the Syrian unrest and the Syrian government’s response have raised the concerns of Western governments including the United States and European countries.

Many Western governments have expressed condemnation over President Al-Assad’s violent response to the peaceful demonstrators. Secondly, following the uprising, many people are fleeing Syria into the neighboring Middle East countries. Many of these refugees pose a security threat to the country of destination. The Syrian government reports that 700 people, described as terrorists along with their families, escaped custody of Syrian authorities and entered Turkey.

From the human rights front, the Syrian government is accused of human rights abuse. The mass killing of protesters and dissenting military is likely to lower Syria’s international rating with respect to human rights. The London-based Syria Observatory for human rights reports that, over 1,100 civilians have died following the protests. Additionally, about 10,000 people are incarcerated in jails since the start of the uprising.

The Syrian government’s violent response to protesters that has led to mass killings, gross abuse of human rights, and the fear of terrorists infiltrating into neighboring countries like Lebanon and Turkey; will inevitably affect international relations attracting sanctions or military action to force the government to implement necessary economic and political reforms.

Following the Syrian’s uprising and the government’s violent response, the credibility of the Syrian government in the international arena is low. Instead of implementing necessary reforms, President Al-assad mobilized the military to quell the Syria’s internal strife.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The military operation has resulted into the deaths of over 300 military personnel and over 1000 civilians. The regime has deployed its army to counter the uprising resulting into an internal war. Currently, Al-Assad’s regime is fighting to stay in power and is using all means to quell the insurgency against the will of the citizens.

The mounting international pressure on the Syrian government to stop the killings and human rights abuses is an indication that in the international opinion, Syria’s current regime is illegitimate and dictatorial. President Al-Assad is under much criticism from the United States, European countries and Asia to step down and allow regime change.

The uprising is motivated by need for democratic change hence has the support of the international community. However, the regime’s response to these protests, including killings, abuse of human rights, and detention of civilian, makes Al-Assad’s regime illegitimate; hence, the international sanctions and call for regime change. The international community is calling for a guided political transition to prevent the uprising from escalating into a civil war.

[supanova_question]

Marriage and Family Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Thematic Analysis of Movies

Works Cited

Introduction Marriage and Family is an interesting topic to be discussed within the context of this study. In order for the study to be helpful or resourceful to the reader, the researcher will embark on analysis of marriage and family as discussed in the three movies that include David Morrell’s First Blood, Pale Rider (1985) and Saturn-day Night fever.

Marriage is considered as an institution just like the family. Based on the themes under discussion, marriage and family differ based on the type of the society in which they are applied. However, marriage is considered as the union between two parties for instance a man and woman.

Some people define marriage as a relationship between a man and woman with an aim of forming a family by fulfilling the role of procreation. In contrast, people can live together but in real sense, they are not married to each other meaning that marriage is not the act of a man living with a woman but the agreement between the two parties.

In tradition society, marriage is practiced differently compared to the modern society. For instance, in traditional society, many people practice polygamous more often than monogamous, which is practiced in modern society.

The reason behind polygamous marriage was that in ancient time’s people consider children as source of security meaning that for a certain family to have potential security, a person should marry many wives. In contrast to modern society whereby children are considered as a blessing in the extended context, many people in the modern society treasure monogamous types of marriages.

In addition to this, the manner in which marriage is conducted matters a lot when it comes to differentiating of marriage in traditional and modern society. For instance, in traditional society marriage was not conducted in church as opposed to modern society where wedding ceremonies are presided over by pastors and priests whose purpose is to bless the marriage. Moreover, in the traditional society, people used to elope other people daughters at night hence forming a ritual among other western countries and the U.S.

Parents were entirely involved in the marriage of their sons and daughter because they were said to play important role in marriage arrangements. Many US scholars as arranged marriages that are rarely practiced consider this form of marriages in the modern society. Traditionally, marriages were considered as being more expensive compared to the modern society because in traditional society, large herds of cattle were to be handed over to the bridegroom parents as appreciation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is very different to what is practiced in the modern society. However, marriage can be considered as the engine of a family meaning that it is impossible for a family to exist without marriage. Family is considered as an entity that acts as the product of marriage and it forms the basis of the society. The implication here is that society is a complex entity that comprises of sub-entities known as families. Just like marriage, families differ based on the type of the society in which it is applied.

For instance, in traditional society, extended families dominated over nuclear families that are practiced in modern society. People in modern society advocate for a nuclear family in which a man and woman control over their family without influence from other family members such as their parents. Traditionally, gender roles have changed due to advanced education systems that call for gender equity between men and women.

Based on this issue, the core role of the study is to discuss various marriage and family themes as portrayed in the three movies under discussion. Examples of themes to be discussed within the context of the study include betrayal, father/son theme, traditional gender roles, traditional family roles, Orphaned sons/Adopted fathers, primogeniture, absent fathers/fatherless sons, communalism/individualism and the rugged individualist.

Thematic Analysis of Movies Traditional gender roles is a theme portrayed in Movie-David Morrell’s First Blood by characters such as Sylvester stallone (John Rambo), delmare Berry,Will Teasle, Art galt and Caruso. Sylvester is ready to use all the available means to get Delmare berry hence depicting the roles of male gender in looking after the female.

Sylvester’s efforts reveal the duties performed by men. It is also clear that Sylvester is loving and caring and that is the reason he accepts to suffer because of berry. It is very uncertain that all of his mere efforts are unfruitful because Berry had already died from cancer that emanated from the Agent Orange exposure Galt death (Morrell 15).

Pale rider is a movie by Clint Eastwood who was a preacher. The movie describes how Clint Eastwood had good relations with the people from the village whereby he used to preach. Clint came to realize that Richard Dysart who was a mining boss had exploited his people.

Through the character of Clint Eastwood, the movie highlights the lives of people in the village by demonstrating how Richard Dysart intended to raid them. The reason behold his intention was to take control over the Gold and privatize the land. Richard Dysart and his son Christopher Penn hired guns with an aim of driving the people from the town.

We will write a custom Essay on Marriage and Family specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Through the struggle between the gold mining boss, his son and the town people, Sydney Penny pet was killed. It is from that point when Sydney penny prays to God to send someone who could save the community from the attack. This incidence explains how Clint Eastwood intervened by joining hands with unofficial leader of miners by the name Michael Moriarty (Gerstner and Staiger 12).

The two characters defended against Richard Dysart and Christopher Penn his son. At the same time, Sydney Penny (Megan) and her mother by the name Sarah were drawn closer to the preacher. The theme of father and son is demonstrated whereby Richard Dysart joined hands with his father to raid the town people.

This was definitely evil because their actions were against the community wishes. The two characters portrayed a theme of individualism as it is tied in marriage and family concept in the movie. Richard Dysart and Christopher Penny were after individual achievement thus ignoring the needs of the town people.

In addition, the town people used to earn their living through mining while Richard Dysart and Christopher wanted to take control over the gold through evil means. Traditional gender role is another theme highlighted within the context of the study whereby men are assigned the role of providers with Richard and Christopher as major characters depicting this theme (Gerstner and Staiger 37).

This movie highlights the life experience of Tony Manero who was a Nineteen-year-old Brooklyn in the Saturday night club. He is portrayed as a King of the club because he likes local disco played every Saturday night. His title came from his dancing style that was unique compared to those of other dancers.

The movie tends to demonstrate how harsh his life is outside the club whereby everything is considered unfriendly to him. For instance, at home he is used in fighting with his father over petty issues. In addition, he competes with his elder brother who is a priest something that he hates because the entire family is against him. However, the other sort of trouble is associated with his working place whereby he is disgusted by the manner in which work mates behaves at the paint store (Faludi 27).

Moreover to Tony things are subject to change when he met with Stephanie in the dance floor and began to train him on how to dancer the modern music. The movie portrays a theme of betrayal whereby Tony thought that his brother is the cause of the conflict between him and his father. However, an aspect of individualism is highlighted with Tony playing the major role. Traditional family roles as a theme are portrayed whereby Tony’s father makes decisions for his children though Tony is against it (Faludi 39).

In conclusion, the study is interesting because it explores the concept of marriage and family as discussed in the three movies. Not all themes are highlighted in each movie as discussed in the study. It father and son theme, traditional family roles, traditional gender roles, individualism, and communism and orphaned are some of themes that are dominant in the study.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Marriage and Family by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Faludi, Susan. Stiffed: the betrayal of the American man. Maryland: Perennial, 2000.

Gerstner, David and Staiger, Janet. Authorship and film. New York: Routledge, 2003.

Morrell, David. First Blood. London: Fawcett Publications, 1981

[supanova_question]

Social Classes Essay custom essay help

Introduction Social classes within communities are mostly as a result of differences in major areas of life for example the level of education, the amount of wealth or income one earns and the position that one holds in the society among other factors.

In any given society, it is common to find the upper class, the upper middle class, the lower middle class, the working class and the poor. This paper will explore the topic of class and will specifically seek to prove that it is possible for one to achieve their dreams in life regardless of the social class that they belong to.

Summary of the articles How class affects one’s education

The relationship between class and education can be evident in the article by Leonhardt and Scott (p 8), who observe that the number of students who belong to the upper class in around 250 colleges has significantly risen compared to that of students from the lower class income. This has led to some colleges looking for intervention measures that will favor the lower income earners.

This is because; they have noticed that a lot of talent is being lost because of the inability by the students from lower income families to access education. Leonhardt (p 1) further gives an example of how class can affect ones education using Andy Blevins, who decides to quit college in order to continue working. His decision is motivated by his poor background. He is an example of the many young people who decide to quit school and prefer to work because of their class.

How class affects health care

Leonhardt and Scottt (p 8) state that there is an observable difference between one class and another in terms of health care. The upper class is better placed in accessing health care and consequently has a higher life expectancy compared to the middle and the lower classes. On the other hand, the middle class is better off compared to the lower class, which is the worst hit in the area of health care and hence, a lower life expectancy compared to the other classes.

How class affects marriage

In terms of marriage, Leonhardt and Scottt (p 8) say that class determines the choice of the place where one lives and the people who one associates with. Those in the high class tend to have their children at a time in their life when they are stable financially and also due to the delay in getting married, they are able to have fewer children.

Children from the upper class therefore have more privileges in life compared to their counterparts in the lower and middle classes. Some of the effects of class on marriages are shown through the lives of Mr. Croteau and Ms Woolner. Married and from two extremes in terms of their classes, they try very hard to reconcile their differences to build up a stable family. Their differences are so pronounced until they are evident even to their children (Lewin p 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Determination and motivation regardless of one’s class

The story of James in the book ‘The Color of Water by James McBride’ is a perfect illustration of how one can succeed in life against all odds. James goes through a series of difficulties in life for example, the death of his biological father and also his step father, a background whereby the mother was abused by her father and also the race of his mother. He turns to drugs to escape from reality but later reforms and is able to have great achievements in life, which is also a source of joy to the mother (SparkNotes p1).

The story of Mr. Croteau and Ms Woolner is also one of determination and how it can help one overcome every barrier and achieve what one desires. In their marriage, they have to overcome insurmountable odds in order for it to succeed, the class difference being the greatest. By the end of the story, they are still together and have a guiding philosophy that they must press on regardless of their obstacles.

Conclusion Although class plays a significant role in the kind of life that one leads, it should not be seen as if one has to remain in one class forever. With determination and motivation, one can achieve anything, including moving up from a lower class to upper class.

Works Cited Leonhardt, David. The College Dropout Boom. New York: New York Times, 2005

Lewin, Tamar. When Richer Weds Poorer, Money Isn’t the Only Difference. New York: New York Times, 2005

Scott, Janny and Leonhardt, David. Shadowy Lines That Still Divide. New York: New York Times, 2005

SparkNotes. The color of water: plot overview. SparkNotes LLC. 2011. Web.

We will write a custom Essay on Social Classes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

The Effects of Facebook and other Social Media on Group Mind and Social Pressure Essay custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Social Networks Sites

The Effects of Social Media on Group Mind

Social Media and Social Pressure

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Online technology tools including the social media have extensive influence on people’s opinions and choices. It creates new forms of social pressure, which is extensive in scope compared to face-to-face interactions. Social pressure is the peer group influence that encourages an individual to change his/her behavior, values, and attitudes in conformity with those of the group (Boyd 121).

Individuals are also required to conform to certain behaviors or attitudes in order to be accepted by the members of a particular social network. Members of a particular social network have to conform to certain principles that define the social group despite the difference of opinion. Just like any social groups, social media creates a collective mind whereby the members embrace certain rules that govern the group without any objections.

Thus, social media establishes a group mind. The social media has profound impacts on group mind and peer pressure particularly on the youth. Social media such as Facebook have both negative and positive impacts on the youth, who form the majority of the users. Social media represents a convergence of minds leading to crowd behavior, which has both negative and positive impacts on the society. While social media may have negative impacts on the society, they also facilitate positive social development.

The Social Networks Sites Social network sites (SNSs) allow users to create their own profile to contact or be contacted by others. They entail common internet-based services including blogs, content-sharing sites such as You Tube, Facebook, and MySpace. Boyd defines SNSs as “a category of websites with individuals’ profiles displayed that allow online communication” (123).

The social networking sites enable individuals to interact through texts, chatting or exchange of video contents. Through social media, individuals are connected to others through virtual communities created online. Over the past few years, there has been unprecedented adoption of the social network sites such as Facebook around the globe. However, two factors influence the adoption of SNSs- the privacy concerns and the attitudes towards social grooming (Tufekci 544).

One of the most prevalent SNSs is Facebook, which is dominated by youth, particularly college students. The SNSs possess specific features that accelerate their mass adoption (Boyd 124). Like most SNSs, Facebook provides a personalized page that allows each user to enter personal information including addresses, interests, educational background, and recent activities. It also allows users to identify friends, invite others to join, and create a virtual online community that allows more interactivity with an invisible audience.

Boyd identifies four features of persistence viz. the ability to search likeminded individuals, the ability to share and the invisible audiences as important features of SNSs that have accelerated their adoption (Boyd 124). These features of SNSs attract millions of users to social media globally. In contrast, Face-to-face interactions have limited capabilities with regard to the level of interaction.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More SNSs such as Facebook have features that keep users updated about developments in their social circles. For example, the “News Feed” feature on Facebook, allows users to view the news and stories generated from their friend’s activities (Gonzales and Hancock 231).

The “Facebook groups” feature allows users to search and join groups that share common interest and activities. Additionally, this application displays an individual’s group and the user can request his/her friends to join the same group creating a group mind. Thus, through the groups created by users or organizations, Facebook and other social media can cause political and civic impacts.

The Effects of Social Media on Group Mind In their analysis of the effects of Facebook on an individual’s self-confidence, Gonzales and Hancock established that social connection through SNSs promotes self-esteem, friendship performance, and enhances online and off line connections (233). Of great importance is the potential of SNSs to ‘bridge” and “bond” existing offline relationships. This implies that SNSs offer a framework for establishing and maintaining groups comprised of like-minded individuals.

More interestingly, the authors found out that frequent Facebook usage led to improved psychological well-being; thus, beneficial to individuals experiencing low self-esteem. In addition, Tufekci established that online communication sites such as Facebook and MySpace, encourage individual participation in community life, fosters social norms and increases social interaction, which is an indication of the influence that SNSs have on group mind (546).

In addition, the author found out that social interaction and collective opinion were more prevalent in SNSs users compared to non-users. This suggests that SNSs are essential to social grooming, an important element that enhance the functioning of complex societies. The increased interactions provide the youth an opportunity for status negotiation as a group and identity formation in the public front. According to Gonzales and Hancock, “the internet has provided tools for promoting self-awareness and social participation” (235).

By allowing sharing of photos, comments and personal details, the SNSs provide a platform for political and civic participation through various social groups and providing an opportunity for self-presentation and increased social interaction. In this way, the social media has redefined the social processes in two ways; it has encouraged individual development through enhancement of self-esteem and social trust among users who share common ideals, and increased civic and political participation.

Although social media increases social interaction, access to self and increased social participation, there are concerns about individual privacy. In most social media, friends and other people can view an individual’s profile and personal details. Moreover, the SNSs allow teens to share salient aspects about themselves to online friends, who are most often, their offline friends from school, work or church. Thus, despite the privacy concerns, SNSs promote social interaction and group bonding.

We will write a custom Essay on The Effects of Facebook and other Social Media on Group Mind and Social Pressure specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Social Media and Social Pressure One of the important features that attract people to social media is its ability to allow people to stay connected. Through social media such as Facebook and MySpace, people are able to share pictures, comments and fun. However, the SNSs often pose social pressures for people to join and use them.

People are often under pressure to present a positive online identity much like their offline identity. Teenagers, more particularly, are usually under social pressure to present an online identity desirable by their peers (Narang). In addition, some social media have established social cultures that regulate online behavior.

Even in the workplace, social media has become common with employees feeling pressure to join and use these social network sites. This pressure can come from within the organization or from an individual (Narang). According to Gonzales and Hancock, social media promote self-esteem and life satisfaction, as people are able to connect and interact with friends (Gonzales and Hancock 237). Employees who interactions on the social media believe that by joining the social media, their job performance will be enhanced (Narang Para.9).

At the same time, youths are often under pressure to join the social media such as Facebook because it allows them to share news, engage in discussions regarding public issues such as politics or private issues such as entertainment or sports. However, concerns about social media including dangers of information disclosure, addiction, cyber bullying, and the danger of contacting dangerous communities influence people’s decision to join and use social media.

The negative effects of social media, especially among teenagers, have been a primary concern influencing the adoption of these social media. According to Luca, Facebook along with other websites, have many side effects many of which are not so social (Para.5). The social media is usually addictive.

Users log on for long hours updating their profiles, checking the friend’s profiles and befriending strangers. In addition, Facebook, just like the other social media, is intrusive on individual privacy. Despite the privacy settings on Facebook, the information posted on one’s profile is easily accessible to friends.

Contrary to popular opinion that the social media increases social interaction, it can also affect socialization. Many users log onto Facebook to chat with online friends instead of socializing with actual friends and family members, which increases alienation. In this way, social media can encourage an individual to be antisocial and lonely in real life. Social media also encourages deception as one can alter his/her online identity to suit his/her desires.

Conclusion Social media such as Facebook has both positive and negative impacts on the society. It creates a platform, majority of who are teenagers, to connect, discuss public and private issues, and learn the society norms and rules. Studies indicate that social media promotes self-esteem, social participation, and interaction compared to face-to-face interactions. However, social media also has potential negative effects. Concerns over privacy, addiction and risky behaviors among teenagers affect the adoption and usage of these social networks.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effects of Facebook and other Social Media on Group Mind and Social Pressure by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Boyd, Danah. “Why Youth (Heart) Social Network Sites: The Role of Networked Publics In Teenage Social Life.” MacArthur Foundation Series on Digital Learning – Youth, Identity, and Digital Media 4.3, (2007): 121-124.

Gonzales, Amy, and Hancock, Jeffrey. “Mirror, Mirror on my Facebook Wall: Effects of Exposure to Facebook on Self-Esteem” Cyberpsychology, Behavior, and Social Networking 14.1 (2011): 231-241

Luca, Andrei. The effects of social media on youth today, 2011. Web.

Narang, Rakesh. Five Most Deadly side-effects of Social Networking, 2010. Web.

Tufekci, Zeynep. “Grooming, Gossip, Facebook and MySpace” Information, Communication

[supanova_question]

Effective Practices in Early Childhood Education Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Observations

Reflection

Conclusions

Works Cited

Introduction Early childhood education is vital for the development of a child since it aids in the development of some skills that prepare them for further schooling (Currie 3). The skills to be acquired include cognitive skills with particular attention on Intelligence Quotient (IQ). Other developments include social well being and the emotional state of the child.

As much as high IQ levels do not always spell good adulthood, it has a positive correlation with success in various aspects of life and the level of IQ in young children can be affected through deficiencies (Currie 3). Early childhood education in such institutions as kindergartens is also important in preparing the child for further schooling and some studies have shown that about only 65 percent of children entering school are thought to be actually ready for school (Bredekamp 10).

The Bronfenbrenner’s Ecological Model which was developed by Urie Bronfenbrenner tries to demonstrate the environment that rotates around the child and affects his or her development of the socialization skills (Bronfenbrenner 1). The Microsystems layer of his model indicates the environment that the child lives and relates with.

This includes the people and the various institutions that the child interacts with. Mesosystems layer also affect the children even though they are not directly involved in the interactions. This layer shows the interactions that occur between people who revolve around the life of the child such as interactions between the parents and the children’s teachers or interactions among the child’s neighbours.

The Exosystems layer includes the wider community where the child relates with and it includes the family friends, neighbours, the extended family and the media. The Macrosystems layer generally includes the attitudes and perceptions and the laws of a particular group of people.

These layers indicate the various components in a child’s life and determine how the life of the child will be shaped. In the Bronfenbrenner’s Ecological Model, the child is placed in the middle because all that happens around the child affects other people and consequently, what the child does also affect them (Bronfenbrenner 1). An example to show how these Exosystems influence the child can be seen when the life of the child is affected as a parent goes out of the country for further studies and only comes visiting once in a while.

Observations I chose to observe the Pre-K classroom in the Daycare institution for my field experience assignment. The class consisted of children aged between 3 and 5, according to information obtained from one of the teachers. The Pre-K classroom had a total of sixty children and they were taught and coordinated by two teachers making the student- ratio 1:30. All the teachers in the Daycare facility had to have attained a certain level of education. They were all university graduates and had to have pursued a diploma in Psychology.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Teachers interacted freely with the pupils as they joined them in performing some of the activities. When a student asked for help the teachers were always ready to respond and assist. As much as the work was intense for the two teachers, they struggled to make sure that the children were assisted.

The curriculum included oral, written and practical studies. The oral studies were supposed to improve their skills in expressing themselves, the writing was meant to improve their skills in presentation while the practical studies which included working in groups, improved their socialization skills.

The interior design was well finished and despite the large number of students, each student had a chair and desk and enough space to perform their duties. After every two months, parents were invited to have a day-in-school with their children where they could interact with the teachers and check on the progress reports. This day was special as the children together with their parents were assigned into groups for interactive sessions.

Reflection The student teacher ratio was 1:30 which is not healthy for learning of young children since they require sufficient attention and coordination (Marilyn 23). The teachers’ credentials were impressive and they possessed the necessary knowledge for handling the children (Bredekamp 6).

The way they interacted with the children and the way they encouraged the children to get into groups improved their social skills (Bronfenbrenner 1). The curriculum was of high standard since it encouraged the development of social, emotional and cognitive skills (Bredekamp 3).

The classroom environment was very conducive for learning. Daycare set aside certain days for parents to visit and this gave the teachers an opportunity to observe the interaction between the parents and the students so as to explain some of the developments of the children.

Conclusions Early childhood education is important as prepares children for continued learning in elementary school and other forms of education (Bredekamp 3). The educators in the early childhood institutions also assist parent-who go away to work all day and cannot be with them-in nurturing their children. Special attention should therefore be paid so as to ensure that the childhood of every child is secured so as to ensure bright them of a bright future (Bredekamp 18).

We will write a custom Essay on Effective Practices in Early Childhood Education specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Bredekamp, Sue. Effective Practices in Early Childhood Education: Building a Foundation. United States: Merrill, 2010. Print.

Bronfenbrenner, Urie. The ecology of human development: Experiments by nature and design. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1979. Print.

Currie, Jane. Early Childhood Education Programs. America: American Economic Association, 2001. Print.

Marilyn, Fleer. Identifying Teacher-child interaction Which Scaffolds Scientific Thinking in Young Children. Australia: University of Canberra, 1992. Print.

Papalia, Diane E. Wendkos, Sally And Fildman, Ruth. A child’s world: infancy through adolescence. McGraw: McGraw-Hill, 2002. Print.

[supanova_question]

Children’s Socialization Essay college essay help

Socialization is a process by which a child is initiated to various roles of the society. The behavior or attitude adopted by the child depends mostly on the background that the child is brought up in. Children accept and adopt the characters portrayed by the person responsible of taking care of them such as parents, teachers and neighbors surrounding the child.

A family forms the smallest unit in which the child’s socialization is initiated. It is observed that various families have various impacts to the socialization of a child (Roberta 129). From the observation carried out in a number of families it was observed that in the family where parents are very close to their children and offered guidance or assistance to the children, discipline them whenever they do something wrong, the child is observed to have morals and respect (Janet 234).

On the other hand, it was observed that in families where the parents have no time to spend with their children, the children are observed to have low morals, independent and self centered.

In the family park it was observed that children behaved and socialized differently, some children were seen to be more jovial and cheerful where others were seen to be lonely and uninterested. Some parents were observed playing games with their children where else other were just seen to have no interest with the games played by the child.

It was observed that those children who parent interacted and assisted them in play games were friendly and had a good social life compared to the child who parents had no time to spend with them in playing games (Roberta 374).

School is another agent of socialization. In the school context, it was observed that teachers and pears play a great role in influencing the socialization process of the child. Teachers act as role models to the children, they adopt teacher characters and attitudes toward life (Roberta 235).

In a class where teachers are friendly and give positive remarks to the children as well as giving them a chance to express themselves, the children were observed to possess positive attitudes towards studies. They also appeared motivated and eager to learn new things. When the teacher proved to be hostile and rebuked the children by giving bad comments, the children were observed to have no interest in their studies and their level of interaction was limited (Roberta 226).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Another agent of socialization that was observed was the church. It was observed that churches where children are taken through church school programs that teach morals and social responsibility have different attitude and behaviors as compared to those children who attended churches that did not have a direct attention to the children (Janet 107). It was also observed that in churches, children are taught how to interact and associate with adults.

They are taught moral concept and how to cope with various situations. The children who undergo church school teachings were seen to be more attracted to the church compared to those who did not attend such teachings (Roberta 108). The former children were also observed to be respectful to adults as well as being being obedient.

It was observed that each setting have an impact on the way the children socialize with other children or adults. Socialization is a process that cannot be initiated by one person, but it is a collective responsibility that requires all stakeholders to play their part accordingly.

Teachers, parents and adults have a great influence on social life of the child. This is so because children were observed to learn behaviors and attitude from them. Thus, it is a duty for all persons who are given the responsibility of taking care of the child to ensure that a child is given the right teaching and attention, as this will determine how the child will be in the future.

Works Cited Janet Gonzalez-Mena. Child, family, and community: family-centered early care and education. New York. Merrill Pearson. 2009. Print.

Roberta M. Berns. Child, Family, School, Community: Socialization and Support. New York: Cengage Learning. 2009. Print.

[supanova_question]

The Fourteenth Amendment to the US Constitution Essay best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Interpretation of the 14th amendment

Affirmative action

Conclusion

References

Introduction This amendment was approved on July 1868. The amendment contained two important clauses that marked the history of Civil rights movement in the US. These are the Equal protection clause and the Due Process clause.

The former guaranteed equal protection of the law while the latter protected individuals from deprivation of life, liberty and property by the state without the due process of law. This article looks into the various interpretations given to the Fourteenth Amendment, limitations to its applications and the affirmative action.

Interpretation of the 14th amendment The problem that faced the court was in determining what could qualify as equal protection. The first attempt to interpret the Equal protection clause was made in the infamous case of Plessy Vs Ferguson (1896), which advocated for racial segregation. Justice Brown was concerned with the reasonableness of the clause.

He argued that when the court is reviewing state legislation it should consider regulation of public order and the tradition or custom of the people. “In short, the Court created a very lenient standard when reviewing state legislation: If a statute promotes order or can be characterized as a tradition or custom… the statute meets the requirements of the clause” (Peter, 1998, Par 3).

In Brown Vs Board of Education (1954) however, the Equal Protection clause was given a new meaning. Justice Earl Warren found that segregated facilities did not amount to equal protection in law. He stated:

“…the doctrine of ‘separate but equal’ has no place. Separate educational facilities are inherently unequal. Therefore, we hold that the plaintiffs and others…are, by reason of the segregation complained of, deprived of the equal protection of the laws guaranteed by the Fourteenth Amendment” (Brown Vs Board of Education, 1954).

Hernandez v. Texas (1954) the Court found that the Equal Protection clause to apply to not only whites and blacks but also other races and ethnic groups. Among these, other races were the Mexican-Americans. Since Brown case, women and illegitimate children have been included in the Equal Protection Clause.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More “The Supreme Court accepted the concept of distinction by class, that is, between “white” and Hispanic, and found that when laws produce unreasonable and different treatment on such a basis, the constitutional guarantee of equal protection is violated” (Carl 1982. Par.2).

The Due Process Clause was not only meant to protect basic procedural rights but also substantive rights. In the case of Gitlow Vs New York (1925), protection of press from abridgement by the legislature was held to be some of the fundamental freedoms protected by the ‘due process’ clause of the fourteenth Amendment from infringement by the state. Here it was dealing with the substantive rights incorporated in the bill of rights.

However, the decision in Muller Vs Oregon (1908), showed that the state could restrict working hours of women if doing so was in their best interest. This decision was made in due regard to the physical health of a woman. It was held that the physical role of women in childbirth and their social role in the society is an issue of public interest permitting the state to regulate their working hours notwithstanding the ‘due process’ clause of the Fourteenth Amendment.

Affirmative action Even though it offered a starting point, the Fourteenth Amendment was seen not to be enough to curb discrimination and racial segregation. More positive measures were needed to protect minority groups in the US.

“Affirmative Action refers to a set of practices undertaken… to go beyond non-discrimination, with the goal of actively improving the economic status of minorities and women with regard to employment, education, and business ownership and growth” (Holzer

[supanova_question]

JD Sports Financial Report a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction JD Sports is a retailer in sports wear. It has several stores in the United Kingdom and Ireland. The company offers a wide range of products such as sports shoes, uniform and general sports accessories. The company is one of the leading companies in the sports retail sector in the United Kingdom.

This is a financial report of the company based on the financial statements for the years 2010 and 2011. The analysis is based on year to year performance and comparison of JD Sports performance against the industrial performance (Gill

[supanova_question]

“Everything’s An Argument” text Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The book “Everything’s an Argument with Readings” was edited for the forth time by Keith Waters and published in December 2006. The authors of this rhetoric book are Andrea Lunsford, John Ruszkiewicz and Keith Walters. The main idea brought out to students in this book is that there must be an argument about everything. The arguments arise as a result of different ways of viewing things by different individuals. As the saying goes, “ones man’s meat is another man’s poison” so people have different views (Inness, 52).

In evaluating an essay, a website or any other work, there are some things that must be considered. The author or authors and publisher of the work must be considered. We have to know whether the writer is qualified to do the writing in that field. We also look at the theme of the work and how evidence has been used in the source. It is also important to look at the relevance of the work to the study that has been conducted. In evaluating a work, we look at the timeliness and the credibility of the work (Inness, 68).

This book is very useful to students as it helps them to know that their environment is full of arguments and thus they ought to make their own arguments. The aim of this discussion is to evaluate the essay, “Evictions at Sorority Raise Issue of Bias” by Sam Dillon (Lunsford, Ruszkiewicz and Walters 135).

Discussion The essay “Evictions at Sorority Raise Issue of Bias” by Sam Dillon is written in a simple language and in the correct procedure that makes it a suitable source of information regarding the topic. The writer also uses evidence in his writing making the book a well-researched source of information. The writer also brings out both opposing and proposing points that make the argument progress. The essay is relevant to the topic and the purpose of the essay is brought out well.

In the essay, the argument is about the data of a survey by a psychology professor at DePauw University. In the survey, the daughters of Delta Zeta were categorized into two groups, the daddy’s little princesses and the off-beat hippies meaning the chubby girls and the slender girls. 35 members of DePauw were interviewed on their dedication to recruitment (Lunsford, Ruszkiewicz and Walters 34).

After the interview, 23 of the girls were told to vacate the sorority house. It was found that all the girls told to vacate were overweight and they were black. It was also found that the same girls were from Korea or Vietnam. The rest of the twelve girls who remained in house were slender and they were light skinned. The twelve girls were popular and social to the men in the fraternity too. Unfortunately, six of the twelve remaining girls opted to quit due to pressure and the unfair treatment (Inness, 82).

These biased evictions resulted into many arguments that brought about deeper feelings to some (Lunsford, Ruszkiewicz and Walters 13). Ms. Holloway, a senior who had withdrawn from the department, was very bitter about this and pointed out the process was unfair because it meant that the overweight were not needed. The overweight were being rendered useless as Holloway puts it in her argument. Many people were annoyed by the argument.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Despite the many who were opposing this, some people were seen to propose the same. Some people said that the university was private and therefore they were free to decide what to do without consulting the government or any other department concerned with the same. Some observers also argued that the chubby girls were known to be stupid and thick. This was a stereotype that could have advocated for the evictions.

This meant that chubby girls could not qualify to be in Universities and they therefore had to be evicted. Some proposers of the evictions said that University was only to keep beautiful and slender girls who could party and not the chubby girls. As many people grew angry because of this, the ones who supported it were seen to be at the front. This turned to a serious argument that involved many Greeks (Inness, 27).

Many of those who opposed this argued that Universities were places of learning and not for socialization and beauty. They said that the girls should have been helped to regain their body sizes and not to expel them from the University. This could also mean that the chubby people will be evicted from the country if the government does not take the necessary actions.

Some could not accept this and they said that private Universities were to make their own rules and the chubby girls should join the public Universities. This was also understood by some to mean that the chubby were not allowed to be wealthy. When they are denied education, then it means they have to struggle to get their daily living. In addition, people are supposed to use their brains at work and not their body sizes. Thus, people are employed according to their level of education and not the size of their bodies.

The president opposed this and he wrote a two page letter condemning the action. He said that this was against the laws of the nation and all people were supposed to be accorded same and fair treatment. At this point, the Dean of the University Cynthia Babington received many calls from parents and stakeholders condemning the evictions. The girls who remained in hostage were also very annoyed and Joanna Kieschnick, one of those remained, said that she could not stay and watch this happen (Inness, 82).

Conclusion It can be inferred from the evaluation of this essay that this piece of writing is a good and reliable source. First, the author is qualified personnel making him worthy to do the writing. The author is also using evidence to prove his points, both the opposing and the proposing arguments. In any kind of argument, evidence must be included.

The dean and other parties included in the essay by Sam Dillon make the essay well-researched. In arguing, the opposers and the proposers are giving reasons for the direction they have taken in the argument. The survey and the data got from it is also a reliable source of evidence as it can be proved. This could have been thought to be a small issue but due to the arguments, it became big to a point were the president had to intervene and state his position. It is therefore vey clear that everything is an argument.

We will write a custom Essay on “Everything’s An Argument” text specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Inness, Sherrie. American women and ethnic food. New York: University of Massachusetts Press, 2001.

Lunsford, Andrea, Ruszkiewicz, John and Walters, Keith. Everything’s an argument with readings. 4Edn. New Jersey: Paperback, 2006.

[supanova_question]

Lee’s Korean War Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Introduction The Korean War which is termed as the forgotten war was a military conflict that started in June 1950 between North Korean who were supported by peoples republic of China backed by Soviet Union and South Korean with support from the United Nations and the American forces.

The war was an episode of cold war where by the United States of America and Russia were fighting ideologically behind the scenes by using South and North Korea as their battle zone. After the world war two, British and American forces set a pro-western government in the southern part of Korean Peninsula while the Soviet Union initiated a communist rule in the North. The net effect of these ideological differences was the Korean War.

Causes of Korean War The causes of the Korean War can be examined in two facets

Political

Ideological

Politically, the Soviet Union wanted Korea to be loyal to Russia .This was because Korea was seen as a springboard that would be used to initiate an attack on Russia. Korean being loyal to Russia was a strategy to prevent future aggression.

The major cause of the war however, was difference in ideology between South and North Korea with Russia and America behind the scene. The two Korean zones established two separate governments with different ideologies. This were the major event that initiated the conflict In Korea.

The causes of Korean War are generally American and Soviet military occupation in North and South Korea.

The American and Soviet forces occupation in Korea divided the country on ideological basis. These differences resulted to the formation of 38th parallel which was a border between South and North Korea. This boarder increasingly became politically contested by the two functions and attracted cross boarder raids. The situation became even worse when these cross border skirmishes escalated to open warfare when North Korean army attacked South Korea on June 1950.The two super power majorly the American and Soviet Union acted by providing support and war equipment’s to the two conflicting sides.

Role of the America and Soviet Union in armament and military support to South and NorthKorea.

The Russians backed the communist regime in North Korea with the help of Kim Il-Sung and established North Korean Peoples Army which was equipped by Russian made war equipments. In South Korea, American backed government benefited from training and support from the Americans army.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Military and strategic imbalance between North and South Korea

The America and Russia failure to withdraw their troops by the late 1948, led to tensions between the two sides. By 1949, the American had started to withdraw its troops but the Russian troops still remained in North Korea considering that Korea lay as its strategic base.

This was followed by invasion of South Korea by the North Korean army because of the military imbalance that existed in the region. This forced the American to return back and give reinforcement to South Korea which was by then over ran by North Korean Army in support of the Russian troops.

Course of the Conflict Korea, a formally a Japanese colony before the end of the Second World War, changed hands to allied powers after the defeat of Japan in the year 1948. The Americans occupied the southern part of Korea while the Soviet occupied the Northern region. Korea by this time was divided along 38th parallel which demarked the boarder of the two governments.38th parallel was an area of 2.5-mile that was a demilitarized zone between north and South Korea.

In June 1950, the North Korean people army attacked South Korea by crossing 38thparallel. On June 28th the same year Rhee who was the then leader of South Korean evacuated Seoul and ordered the bombardment of bridge across Han River to prevent North Korean forces from advancing south wards.

The inversion of South Korea forced Americans to intervene and on June 25th 1950, United Nations in support of South Korea, jointly condemned North Korea’s action to invade the South. USSR challenged the decision and claimed that the Security Council resolution was based on the American intelligence and North Korea was not invited to the Security Council meeting which was a violation of the U.N. charter article 32.

North Korea continued its offensive utilizing both air and land invasion by use of about 231,000 military personnel. This offensive was successful in capturing significant southern territories such as Kaesong, Ongjin, chuncheon and Uijeonghu.

In this expedition, the North Korea people’s army used heavy military equipment such as 105T-34 and T-85 tanks, 150 Yak fighters and 200 artillery pieces. The South Korean forces were ill prepared for such offensive and within days they were overran by the advancing Northern army. Most of Southern forces either surrendered or joined the Northern Korean army.

We will write a custom Essay on Lee’s Korean War specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In response to this aggression, the then American president Henry Truman gave an order to general Mac Arthur who was stationed in Japan to transfer the troops in Japan to combat in Korea.

The battle of Osan was the first involvement of the American army in the Korean war. The war involved a task force comprised of 540 infantry men from 24th infantry division on July 5th 1950.

This task force was unsuccessful in its campaign to repel the North Korean army and instead suffered a casualty of 180 soldiers of whom were either dead, wounded or taken prisoner. The task force lacked effective military equipment to fight the North Koreans T-34 and T-85 tanks. The American 24th division suffered heavy loses and were pushed back to Taejeon.

Between August and September 1950, there was a significant escalation of conflict in Korea. This was the start of the battle of Pusan perimeter. At this battle, the American forces attempted to recapture then taken territories by the North Korean army. The United States Air force slowed North Korean advances by destroying 32 bridges.

The intense bombardment by the United States air force, made North Korean Units to fight during the nights and hide in ground tunnels during the day. The U.S. army destroyed transportation hubs and other key logistic positions which paralyzed North Korean advances.

Between October and December 1950, the Chinese entered the war on the side of the North Koreans. The United States seventh fleet was dispatched to protect Taiwan from people’s Republic of China under Mao Zedong. In 15th October 1950, Charlie Company and 70th Tank battalion Captured Namchonjam city and two days later Pyongyang which was the Capital of North Korea fell to the American 1st cavalry division.

The first major offensive by China took place on 25 October by attacking the advancing U.N. forces at Sino-Korean border. Fighting on 38th parallel happened between January and June 1951 when the U.N. command forces were ambushed by Chinese troops. The U.N. forces retreated to Suwon in the west.

On July 10th 1951, there was a stalemate between the two warring sides which led to armistice being negotiated. The negotiation went on for the next two years. The armistice deal was reached with formation of Korean demilitarized zone ending the war. Both sides withdrew for their combat position. The U.N. was given the mandate to see a peaceful and fair resolution of the conflict in the effort to end the war. The war resulted to about 1,187,682 deaths and unprecedented destruction of property[2].

Not sure if you can write a paper on Lee’s Korean War by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Effect of Korean War to American Foreign Policy The Korean War on the side of Americans perpetuated the Truman’s doctrine which was of the opinion that Russia was trying to influence the world with forceful communist ideology and therefore the United States of America would help any country that was under threat of communist.

The Korean conflict also brought into focus in future efforts to win communism from spreading allover the world. The United States realized that the best solution to stop the spreading of communism ideology was to be military in nature. The war also made America to recognize China as a powerful military might in Asia. Future diplomatic actions would need to take into account Chinas potential might[3].

After the war, military assistance was provided to Philippine government, French Indochina and Taiwan with the motive to contain the spread of communism in Asia. This military assistance would extend also in Europe to country under communist threat of occupation.

Bibliography Feldman, Tenzerh. The Korean war. Minneapolis: Twenty-First Century Books, 2004.

Fitzgerald, Brian. The Korean war: American’s forgotten war. Minneapolis: Compass Point Books, 2006.

Stueck, William. The Korean war: An international history. New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1997.

Footnotes William, Stueck. The Korean war: An international history. New Jersey: Princeton University Press, 1997.

Brian, Fitzgerald. The Korean war: American’s forgotten war. Minneapolis: Compass Point Books, 2006.

Tenzerh, Feldman. The Korean war. Minneapolis: Twenty-First Century Books, 2004.

[supanova_question]

Producing cotton products in Germany Report best college essay help

Introduction In evaluating a possible and prospective place for a new plant one inadvertently has to keep mind the most influential and relevant factors that facilitate and motivate the growth and sustenance of the said plant. An interrogation of Germany from this perspective states a viable case for the argument that it is fit to accommodate a new plant. These factors include but not limited to public opinion and attitude, government policy and production factors.

Argument Public opinion and attitude

The German public appetite towards religion was initially very high especially during the war period of the 19th century. It was mainly protestant following the accretion to power of protestant affiliate leaders such as Ottovon Bismarck. In fact prior to the Second World War up to two thirds of Germany’s population was majorly with the minority remainder being Roman Catholic.

However come 1980, the affinity to religion received a great blow with most followers opting out to avoid the church tax. Today the attitude towards religion is not as great as it was during the war period but it continues to polarize the German society. The influence is small and easy to regulate due to the dilution and division.

Down from historical antecedent Germany never had an appetite for the American concepts and lifestyles. This was motivated by the economic social and political gaps that came about during the war and post war cold war periods. This has over the years affected relations between these two cultures hindering commerce and economic ties between these two states.

This has changed though not entirely due to the changing concepts and ideas that leave enough room to facilitate smooth relations alongside the differences. It has been blended into a competitive relation that has worked for business and trade (Dewey 69)

Germany’s cultural base has been mounted on language, literature and architecture alongside other heritage artifacts that have solidified the publics’ loyalty to tradition and way of life. It is rich with the most ancient of traditions and remains an icon in history that drew from an established legacy in poetry and thinking. The best of philosophers hail from Germany along with the most impressive of inventions. The German people are a thinking nation alias the das Land der Dichter und Denker (the land of poets and thinkers)

German cuisine is majorly influenced by religion but really not much to tell. The affiliation to religion has limited the creativity to the affiliation of the individuals. This therefore makes market penetration for any industry much easier since there is not much choice in as far as cultural and traditional dishes are concerned. The public has therefore embraced external eating habits and cuisines, which has diversified the food industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In as far as, customs go the German public is formal and firmly casual. Customs emphasize a strict since of punctuality deduction and principle. They are a time conscious people straight from work to table manners to social relations. For instance, it is wrong to arrive early to a dinner invitation or to arrive more than 15 minutes late with no justifiable cause. The society is much more conservative than meets the eye a fact that is well expressed by their appetite for dressing (Farquharson, 218)

The early divisions of the society into classes of the lower middle and upper classes have been faced out by modern ways. A society such as that of Germany attracts great interest in as far as family relations are concerned. It is rather disappointing that official statistics point toward a single-minded nuclear families with variations such as those of single parents unmarried and married that overlook relations with their grand parents senior siblings nieces and nephews alongside other consanguine relations.

These have become a center of interest for kinship ties in Germany in the onset of the 21st century as is evident in holidays an essential part of the individuals lifecycle.

Workforce factors

Germany’s security statistics have invoked a lot of investor confidence over the years. The German security system has received a lot of credit over the years for the regulated and specific attention to crime. They have had their pitfalls such as these of drug trafficking but this will be of little effect to the American immigrants.

The plant will also be located in an area that is close to the factors of production such as labor and raw materials. The infrastructure is satisfactory so it should not be hard create a convenience point. Housing should be well taken care of by the friendly government housing policies that have aggressively provided places to live for the population. The education system is integrative and open ended.

The Americans will therefore find it easy to blend into the German system since it provided for a receptive programmed that allows the students to learn German to allow them blend into society better. Government policy concerning health and pay is clear and provides for the statutory minimums that every employer is obligated to provide (Santayana 21.)

Government factors

The government has adjusted the taxation systems to accommodate the normal trading activities with the corporate tax being just below 30%. This remains the same across the board to facilitate the corporate sectors competition. Like any other country Germany motivates local companies, more than external companies but still maintain a viable margin for foreign companies.

We will write a custom Report on Producing cotton products in Germany specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More By 1913 Germany bore a legacy of being the second largest exporter of cotton this has changed due to changing economic times. The culture of cotton production still remains and therefore will not be a problem. Other raw materials are readily available for exploitation.

Recommendation The costs of operation and production in Germany are much more cost effective and present a viable window for investment. The market for cotton products is high especially during cold seasons of the year. The public have a general tendency to trust local products therefore this sets the pace for the marketing strategies to be adopted. The level of unemployment also suggests a high availability of labor during all seasons with a constant market during high and low seasons

Works Cited Dewey, John. German Philosophy and Politics Freeport. N.Y: Books for Libraries Press. (1942), p 69

Farquharson, Alexander. The German Mind and Outlook, ed. G.P. Gooch et al. London: Chapman

[supanova_question]

Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts Research Paper a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Sociopolitical Impacts of Globalization

Economic Impacts of Globalization

Debates on Globalization

Conclusion

References

Introduction William Shakespeare, the famous writer and poet referred to the world as a stage with all of us are merely players (Dimitrova, 2002). These words seemed to be sophisticated because of the difficulty in understanding what he really meant.

However, as time has passed by, the words have become clearer to us. The world has become very informed. There is a smooth flow of information from one corner of the world to the other. At the same time, the boundaries which separated nations are now permeable. People travel easily from country to country.

At the same time, the production of goods and services has also expanded. The world has a variety of goods and services from which a consumer can choose from to ensure that he/she can get maximum satisfaction. Lastly, the economy of the world has grown and expanded beyond the physical borders. Countries from far and wide can now trade with one another at ease. With the advancements in technology, a person in South America can strike a deal with another one in Russia without the two of them coming into physical contact.

The question that comes into mind is what makes all these possible. What makes the world to operate at a global scale? Who controls it? Who sets the rules that governs it? Many people have been asking themselves these questions so that they can understand how the world operates. These factors are effective at all the corners of the world; affecting every aspect of our lives.

A simple word has been used to describe all this; Globalization. It is due to the effect of globalization that the world is operating at a global scale. It brings people together to work as a team in order to achieve certain goals and objectives and finally ensures that there is socioeconomic and political development in all states of the world.

Globalization has made the world to be uniform due to the synchronization of social, cultural, technological and commercial aspects of life which originate mainly from western countries and spread to the rest of the world.

Like any other advancements, there are some people who support globalization and some who criticize it. This paper therefore critically analyzes globalization from the point of view of those who support it and those who are against it. It will look at the debates, controversies and areas of contention within the context of globalization. It will finally focus on the role played by technology in the development of globalization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Sociopolitical Impacts of Globalization Globalization can be traced back to the ancient civilization when the people of Mesopotamia started to practice irrigation along the banks of river Tigris and Euphrates (Swipnet, 2011). The technology was slowly adopted by many other communities in the world. With time the technology became much sophisticated to ensure that production meets the demand of the world. During the early civilization, people used to practice trade.

There were communities who were known to be long distance traders, travelling all around the world on merchant ships. In the course of their expeditions, they met and interacted many different cultures and communities. In the process, they exchanged ideas, cultures and beliefs.

Globalization begun as a small scale venture but ended up being a great advancement witnessed in the world. With time, globalization begun to have an effect on various aspects of life. It played a critical role in social, political and economical aspects of all the states in the world.

For those people who support globalization, they view it as a stepping stone that has brought many communities together. This process begun in the medieval times and is still in process up to the present times. A couple of centuries ago, there was no equity among all members of the state. There are those who had a higher status in the community than others. Status was determined by wealth, family background or sex (Jovanovic, 2011).

The rich and the elite had and people from the royal families had a higher status in the community everyone else in the society. They therefore enjoy certain privileges which made their lives to be more comfortable. The middle class and the lower class groups did not enjoy much of these rights. Most of them were either slaves or peasants. They had to work hard to earn a living.

Due to the oppression that they were facing, the individuals from the middle and lower classes started to fight for equality so that have the rights and freedoms that were destined to them. Locke and Voltaire are examples of people who initiated the fight for equality in their societies. It has been argued that if Locke is the idealist of the enlightenment, then Voltaire is the realist. This statement is totally true. Although the works of these two philosophers overlapped, they differed a lot in the ideology of some issues.

Both of these people were philosophers during the enlightenment era in Europe which occurred sometime during the eighteenth century. During this era there were movements which were lead by intellectuals who believed that scientific knowledge and information should be incorporated into the human beliefs as an aid of understanding the universe in a better way (Palmer, 1964).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to the philosophers, people should abandon traditional and religious beliefs and embrace this new idea. Locke was among the enlightenment philosophers in England and used this idea to fight for equal rights for all people in the society. He believed that every man was equal and that no one should be treated in the society. In his book Second Treatise of Government Locke talks about the various aspects of life and politics.

He states that for the proper understanding of the origin of political power, one must understand the origin of mankind in the state of nature (Locke, 1982). During this period no one had control over the other but each one of them was a judge of what the law required. In this state every individual is equal since they are all born indiscriminately with similar advantages and disadvantages.

Since each individual interpreted the law in his own way, there are instances where one might breach the ideals of another person and even if there was a universal judge his decisions may be biased. This is the point where the state of nature which seemed to be so ideal starts to fail (Locke, 1982).

Voltaire on the other hand was against the religious practices that were being practiced during the 19th and 19th century. During this time, it was impossible to differentiate religion from the state. Religious leaders were the ones who appointed the rulers of societies. Despite this, it was the same religious leaders who went astray according to what they were preaching (Voltaire, 1950).

As it is seen the works of Voltaire on were mainly against religion and the fact that religion gave the leaders (kings and emperors) the divine power to rule other people and in return the leaders would protect the church. Through his works people started to demand for democracy, equality and freedom from their leaders. According to people, these factors were necessary values for the development of the society since they will lead to better political systems based on democracy, economic development, capitalism, and religious tolerance.

The works of Voltaire and Locke led to global revolutions and rebellions. America for example discovered that their rights and freedoms were being violated by their colonizers. They fought and attained their independence which they finally got. The founding fathers of the nation developed a constitution which was based on equality among all men, an idea which had been brought up by Locke.

The French revolution on the other hand might have occurred as a result of the works of Voltaire and other French philosophers. It is through globalization and sharing of ideas that other communities realized about their rights and the need to fight for them.

At the present moment, people are still fighting for their rights and freedoms, but at a global scale. They have formed groups and organizations which are composed of individuals with the same ideologies, goals and objectives. There are many movements, groups and organizations that work to ensure that human rights are respected all over the world with each continent having a unique body that ensures this.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The human rights and freedoms which are being protected include the right to own property, the right to life, the right to liberty, the right to vote, freedom of speech and expression, freedom of movement and so on. At the moment there are new rights which have been introduced due to the dynamic nature of life.

They include the right to future generations which is concerned with the sustainable use of resources so that future generations can also enjoy them, the right to water to all individuals and lastly the gay, lesbian and transsexual rights which relates to the sexuality status of an individual.

Economic Impacts of Globalization The level of trade has grown remarkably over the last few decades as a result of the advancements that are being experienced in the field of information, communications and technology (ICT) (Jovanovic, 2011). These advancements have also increased the number of tradable services in the field of IT and ICT which have made the offshoring and outsourcing of services to be much easier.

The ease in the tradability of these services coupled with the increased independence of the location has contributed to the offshoring of services by many companies in the west (Kapila, 2009). Companies are now outsourcing services such as support, customer care, research and consultancy. The main reason behind this is that outsourcing for services is much cheaper and the end result is desirable. The development in IT and ICT has led to the globalization of services all around the world.

With the revolution in IT and ICT, the location of companies is not of a high concern as it used to be. The advancement in technology has made the transmission of inputs and outputs to be much easier. These processes can now be conducted digitally and transmitted via electronic means.

Companies have therefore offshored much of their services especially white collar jobs to improve their sustainability and efficiency. The customer care for the giant computer manufacturer Dell, for example is located in India (Kurtz, 2010). When local residents call the customer care, they are being served with an operative who is located in India. Many employers have embraced this move and replaced much of their staff in the US and UK to reduce their operating expenses.

Globalization has also influenced the manner in which companies market their products and interact with their customers. They have embraced the use of technology in order to survive the stiff competition in the market. Some of them, for example, have incorporated the use of social networks and brand communities as a communication strategy of reaching and engaging customers.

This because social networks and brand communities are the easiest and most efficient ways through which consumers can be reached as a result of technological changes that the world is currently facing. Most organizations and business companies therefore have stopped stop using outdated methods of reaching out to consumers. Some have incorporated the old methods with the latest ones.

Debates on Globalization During the early days, globalization used to be celebrated as a new freedom. This is due to the fact that it leads to the emergence of connections and that opened up the world to everyone. It also led to the emergence of new innovations and improvements which led to the emergence of new products and ideas. As a result, individuals, institutions, societies and states have been brought t together by this phenomenon.

Despite all these achievements, there are some people who are skeptical about globalization. According to them, if globalization is not checked, the identities of sovereign states all around the world will disappear with time. The agglutination of states will erode the distinct features and uniqueness of states.

This will make it difficult to distinguish one state from another. Consequently, the stability and viability of many states will be at stake due to the different interests that are posed by the various parties in the associations. As a result, it will be difficult to meet the demands of various nations hence the sustainability of the state and the association in general will be at stake.

Another criticism of globalization comes from environmentalists and environmental activists. They view globalization as a major threat to the environment. This is due to the innovations in technology which have altered the original state of the environment.

Industrialization for example has brought about a lot of damages to the environment due to pollution. They have contributed to air, water and land pollution. This has brought about adverse effects to the climate. At the present moment, we are experiencing climate change and global warming (Moore, 1998).

These are some of the repercussions which these activists are talking about. Furthermore, humans have become more vulnerable to the effects that have been coupled by globalization. The radiations and emissions that are released into the atmosphere may lead to the development of diseases which may critically affect the health of people.

Finally, globalization has brought about a lot of social instability in terms of culture and beliefs. When people interact, they tend to share some aspects of their lives. In the process, people from different cultures and backgrounds may share and adopted cultures from different communities.

Some of these new cultural traits may not be moral to a given community. This brings about a lot of disrespect and arguments between the members of the same culture. At the same time, individuals of different cultures may also disagree with one another and arguments may come about as a result. This is what has contributed to the war between Israel and Palestine that has been going on for years now.

Conclusion From the discussions, it is evident that globalization has brought about a lot of developments in the world. It has improved the social, political and economical aspects of our lives. This has been achieved through the ease of production, transport, communication and other factors of the economy.

This has made it easier for individuals to cross the national borders and interact with anyone all around the world. However, globalization could not have enjoyed this success if it was not for the rapid advancement that is being experienced in technology. These advancements have facilitated many aspects of life by making them to be much easier and convenient; unlike previous times.

As a sociologist, it will be critical for me to embrace the role played by globalization in ensuring that the life we live in at the present moment is better and convenient. To ensure that globalization is sustainable in future, it will be necessary to ensure that the there is an agreement between those people who are for globalization and those who are against it so that we can work together and ensure that the world is a better place.

References Dimitrova, A. (2002). Challenging Globalization: The Contemporary Sociological Debate About Globalization. Web.

Jovanovic, M. (2011). International Handbook on the Economics of Integration: Competition, Spatial Location of Economic Activity and Financial Issues. Sacramento: Edward Elgar Publishing.

Kapila, U. (2009). Indian Economy Since Independence. New Delhi: Academic Foundation.

Kurtz, D.L. (2010). Contemporary Marketing 2011. New York: 2011.

Locke, J. (1982). Second Treatise of Government. Ed. Richard Cox. Maryland: Davidson.

Moore, T.G. (1998). Climate of Fear: Why We Shouldn`t Worry about Global warming.

Massachusetts: Cato Institute, Palmer, R. (1964). The Age of the Democratic Revolution. Surrey, England: Ashgate.

Swipnet. (2011). The History of Mesopotamia. Swipnet. Web.

Voltaire, F. (1950). Candide; or the Optimism. Ed. John Butt. Riverside: Penguin Books.

[supanova_question]

Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Sociopolitical Impacts of Globalization

Economic Impacts of Globalization

Debates on Globalization

Conclusion

References

Introduction William Shakespeare, the famous writer and poet referred to the world as a stage with all of us are merely players (Dimitrova, 2002). These words seemed to be sophisticated because of the difficulty in understanding what he really meant.

However, as time has passed by, the words have become clearer to us. The world has become very informed. There is a smooth flow of information from one corner of the world to the other. At the same time, the boundaries which separated nations are now permeable. People travel easily from country to country.

At the same time, the production of goods and services has also expanded. The world has a variety of goods and services from which a consumer can choose from to ensure that he/she can get maximum satisfaction. Lastly, the economy of the world has grown and expanded beyond the physical borders. Countries from far and wide can now trade with one another at ease. With the advancements in technology, a person in South America can strike a deal with another one in Russia without the two of them coming into physical contact.

The question that comes into mind is what makes all these possible. What makes the world to operate at a global scale? Who controls it? Who sets the rules that governs it? Many people have been asking themselves these questions so that they can understand how the world operates. These factors are effective at all the corners of the world; affecting every aspect of our lives.

A simple word has been used to describe all this; Globalization. It is due to the effect of globalization that the world is operating at a global scale. It brings people together to work as a team in order to achieve certain goals and objectives and finally ensures that there is socioeconomic and political development in all states of the world.

Globalization has made the world to be uniform due to the synchronization of social, cultural, technological and commercial aspects of life which originate mainly from western countries and spread to the rest of the world.

Like any other advancements, there are some people who support globalization and some who criticize it. This paper therefore critically analyzes globalization from the point of view of those who support it and those who are against it. It will look at the debates, controversies and areas of contention within the context of globalization. It will finally focus on the role played by technology in the development of globalization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Sociopolitical Impacts of Globalization Globalization can be traced back to the ancient civilization when the people of Mesopotamia started to practice irrigation along the banks of river Tigris and Euphrates (Swipnet, 2011). The technology was slowly adopted by many other communities in the world. With time the technology became much sophisticated to ensure that production meets the demand of the world. During the early civilization, people used to practice trade.

There were communities who were known to be long distance traders, travelling all around the world on merchant ships. In the course of their expeditions, they met and interacted many different cultures and communities. In the process, they exchanged ideas, cultures and beliefs.

Globalization begun as a small scale venture but ended up being a great advancement witnessed in the world. With time, globalization begun to have an effect on various aspects of life. It played a critical role in social, political and economical aspects of all the states in the world.

For those people who support globalization, they view it as a stepping stone that has brought many communities together. This process begun in the medieval times and is still in process up to the present times. A couple of centuries ago, there was no equity among all members of the state. There are those who had a higher status in the community than others. Status was determined by wealth, family background or sex (Jovanovic, 2011).

The rich and the elite had and people from the royal families had a higher status in the community everyone else in the society. They therefore enjoy certain privileges which made their lives to be more comfortable. The middle class and the lower class groups did not enjoy much of these rights. Most of them were either slaves or peasants. They had to work hard to earn a living.

Due to the oppression that they were facing, the individuals from the middle and lower classes started to fight for equality so that have the rights and freedoms that were destined to them. Locke and Voltaire are examples of people who initiated the fight for equality in their societies. It has been argued that if Locke is the idealist of the enlightenment, then Voltaire is the realist. This statement is totally true. Although the works of these two philosophers overlapped, they differed a lot in the ideology of some issues.

Both of these people were philosophers during the enlightenment era in Europe which occurred sometime during the eighteenth century. During this era there were movements which were lead by intellectuals who believed that scientific knowledge and information should be incorporated into the human beliefs as an aid of understanding the universe in a better way (Palmer, 1964).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to the philosophers, people should abandon traditional and religious beliefs and embrace this new idea. Locke was among the enlightenment philosophers in England and used this idea to fight for equal rights for all people in the society. He believed that every man was equal and that no one should be treated in the society. In his book Second Treatise of Government Locke talks about the various aspects of life and politics.

He states that for the proper understanding of the origin of political power, one must understand the origin of mankind in the state of nature (Locke, 1982). During this period no one had control over the other but each one of them was a judge of what the law required. In this state every individual is equal since they are all born indiscriminately with similar advantages and disadvantages.

Since each individual interpreted the law in his own way, there are instances where one might breach the ideals of another person and even if there was a universal judge his decisions may be biased. This is the point where the state of nature which seemed to be so ideal starts to fail (Locke, 1982).

Voltaire on the other hand was against the religious practices that were being practiced during the 19th and 19th century. During this time, it was impossible to differentiate religion from the state. Religious leaders were the ones who appointed the rulers of societies. Despite this, it was the same religious leaders who went astray according to what they were preaching (Voltaire, 1950).

As it is seen the works of Voltaire on were mainly against religion and the fact that religion gave the leaders (kings and emperors) the divine power to rule other people and in return the leaders would protect the church. Through his works people started to demand for democracy, equality and freedom from their leaders. According to people, these factors were necessary values for the development of the society since they will lead to better political systems based on democracy, economic development, capitalism, and religious tolerance.

The works of Voltaire and Locke led to global revolutions and rebellions. America for example discovered that their rights and freedoms were being violated by their colonizers. They fought and attained their independence which they finally got. The founding fathers of the nation developed a constitution which was based on equality among all men, an idea which had been brought up by Locke.

The French revolution on the other hand might have occurred as a result of the works of Voltaire and other French philosophers. It is through globalization and sharing of ideas that other communities realized about their rights and the need to fight for them.

At the present moment, people are still fighting for their rights and freedoms, but at a global scale. They have formed groups and organizations which are composed of individuals with the same ideologies, goals and objectives. There are many movements, groups and organizations that work to ensure that human rights are respected all over the world with each continent having a unique body that ensures this.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Globalization Sociopolitial and Economic Impacts by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The human rights and freedoms which are being protected include the right to own property, the right to life, the right to liberty, the right to vote, freedom of speech and expression, freedom of movement and so on. At the moment there are new rights which have been introduced due to the dynamic nature of life.

They include the right to future generations which is concerned with the sustainable use of resources so that future generations can also enjoy them, the right to water to all individuals and lastly the gay, lesbian and transsexual rights which relates to the sexuality status of an individual.

Economic Impacts of Globalization The level of trade has grown remarkably over the last few decades as a result of the advancements that are being experienced in the field of information, communications and technology (ICT) (Jovanovic, 2011). These advancements have also increased the number of tradable services in the field of IT and ICT which have made the offshoring and outsourcing of services to be much easier.

The ease in the tradability of these services coupled with the increased independence of the location has contributed to the offshoring of services by many companies in the west (Kapila, 2009). Companies are now outsourcing services such as support, customer care, research and consultancy. The main reason behind this is that outsourcing for services is much cheaper and the end result is desirable. The development in IT and ICT has led to the globalization of services all around the world.

With the revolution in IT and ICT, the location of companies is not of a high concern as it used to be. The advancement in technology has made the transmission of inputs and outputs to be much easier. These processes can now be conducted digitally and transmitted via electronic means.

Companies have therefore offshored much of their services especially white collar jobs to improve their sustainability and efficiency. The customer care for the giant computer manufacturer Dell, for example is located in India (Kurtz, 2010). When local residents call the customer care, they are being served with an operative who is located in India. Many employers have embraced this move and replaced much of their staff in the US and UK to reduce their operating expenses.

Globalization has also influenced the manner in which companies market their products and interact with their customers. They have embraced the use of technology in order to survive the stiff competition in the market. Some of them, for example, have incorporated the use of social networks and brand communities as a communication strategy of reaching and engaging customers.

This because social networks and brand communities are the easiest and most efficient ways through which consumers can be reached as a result of technological changes that the world is currently facing. Most organizations and business companies therefore have stopped stop using outdated methods of reaching out to consumers. Some have incorporated the old methods with the latest ones.

Debates on Globalization During the early days, globalization used to be celebrated as a new freedom. This is due to the fact that it leads to the emergence of connections and that opened up the world to everyone. It also led to the emergence of new innovations and improvements which led to the emergence of new products and ideas. As a result, individuals, institutions, societies and states have been brought t together by this phenomenon.

Despite all these achievements, there are some people who are skeptical about globalization. According to them, if globalization is not checked, the identities of sovereign states all around the world will disappear with time. The agglutination of states will erode the distinct features and uniqueness of states.

This will make it difficult to distinguish one state from another. Consequently, the stability and viability of many states will be at stake due to the different interests that are posed by the various parties in the associations. As a result, it will be difficult to meet the demands of various nations hence the sustainability of the state and the association in general will be at stake.

Another criticism of globalization comes from environmentalists and environmental activists. They view globalization as a major threat to the environment. This is due to the innovations in technology which have altered the original state of the environment.

Industrialization for example has brought about a lot of damages to the environment due to pollution. They have contributed to air, water and land pollution. This has brought about adverse effects to the climate. At the present moment, we are experiencing climate change and global warming (Moore, 1998).

These are some of the repercussions which these activists are talking about. Furthermore, humans have become more vulnerable to the effects that have been coupled by globalization. The radiations and emissions that are released into the atmosphere may lead to the development of diseases which may critically affect the health of people.

Finally, globalization has brought about a lot of social instability in terms of culture and beliefs. When people interact, they tend to share some aspects of their lives. In the process, people from different cultures and backgrounds may share and adopted cultures from different communities.

Some of these new cultural traits may not be moral to a given community. This brings about a lot of disrespect and arguments between the members of the same culture. At the same time, individuals of different cultures may also disagree with one another and arguments may come about as a result. This is what has contributed to the war between Israel and Palestine that has been going on for years now.

Conclusion From the discussions, it is evident that globalization has brought about a lot of developments in the world. It has improved the social, political and economical aspects of our lives. This has been achieved through the ease of production, transport, communication and other factors of the economy.

This has made it easier for individuals to cross the national borders and interact with anyone all around the world. However, globalization could not have enjoyed this success if it was not for the rapid advancement that is being experienced in technology. These advancements have facilitated many aspects of life by making them to be much easier and convenient; unlike previous times.

As a sociologist, it will be critical for me to embrace the role played by globalization in ensuring that the life we live in at the present moment is better and convenient. To ensure that globalization is sustainable in future, it will be necessary to ensure that the there is an agreement between those people who are for globalization and those who are against it so that we can work together and ensure that the world is a better place.

References Dimitrova, A. (2002). Challenging Globalization: The Contemporary Sociological Debate About Globalization. Web.

Jovanovic, M. (2011). International Handbook on the Economics of Integration: Competition, Spatial Location of Economic Activity and Financial Issues. Sacramento: Edward Elgar Publishing.

Kapila, U. (2009). Indian Economy Since Independence. New Delhi: Academic Foundation.

Kurtz, D.L. (2010). Contemporary Marketing 2011. New York: 2011.

Locke, J. (1982). Second Treatise of Government. Ed. Richard Cox. Maryland: Davidson.

Moore, T.G. (1998). Climate of Fear: Why We Shouldn`t Worry about Global warming.

Massachusetts: Cato Institute, Palmer, R. (1964). The Age of the Democratic Revolution. Surrey, England: Ashgate.

Swipnet. (2011). The History of Mesopotamia. Swipnet. Web.

Voltaire, F. (1950). Candide; or the Optimism. Ed. John Butt. Riverside: Penguin Books.

[supanova_question]

Argument for Measures to Control Illegal Immigration Argumentative Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Arguments for Control of Illegal Immigration

Arguments for immigration

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Immigration is the movement by people from one country to another with the motive of permanent settlement in another country. Across boarder movements are majorly facilitated by unfavorable conditions in some countries as compared to others. This paper seeks to carry out an argument that strict measures should be adopted in order to counter illegal immigration. The paper will look into the negative impacts that are suffered by the host countries in order to form the ground on which illegal immigration must be stopped.

Arguments for Control of Illegal Immigration Immigration has been a global factor on a variety of bases that range from family based immigration in which individuals move to join their relatives in other countries to humanitarian grounds which include cases of refugees. Most of the reported illegal immigration has majorly been based on social security which sums up to economic factors in different countries. This leads to higher flow of populations from developing countries to developed countries whose economies are perceived to be better.

This direction of flow is associated with the hardships in countries of origin which drives the immigrants into seeking better lifestyles in economies that are recognized to offer better opportunities. One of the impacts of such immigration is the financial burden that is laid on the government in terms of making provisions for the immigrants.

The basic responsibility of government to provide to its citizenry will be extended to the immigrants, which implies increased government spending. The economic strain is worsened if the immigrants are not productive to the economy. The United States of America has, for example, realized a large number of immigrants that calls for more than ten billion dollars in government expenditure with respect to social security on the immigrants.

Though the immigrants at times contribute to the economy through their paid taxes, their contribution has not been sufficient to cover for their needs. The taxes that immigrants in the United States of America pay are for example reported to be way below their needs in the health care alone. An independent consideration of budget with respect to immigrants thus has a deficit that is then transmitted to the federal’s annual budget.

The strain is further realized with respect to the emergency services that the immigrants are entitled to under government funding. This strain on the government resources that puts native citizens at risks of not getting such services due to scarcity thus calls for adequate measures to ensure that the number of immigrants is reduced (Meissner, Meyers, Papademetriou, Demetrios and Fix 1).

The economic impacts as realized from immigration are similarly felt by individual legal citizens in a number of ways. The fact that the immigrants are mostly driven by economic factors is a disadvantage to the natives in terms of job competition. Their level of desperation together with remuneration rates in their native countries that enable the immigrants, especially on their arrival, to accept relatively lower wage rates creates unfair competition to the natives in the job market.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This follows the fact that employers will seek a relatively cheaper labor with the aim of reducing operational costs. There is therefore a potential risk of job losses by legal citizens to the cheaply available labor provided by the illegal immigrants. Though the immigrants are normally characterized with lower pays upon their arrival, this change with time and they get equal treatment as the other citizens.

The impacts that are felt due to the incorporation of the immigrants are particularly serious due to the fact that cases of unemployment are also significant even in the developed countries. A considerable assimilation of immigrants into the labor market thus has the direct impact of increasing the unemployment crisis that the governments have not been able to handle. A considerable approach to at least maintain the unemployment rates would be an effective control of the infiltration of the job markets with immigrants.

This can be achieved by discouraging any further influx of immigrants. This can either be achieved by taking more strict measures to ensure that immigrants to not cross boarders into the host countries. Actions against existing illegal immigrants can also be employed to act as an example for discouraging other people from illegal immigration (Sari and Kerr 18).

Legislative provisions in some countries have also been identified to promote illegal immigration. A consideration of laws that have been enacted in the past by congress in the United States of America can for example give hopes of legalization of immigrants. The provisions have been realized to have a lot of leniency that immigrants seemingly take advantage of.

Past legislations that offered amnesty to illegal immigrants in the year 1994 and further extension of such amnesty can for example be interpreted to send a wrong message that illegal immigrants in the United States of America can be protected rather that be prosecuted for getting into the country illegally.

There have also been provisions that selectively allow individuals, bases on specified factors such as geographical and humanitarian, to freely move into the United States and be accorded permanent residence. This has also offered a loop hole into immigration as the provisions can be used by any individual to gain entry into the United States.

The fact that the American constitution has been interpreted by the supreme court for the government’s responsibility to protect and be responsible for any individual who is within the nation’s boarders thus adds to the need that an avenue needs to instituted to ensure that the level of immigration is curtailed. This provision is for instance realized in the fact that once immigrants are in the United States of America, they are subject to government services that include federal funding at higher education levels.

We will write a custom Essay on Argument for Measures to Control Illegal Immigration specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Services that are provided in academic institutions have also been greatly liberalized in many states to allow for equal treatment for both legal citizens and illegal immigrants. The economic attachment that are again realized with respect to these provisions thus forces the need to stop the immigration before the immigrants gain access into the nation.

According to Nilsson, immigration is characterized by a wide variety of setbacks that calls for its regulation. Immigration is characterized by population increase in the regions in which the immigrants settle. This has the direct impact of straining resources that are in most cases scarce. Natural factors such as land and other economic resources that can not be reproduced are thus subjected to faster depletion due to increased population.

Increased demand for commodities which leads to scarcity also forces prices up thus contributing to higher costs of living. Increased population which leads to increased utilization of land for housing also restrains other economic activities for which the land could have been used. Agricultural activities as well as industrial investments may thus be compromised in order to offer land for accommodation.

Another impact of immigration especially in cases where governments are charged with the responsibility over the immigrants is the inefficiency in service provisions due to scarcity of resources relative to demand. High population can significantly overstretch provisions such as transportation, education, health care and other essentials such as water and power. This leads to poor standards of living that can be transmitted to legal citizens who are living in the same region.

Allowing illegal immigrants to settle in a country to the disadvantage of the country’s citizen thus strains the relationship between governments and their citizens over the responsibilities of the governments to safeguard the well being of its citizens. Scarcity of resources that has been evidenced by unemployment rates and budget deficits thus leaves governments with the only option controlling immigration (Nilsson 1).

Arguments for immigration There are however some arguments that have associated immigration with economic success in nations such as the United States of America. It is also claimed that immigration can be a key to achieving key interests in America in the twenty first century. Such opinions suggest that immigration helps host countries in coping with economic challenges as well as enriching the host countries in terms of diversity (Meissner, Meyers, Papademetriou and Fix 13).

Conclusion Immigration is characterized with a number of impacts on the citizens and even governments of host counties. Impacts such as increased unemployment rates, reduced wages and strained social facilities that are reflected in the countries’ economies outweighs the claimed benefits of immigration especially due to the current global economic crisis. Strict measures should thus be taken to control illegal immigration.

Works Cited Meissner, Doris., Meyers, Deborah., Papademetriou, Demetrios and Fix, Michael. Immigration and America’s future. Migration Policy Institute, 2006. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Argument for Measures to Control Illegal Immigration by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nilsson, Tomas. Negative economic impacts of immigration and population growth. Tasmanian Branch of Sustainable Population Australia, 2005. Web.

Sari, Kerr and Kerr, William. Economic Impacts of Immigration: A Survey. Harvard Business School, 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Does social class make a difference? Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Social class is an integral parameter especially in regard to access to important resources as well as various opportunities in life. People who are presumably from high social class seem to control most resources in our society today. Hence, they determine what people from lower social classes should get. I strongly believe that those who belong in higher social class control myriad means of both basic and secondary production which is heavily relied upon by those in lower social class.

In most cases, individuals of high social class tend to have no barrier in social mobility in comparison to their counterparts in lower social ladder. Therefore, it is pertinent to note that social mobility of an individual is highly likely to be influenced by social status in society. For instance, it takes spans of generations for one to change his or her social class particularly with people of disadvantaged background, wealthy parents tend to have wealthy children’s as poor parent continues to have poor children.

This trend continues for indefinitely long period of time. Social class will also affect the way individuals perceive things within their environment. Different social classes affect people’s perception. For instance, people from high social class will probably perceive those who are suffering as poor people since they feel poverty is connected with suffering.

A person from low social class may perceive suffering to be caused by emotional and physical problems which are not connected with poverty. Hence, different perceptions arise depending on individual’s social class owing to the fact that different problems are experienced by people from different social classes which later influences their attitude and perception towards life.

Social class diversity also creates differences on people relate with each other. Different component of social class determines relationship of individuals from different social classes. For instance, I am of the view that class diversity at workplace has always influenced the way promotions and demotions are determined in organizations.

Different diversions of social classes determines the way top management relates to individuals who are at the lower social ladder and it is what determines placement in organizations. When there is absence of management strategies to evaluate and monitor performances of different social classes, majority of the low class will be perceived different in organizations. Your assigned social class determines your role and position in society which on the overall makes a difference in your achievement.

I am of the opinion that social class affects an individual’s work and determines his role in the religion. Most individuals choose religions and work depending on their social status, certain works are meant for people of certain social class. In our everyday life, jobs like cleaning and gardening may be meant for people of low social class as some executive jobs like management positions are meant for people of high social class.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This has been enhanced by several factors such as discrimination and perception that people have on different types of jobs. The association of different social classes to certain types of employment depending on technical knowledge has enhanced the application of social class in determining the nature of work place.

It is only religion which tends to unite both social classes irrespective of one’s county of origin. Individuals from both classes share religion with different denominations regardless of one’s social class.

[supanova_question]

Verbal learning Essay essay help online: essay help online

Research in the relationship of verbal learning and memory involves the understanding of how people retain and use information concerning symbolically representable objects and events, and the information about their interconnection.

Tulving and Madigan described the concept of verbal learning in 1970 and according to the authors, symbolically representable items and events include letters, letters grouping, sentences, words, numbers, digits, and so forth; verbal items (p.438). The perceived connections are spatial-temporal, that is, an event (a verbal item for recall), which is followed or proceeded by, or appears next to, or occurs simultaneously with certain discretely specifiable perspective of the perceived environment.

Verbal learning students speak the stimulus-response language. With respect to this target group, verbal learning involves acquisition and withholding of verbal responses pertaining to stimuli. Acquisition often relates to “attachment of response to stimuli…forgetting denotes the loss of response availability” (Tulving

[supanova_question]

Psychology of Personality Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Individuals convey different psychological lives depending on their environment, social status, among other factors. Nonetheless, just a few psychological behaviors are noticed easily. These include personality, among others. Personality defines the whole mental organization of humans at every stage of their development.

In this regard, various theorists, psychologists and psycho-socialists, as well as psychoanalysts have proposed several theories that they feel describe human behavior and personality. These theorists include Freud, Fromm, Erickson, Bandura, Skinner, Allport, and Rogers, among others. The theories they postulated include psychosexual theory, which was done by Freud and psychosocial theory, which was proposed by Erickson.

Others include behavioral analysis, by Skinner, Bandura’s social cognitive analysis, Allport’s ideas of the psychologically healthy personality, Adler’s Individual Psychology, Rogers’ “person of tomorrow” and Fromm’s Humanistic Psychoanalysis. Some of these theories are complex to understand as they sometimes vary in results depending on the individual. This paper will explore the similarities and differences of pairs of these theories as well as my views on them (Feist

[supanova_question]

Concept of Storyboard Report custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Welcome Page

Introduction Page

Menu Page

Enabling Objectives

Instructional Unit

References

Welcome Page There are set processes in which storyboards are created for instance for films and animations either for study or for educational purposes. Being skeletons that give a step-by-step view of what is expected for any given procedure; storyboards become centrally important tools that assist the understanding of complex procedures that would otherwise be reserved for professionals and academicians alone.

For this assignment, the concept of storyboards is used as a lesson for how to take blood pressure and in doing so, the paper will discuss details of the importance of consistent taking of readings of one’s blood pressure as well as discussing some of the equipment that are used in the process of taking and checking blood pressure. This means that this storyboard will be a lesson dubbed: Taking Blood Pressure.

Introduction Page Before delving into the processes that were arrived at in the making of the storyboard fort taking blood pressure, it is appropriate first of all to briefly describe what exactly is meant by storyboarding process. The creation of this storyboard is created in a number of steps so as to come up with a creative and useful thing.

The history of storyboards has been that they can be created either by hand or other designers have used digitized computer programs to draw and design them (Struijk, Mathews

[supanova_question]

Culture Jamming Essay best essay help

Introduction Culture jamming is one of the marketing tactics that has been used for many years among anti-consumerist groups as one of the most successful tactics in the sphere of marketing. In this respect, Carducci defines culture jamming as an organized effort by social movements to counteract messages portrayed in advertisements (161). These social movements disrupt corporate advertising using myriad of tactics such as exposing political utterances on commercial culture.

In addition, culture jammers may also change the original configuration of a fashion statement, logo or product images of an advertisement made by a given company in order to challenge what is written in relation to freedom of consumption. It is imperative to note that the main rationale behind this form of culture jamming is reshaping social conformity to certain types of advertisements (Lambert-Beatty 99).

This issue has been carefully examined in media that specifically focuses on the development and transformation of the counterculture which, in its turn, has provoked the expansion of capitalism, has introduced innovation to mainstream culture, and continues to influence the current mainstream culture.

Regarding the above, culture jamming can be recognized as one of the most progressive, though not rebellious movements, introduced by anti-consumerist marketing strategies because many corporations, marketers and advertisers have managed to employ the policy of subvertisement while branding their product.

Main discussion Development of Culture Jamming Movement: Use of Subvertisement and Its Relation to Capitalism

Culture jamming has been practiced for several decades and it is difficult to exactly pinpoint the actual time when it was incepted. The term dates back to 1984 despite the fact that corporate organizations, advertisers and marketers had been using the tactic for some time (Carducci 161).

Over the years culture jamming has been led by various groups from different quotas such as women movements, media theorists and art movements. Culture jammers advocate to be involved when decisions on creating adverts are made. For instance, feminist movements fight against the use of skinny female models and in general, using women in advertising.

According to these feminist groups, increased use of women in advertising makes them feel emotionally inadequate especially in sexist advertising. Hence, such groups are capable of airing their opinions against sexist advertising. Similarly, feminist groups have equally been able to raise against a number of magazines and publications that have portrayed sexist adverts in the pretext of attracting more male customers or those that are targeting women who strive to maintain a perfect body as shown in order to attract men.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other human rights groups have also used culture jamming to fight exploitation of workers in factories – sweatshops. To affirm this, it is vital to note that our corporate culture is mainly driven by profitability whereby workers are lowly paid and compelled to work extra hours without proper compensation.

Interestingly, culture jammers often argue that individuals should be given opportunity to choose the nature of advertisement they are likely to be exposed so that they can make prior choices. They should also be exposed to hundreds of advertisements each day from various companies without corporate advertisers considering their consent.

According to culture jammers, corporate advertisers ought to consider the view of the public before exposing them to adverts (“Pranking Rhetorics”16).They view marketing as socially unacceptable due to the fact that it interferes with public space without the consent of the very public. Jammers look for every opportunity to alter messages that are given in various types of adverts.

They have used black marker and computer programs to change the message given in various adverts. They then insert their message which more often than not, expose anti-consumer, anti-corporation, anti-materialism and in general anti-advertising. The main aim of these groups is to recreate and transform commercial culture (Sandlin

[supanova_question]

Should Politicians Resign Due to Sex Scandals? Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Nature of Sex Scandals

Reasons for Resignation

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The term scandal does not have a definite meaning or definition. It has been interpreted differently by different people depending on the issue at hand (Roskin 9). Despite the difference in definition, all scandals have one thing in common; they are all happenings which are against people expectations (Schlesinger 44).

The normally result to loss of reputation or damage of the public identity of the individual who committed the act. Therefore, scandals are normally followed by shame and recent as consequences of the actions which an individual committed.

There are various kinds of scandals that can be committed. Some of these scandals are illegal in nature since they were committed through breaching of the law that has been set by the state.

Examples of these scandals include corruption, fraud, smuggling of illegal goods into the country, organized crime, murder, rape and so on. These scandals are normally punished by law once an individual is found guilty of the allegations that are laid before him/her.

On the other hand, there are those scandals which are not illegal in nature but are against the culture and ethics of the society. These are the types of scandals which normally catch the public eye. In most instances, these scandals are committed by respected figures in the society such as religious leaders, politicians, academicians and clerics (Wright 122).

Sex scandals are among the most commonly committed offence by respected people in the society (Cantoni 14). These scandals can either be legal or illegal in nature depending on the details and extent to which the action was committed. Since time immemorial, politicians all around the world have fallen victims to this predicament which has affected their lives and careers.

As a result of their actions, most of them have become unpopular, lost public support, developed internal problems with their families and most of all; they have been forced either directly or indirectly to step down from the positions which they hold. This paper will therefore explore the extent of sex scandals and determine whether the politicians who fall victims to this predicament should resign from office or continue to hold on to their positions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Nature of Sex Scandals Sex scandals can be committed by individuals of either sex in the society. This is to say that both men and women stand an equal chance of being involved in a sex scandal. However, when politicians are involved, it is the men who stand a high chance of being victims of sex scandals as compared to females. This year alone, there have been several reported cases of sex scandals. Most of these involved men.

Sex scandals can take different forms. They may take the form of a secret love affair, promiscuous sexual encounters, rape, gay relationships or inappropriate conversations and postings on social networks.

However, the most common sex scandal which is committed by politicians all around the world involves a secret affair which a politician is having behind the back of his family and the public. Bill Clinton, Arnold Schwarzenegger and Chris Lee are just some of the people who have had secret love affairs behind the back of their families and the general public.

In all of these cases, the relationship had been going on for a considerable period of time and if the story would have leaked out to the public, there was a high chance that these individuals would have continued to be involved in the affairs. Other politicians have been involved in gay encounters, situations which were shocking not only to the public but their families since they were not aware of the fact that their fellow member was gay in the first place.

Regardless of all these, a sex scandal is a sex scandal and the nature or the extent to which it was committed does not really matter. This is because the consequences that would follow are relatively the same despite the nature of the act that was committed.

In most cases, resentment and unpopularity are normally the outcome which such individual face once the scandals which they were involved have been exposed. In most cases, they are caught pants down thus they do not have a way out other than to admit to their acts and suffer the consequences (Gwendolyn 57).

As it has been earlier stressed, a clear distinction between major and minor sex scandals is not present (Berkove 155). This is because the impacts that these scandals will have on the individual, his family and the entire community will be more or less the same. At the same time, it is the public who determine the extent to which the sex scandal will be taken serious.

We will write a custom Essay on Should Politicians Resign Due to Sex Scandals? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The media also plays a critical role in the publication of the story. This will depend upon the desire which they have on that particular frenzy. Due to the intense pressure which these politicians will be facing from the public criticism, it is always advisable for them to resign so that they can have a better chance of dealing with the issue and clear out their names.

Reasons for Resignation Many politicians have ruined their lives and careers due to inappropriate sexual encounters which they have been involved in. Politicians are the representatives of communities and states. As such, they are expected to be law abiding, professional, employ ethics, morals and embrace cultural values in their work, actions and most importantly, their behavior (Wilson 31).

This is because they are the leaders whom the rest of the community looks up to. They are the role models and examples of many people in the society especially the youths and young adults. It is therefore a requirement for them to set the right examples that other people should follow.

They are therefore expected to act better in tricky situations which might lead to allegations such as being involved in sex scandals. Politicians are thus expected to have two strong values that will prevent them from being involved in sex scandals. Having a strong value system should be the first thing that these politicians must have.

This will guide them during such times by giving them an obligation and duty of care to their wives, family, religion, community and the entire state. The second requirement is having self control. They should be able to control themselves and avoid situations which might lead to scandals like those which are being experienced all by many politicians worldwide.

Many politicians who are involved in sex scandals fail at this. They should have acted better and avoided the situations that might have lead them to be involved in sex scandals in the first place. Their involvement is such an offence is viewed as betrayal to their family, community and their country (Michael 4).

As a result of the humiliation that may follow, such individuals should step from office since they failed at exercising the desired qualities that are required to hold such positions in the society. They should step aside and give other individuals a chance to practice proper leadership.

Most politicians who are involved in sex scandals normally deny such charges once the story has leaked out to the public. Most of them make public statements denying these allegations. When Bill Clinton was suspected of being involved in a sex scandal, he made a speech on public T.V denying these facts (Bronfenbrenner 23). Others go as far as saying that the evidence that has been brought against them has been fabricated due to political and other reasons (Lash 44).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Should Politicians Resign Due to Sex Scandals? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More They start to play blame game by blaming their rivals, other politicians and the media while the truth of the matter is that they are guilty of the offence in question. In India for example, an 86 year old politician who was the governor of Andhra Pradesh was forced to resign on June 2011 after being involved in a sex scandal (Lash 46). The situation was so intense that pictures and videos were brought forward as evidence against him.

Despite all these, he denied the allegations and stated that the videos were fabricated to give him a bad image. However, he came to admit to the charges much later and resigned from office. Societies should not have leaders of this kind who lie publicly and expect to get mercy from the public.

When situations get out of hand, and they have nowhere to run or hide, politicians normally accept the allegations and make public statements of apology. This is what Bill Clinton did and so did Anthony Weiner and Mark Foley (Wilson 38). This is a desperate move which not only proves that they were involved in the scandal but shows that they lack the qualities of being competent leaders. The best thing for them will be to step out of office.

The impacts of sexual scandals which politicians are involved in go much further than affecting them personally. The people who are immediately affected by these scandals are their family members; the spouses and children in particular. The acts of these politicians amount to infidelity which is a social wrong. To react to this, most marriages are broken. This brings about mental and emotional unrest which severely affects the spouses and their children.

The community and the state also suffer a heavy blow from such incidences. Politicians are the representative of the community and the state at international levels. Therefore, all aspects of their lives are closely monitored and whatever is observed is generalized to the entire community and even the state. As a result, a nation may develop a bad reputation due to sex scandals which their politicians have committed (Wilson 50).

Conclusion Political sex scandals are serious offences both to the community and the state. These scandals have ruined the lives and careers of many politicians all around the world. It is therefore the duty of each and every politician to ensure that they are not victims of the predicament as it will give them, their families and societies a bad reputation. This can only be achieved by having a strong character and morals. Those who are found guilty of the act should resign from office as they are not competent enough to hold such positions.

Works Cited Berkove, Lawrence. Fatal Self-Assertion. American Literary Realism.2000, 32(2), 152-158.

Bronfenbrenner, Urie. The ecology of human development: Experiments by nature and design. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2009. Print.

Cantoni, Davide. Sex Scandals in the U.S. Web.

Gwendolyn, Díaz. Women and Power in Argentina: Stories, Interviews, and Critical Essays. Texas: University of Texas Press, 2007.

Lash, Chris. Anne Bradstreet: The Flesh and The Spirit. 2011. Web.

Michael, James. “Responsibilities of Governments.” 100Essays. 06 Sep. 2005. Web.

Roskin, Cord.Political Science. An Introduction (11th Ed.). New York. Longman, 2009.

Schlesinger, Allan. Liberalism in America: A Note for Europeans: The Politics of Hope. Boston: Riverside Press, 2006.

Wilson, Anthony .Governments as Partners: The Role of the Central Government in Developing New Social Partnerships. Copenhagen: The Copenhagen Centre, 2001.

Wright, William. Economic Impact of the Reformation. Age of Reformation, (2003): 1-9. Web.

[supanova_question]

The Effect of Using Facebook as Background Checks on Job Candidates Report essay help online free: essay help online free

Abstract Employers are increasingly using Facebook as a profiling tool to assist in the hiring process. This report analyzes the effects of using Facebook for background checks on job candidates. This paper establishes that there are dangers in Facebook profiling for both the employer and the potential hire.

These dangers include: inaccurate information, mistrust by employees, and the loss by the employer of individuals who have high potential. The use of Facebook to profile candidates should therefore be stopped and where it has to be used, great caution should be exhibited.

Introduction Social networking tools have become very popular attracting millions of users all over the world. Facebook is the most active and popular Social Networking Site (SNS) and its most frequent users are college students and recent graduates (Brandenburg 598). These frequent users also happen to be the people who are in the job market, seeking employment opportunities. The information that the users reveal on Facebook might have some implications on their employment chances.

A recent study by the Society for Industrial and Organizational Psychology indicates that over 12% of employers used social networking sites during the hiring process. Of this group, 63% made the hiring decisions based on findings from the social networking sites (Spon 1). The aim of this report will be to analyze the effects of using Facebook for background checks on job candidates.

The focus will be on the implications of using Facebook for background checks both for the candidate and the potential employer. This paper shall argue that while Facebook has some positive contributions to the hiring process, its negative impacts far outweigh the positive and as such, the use of Facebook as a profiling tool is mostly detrimental to both the potential hire and the employer.

Employers Use of Facebook to Run Background Checks There has been a notable increase in the use of Facebook by Employers to check the background of potential employees. This rise has been attributed to a number of reasons. The use of Facebook in the hiring process also contains some inherent dangers to the employer.

Why Employers use Facebook

There are a number of reasons why employers find it necessary to use facebook in their recruitment process. Some of the major reasons for using Facebook are as follows:

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The difficulty of the hiring process

There are an increasing number of applicants competing for similar jobs in all industries. This has made the task of hiring even more difficult than it was in the past since competition is fierce. When faced with applicants of equal qualifications, Facebook profiles can be a useful tool in the hiring process.

A recruiter can screen potential employees based on the information they reveal about themselves on their profiles. Hooker and Rathke state these an employer can single out candidates with desirable traits such as conscientiousness, agreeableness and emotional maturity from the person’s Facebook profile (2).

The cost of the hiring process

The cost incurred during the process of seeking out new employees is high and for this reason, it is in the company’s best interest to reduce turnover by selecting the most appropriate applicants. One of the means through which a company can lower the rate of turnover is by employing people who are dependable. Hooker and Rathke assert that while a resume and interview were sufficient in the past, this traditional means cannot help in the detection of employees who are reliable (2).

SNS profiles may assist in this since an employer can look at a potential hire’s profile and accurately determine their dependability based on what the user’s friends say about them. Facebook can therefore assist by providing information on this trait of dependability thus enabling the company to employ a dependable person who is least likely to leave the company on short notice.

Better information on character

Employers would be interested in finding out whether their potential employees have any questionable relations or interests. Facebook allows users to post anything they wish concerning their lives on their personal profiles. This is information that the potential employer may find useful as they decide on whether to hire the person or not. Brandenburg reveals that by simply clicking on group titles and following the link of Facebook, an employer can find potential employees who have questionable interests (599).

Employers can get useful information that a person may never willingly share in their resume through their Facebook page. Albrechtslund states that younger people are in particular are prone to sharing their uncensored thoughts. The employer is therefore in a better position to judge the real character of the individual from their social networking activities (1).

Public scrutiny

Some of the positions that employers seek to find candidates for are public. This means that the profile of the employee will be open to public scrutiny. For this employee who will be working in a public capacity, the information that they present on Facebook is of importance since it reflects directly on the company.

We will write a custom Report on The Effect of Using Facebook as Background Checks on Job Candidates specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lory declares that since such a person will be a representative of the organization, their background information as appearing on Facebook can be subject to scrutiny (40). By running a background check, the employer will avoid any embarrassing revelations about the user in future.

Dangers of Using Facebook

Even as Employers use Facebook in large numbers, there are dangers that are inherent in this screening method for the employer. These dangers are articulated below

Inaccurate information

A study by the National Association of College and Employers revealed that as of 2007, 12% of employers intended to use social networks to screen potential hires (Brandenburg 600). Most employers who use Facebook for vetting purposes view the information on the person’s profile as entirely accurate. They therefore tend to judge the character of a potential employee based on their character on Facebook. As the employers goes through the profile of an applicant, they are bound to find information that is meant to be a joke.

Taken out of context, this information may lead to the employer automatically rejecting the applicant. Engler and Tanoury assert that “Employers may be prematurely dismissing very qualified candidates due to inaccurate assumptions based on a few snippets of their life on Facebook” (9). Employers may therefore lose out on applicants who have huge potential based on conclusions reached on the information in a user’s profile.

Fosters mistrust

Employers carry out the Facebook profiling mostly without the consent or knowledge of the candidate. Facebook plays a huge role in the social and private lives of millions of people.

The use of this site as a background checking tool results is an invasion of user’s personal privacy. In the event where the candidate becomes aware of this unauthorized screening, they may develop a felling of distrust towards the employer (Engler and Tanoury, 11). While it is not wrong for employers to want to know more about their applicants, using Facebook is inappropriate.

Leads to polished profiles

There is a real danger of Facebook profiles being misused. Engler and Tanoury predict that as recruiters continue to use Facebook as a means of screening, Facebook users will polish their profiles to suit the eyes of the recruiter (10). As a matter of fact, students have become more reserved and hesitate to post personal information in their profiles since they fear how a prospective employer may view the same information.

A user will more likely remove all information that may be seen as “inappropriate” from their profile so as to entice recruiters. This will not mean that the user has changed their lifestyle. As such, an employer will not be able to get a glimpse into the character of the potential employee through their profile. Instead, the employer will be presented with an eloquent profile which was edited specifically to impress them.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Effect of Using Facebook as Background Checks on Job Candidates by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Impact of Facebook Profiling for Potential Hires There are various impacts that are associated with Facebook profiling for the potential Hire. These impacts may be positive or negative depending on the profile of the particular potential hire.

Positive Impacts

A potential candidate can use Facebook to improve their chances of landing a job. A user can create a Facebook profile that aids in their professional life. Hooker and Rathke discovered that the professionalism exhibited on the Facebook profile of an individual influenced the employer’s decision on whether to hire them for a professional role (6).

Research indicates that social profiles have an impact on an employer’s first impression of the potential hire. With this in mind, a person can create a favorable online presence that endears them to the potential employer. Lory states that college graduates can use Facebook to network and increase their likelihood of landing a job (40).

Negative impacts

Many people post information on their Facebook profiles that is meant to be seen by their friends only. With this notion, the users post items with their friends in mind and they do not anticipate that potential recruiters will be recipients of the information. This means that the information posted is casual in nature and is not necessarily an accurate representation of a person.

A recent study states that some Facebook users intentionally misrepresented themselves in an attempt at humor or so as to gain social approval (Peluchette and Karl, 96). Users therefore exaggerate their alcohol or drug use in Facebook posts and join groups that do not depict who they are. An employer going through the user’s profile will not know that the profile content is false and a person may therefore be judged wrongly from their profile.

While potential job candidates can exploit Facebook to increase their likelihood of being hired, most do not. The reason for this is because most candidates remain ignorant of the effect that their Facebook profile has on their employability. If properly used, Facebook can assist a person to advance their careers through the construction of professional relationships.

However, at present, many recent graduates’ Facebook profiles contain information that would damage their employment opportunities. Research by Peluchette and Karl indicate that students were somewhat naive about the potential negative consequence that the material they posted on Facebook could have on their employment prospects (96).

Discussion Facebook has been credited with enhancing the social lives of many people. This site has enabled people to both keep in touch and also meet and befriend new people, therefore widening their circle of friends. Even so, the site has many dire consequences when a person is seeking employment. While ideally, a person’s social life should be separate from their work lives, this is not the case. One’s personal life as articulated in social networking sites can have an implication on their professional life.

From the numerous uses highlighted for employers using Facebook to screen potential employees, it may be assumed that Facebook leads to employers hiring better employees. Engler and Tanoury argue that Facebook screening could actually have the opposite effect (10). Facebook user’s knowledge that prospective employers may look into their profile will result in false profiles. The user will actively try to come up with a “clean” profile which only lists what the user thinks the recruiter may approve of.

Engler and Tanoury point out that that if employers continue to rely on Facebook to vet candidates, Facebook as a social networking website stands the risk of being changed into a collection of impersonal resumes (11). Hooker and Rathke actually advise users to place information on their Facebook profiles with potential employers in mind (8). Such a trend will result in professionalization of profiles since such profiles are noted to positively influence the decision making process of recruiters.

Even so, Facebook will at least for the near future continue to be a favored recruiting tool by many employers. Lory asserts that more and more employers continue to use Facebook to assess candidates and there is nothing to prevent this behavior (28). Employers see Facebook profiles as a useful hiring tool and as such, it can be projected that they will keep using it. It is therefore up to the candidate to change their privacy settings and ensure that they only post appropriate information on their pages.

Conclusion This paper set out to argue that the use of Facebook for profiling potential hires has a negative impact both for the potential employee and the employer. Descriptions of the reasons why employers make use of Facebook for vetting purposes have been articulated. From the discussions presented, it is clear that many employers deem Facebook to be a valuable tool in the hiring process.

Even so, this tool has many inherent disadvantages which place both the employer and the potential employee at a loss. For the potential hire, the information that appears on their profile may be used to judge their character with negative results. The employer may also be misled about a candidate’s personality from their profile.

While Facebook has gained great relevance in contemporary society, this paper has demonstrated that there are risks that a user faces. A person seeking employment may suffer some loss as a result of the information that appears on their Facebook profile.

The employer on the other hand can make false judgments concerning the potential employer based on their Facebook profile. The use of Facebook to profile candidates should therefore be discouraged and in the instance that it is used, great care should be taken to avoid the pitfalls that this paper has highlighted.

[supanova_question]

Education Act (1944) Essay essay help

Table of Contents Conceptual Analysis

Sensitivity of Education in the 20th Century

Insensitivity of the Needs of the Education System

Social Inequalities

Gender Inequality

Conclusion

References

The 1944 education act was a revolutionary piece of legislation because it completely changed the way education was structured in England (Wales).

The key landmark change was the introduction of free education for all pupils, by introducing a tripartite education system (Graham 1980, p. 38). From this change, three schools were established: Grammar schools, secondary technical schools, and secondary modern schools (however, initially, only a few of these schools were established as an initial step to the implementation of the 1944 education act).

Students in primary schools were also subdivided into two groups: one group constituted of pupils from 5 years to 11 years and the other group consisted of pupils from 11 years to 15 years (Graham 1980, p. 38). In this regard, the school leaving age was set at 15 years old, but subsequent changes to the legislation increased this age to 16 years.

Courtesy of the 1944 act, community colleges were also introduced to offer education to adults and pupils, but initially, only a few higher education institutions such as Cambridgeshire Village Colleges, and Coventry, Derbyshire and Nottinghamshire community schools undertook the challenge because there was a lot of initial skepticism about the idea, and its ability to sustain in the long term (Graham 1980, p. 38).

In addition, courtesy of the 1944 education legislative changes, compulsory prayer was introduced to all public schools with legislative provisions indicating that such prayers should be done within the Christian faith unless it could be established that such a provision was inappropriate for the children involved (Graham 1980, p. 38).

The same provision also allowed for such prayers to be undertaken in the classroom context (as opposed to the past mode of prayer assemblies). As a complementary change of the legislation, free milk was initially offered to pupils, below the age of 18 years, but subsequent amendments to the legislation reduced the minimum age of students who could receive the free milk to seven years; afterwards, the free milk was eliminated altogether.

Complementary to these changes, the 1944 education act also created a framework for schools to receive direct grants from the government as a form of payment to the schools, for allowing the free education system to run in their institutions (Graham 1980, p. 38).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There was a new criterion used by schools to assess which type of students would be taken to which type of school. The criterion is known as the 11-plus criterion, where depending on the performance of the pupils, students were to be taken to one of the three schools, depending on their ability and capabilities.

Regardless of these provisions, the number of grammar schools and technical schools was in mismatch with the number of pupils supposed to be admitted to such schools (Graham 1980, p. 38). However, secondary modern schools were identified to cope better with the large pupil numbers, and due to this reason, many students attended these schools, regardless of if they attained the minimum entry requirements or not.

The 1944 education act is also perceived by many experts as the basic framework which elevated the ministry of education (known then as the Board of education) by giving it immense powers to dictate the running of the country’s education system (Graham 1980, p. 38). From the understanding of the nature of the 1944 education act, this study seeks to investigate why the 1944 education act was introduced.

Conceptual Analysis The main goal of the 1944 education act was to empower women and lower class citizens of England by providing them with equal access to education (Graham 1980, p. 38).

More so, the focus was centered on the girl child, but similar emphasis was also made on efforts to mobilize the working class to access employment opportunities in future by attending higher learning, through the establishment of modern secondary schools. With the advent of the 1944 education act, several consequences were realized as a result of efforts aimed at transforming the education system.

For instance, a class clash was witnessed among the working class and the middle class because there was increased awareness among the working class that they were more socially disadvantaged (at least on academic grounds) because of the existing education system, and this brew some anxiety in the country (Graham 1980, p. 38). However, these observations were a product of several factors listed below.

Sensitivity of Education in the 20th Century In the 20th century, education was a very critical social and economic issue, not only in England, but the entire European continent (Know Britain 2011, p. 1). There was no doubt that education stood at the centre of all forms of personal prosperity and nationwide success (because of its importance in the industrial era period).

We will write a custom Essay on Education Act (1944) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When a person pursued education on an individual level, this was perceived as a benefit of the community because such a person was bound to empower his or her community in one way or the other. However, it should not be assumed that the needs of people in the community were purely academic because neither were the needs of the community.

This fact was clearly respected in the formulation of the 1944 education act because it outlined that, “it shall be the duty of the local education authority for every area, so far as their powers extend, to continue towards the spiritual, mental and physical developments of the community” (Lawton 1975, p. 3).

From the above understanding, we see that the developers of the 1944 education act acknowledged that, for the true fulfillment of spiritual, mental, and physical wellbeing of the community, each community member had to be spiritually, mentally and physically empowered.

This could not happen through any other way than by empowering children through education. It could not make any sense for the government to keep upholding a system of education which was biased towards children hailing from parents who could afford education, while those who could not afford education were not entitled to enjoy these basic rights.

Again, it is important to understand at this point that, education did not only reflect the passing of academic information from teachers to the pupils ,but rather, it involved the transmission of spiritual, mental and physically fulfilling information to the pupils. The nourishment of children with spiritual and mental information was especially seen to be of high importance in 20th century England, and it had to be enshrined in the education system of the country (Know Britain 2011, p. 1).

The importance of this fact could be seen from the stipulation of how each day at school should begin (with prayers) (in the 1944 education act). This fact was reinforced by the assertion that “the school day in every county school and in every voluntary school shall begin with collective worship on the part of all pupils in attendance” (Know Britain 2011, p. 1).

The importance for a comprehensive system of education was however not designed to be appropriate for 20th century England (only); it was also designed to be applicable to periods past the 20th century, as was envisioned from the education reform act of 1998 which reiterated the importance of a holistic system of education. There are no “grey” areas to the admissibility of this provision because all social classes, political groups and genders agreed that this was to be the case (Know Britain 2011, p. 1).

Due to the importance of spirituality, mental health and physical health to the wellbeing of a community, it was therefore decided that, every child had the right to be empowered in the above ways, and there was no better way to do this than to make the provision through mandatory education; or at least providing every child the access to these privileges (Know Britain 2011, p. 1).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Education Act (1944) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Insensitivity of the Needs of the Education System Initially, the England education system was insensitive to the needs of the population by having a very simplistic form of education, where students only passed through elementary schools, and after that, the only other option to personal growth was working. There was no provision for pupils to further their education; except for those who had the money to do so.

Academic careers were therefore only limited to those people who had money. Due to this reason, the 1944 legislation was introduced, to give an opportunity to pupils who wanted to pursue an academic career by providing them with a chance to enter grammar school, if they passed the 11-plus test.

The examination was however very simplistic because it only tested pupils in two subject areas only: mathematics and English (Know Britain 2011, p. 1). This simplistic nature of examination was often frowned upon because it neglected other subjects and at some point, it did not receive much support from educationists because it redefined the success of schools through the performance of only the two subjects identified above (Know Britain 2011, p. 1).

However, elementary schools significantly changed their curriculum to offer the 11-plus test at the end of the study period (usually after the age of 11). Unlike previous times, the future of a child was determined from the child’s choice, at the age of 11 onwards, but initially, the future of a child was already determined at the age of 11.

From this understanding, it was therefore obvious to note that, the 1944 education system gave a chance for children to pursue a career at the age of 11. This abolished the previous financial barrier that prevented “ordinary” children from pursuing their educational pursuits, past the elementary level.

Social Inequalities After the industrial revolution periods of the 19th and 19th century, capitalism set in Europe, where resources were privately owned (Hill 2010). Though income distribution has been perfected in most parts of the world (but other places still lag behind), the education system seemed to complement the unjust nature of capitalism in Europe, and more specifically, England, during the 20th century.

Capitalism seemed to give a few people the power to control most of the country’s resources, while a greater majority of the population either worked for these people or controlled very few resources. In some historical literature, it was believed that the wealthy controlled 80% of the country’s resources while the poor only controlled 20% of the country’s resources (Hill 2010).

This inequality was largely brought about by an unjust education system, which either bore elites or frustrated those who could not afford it (out of the system). The minority population consisted of the elite in the society and they had an upper hand regarding most aspects of the country’s operations, including policies, legislation, resource allocation and such like aspects.

However, it was not easy for someone to join the elite in the society without passing through the education system, and possibly going through the world’s best institutions. In the 20th century, there were very few opportunities for the poor to join the elite because they did not have the money to further their education beyond the elementary level (Hill 2010). Furthermore, the best educational institutions were the most expensive in the country and only those who had money had access to such institutions.

Even those people who had substantial amounts of money could not have the best education because they only got what they paid for. Quality education was therefore only a preserve of the rich and children who accessed this education system got into the best institutions, got the best jobs in the country and ultimately, they were paid the highest wages (Hill 2010). Those who failed to access quality education never got high paying jobs, and were therefore locked in an endless cycle of poverty.

The same cycle was safely guarded by the rich because it was easy for them to secure their wealth through the injustices of the education system. In other words, the rich took their children to the best learning institutions across the globe, and this enabled their children to get the best jobs, and ultimately the highest incomes. This system safeguarded their wealth.

In the meantime, poor people were denied access to education because they could not afford it and therefore only landed semi-skilled or unskilled jobs, which paid very little money (Hill 2010). In this regard, they could not pay for good education for their children and their children subsequently fell into the same cycle of poverty. This population group worked as semi-skilled and unskilled workers in industries controlled by the elite, and unfortunately, the rich determined their income (Hill 2010).

The 1944 education changes broke this cycle because there was already a sense of hopelessness among the poor because they could not access equal opportunities for growth (Hill 2010). This cycle was broken in the sense that, the poor were given an opportunity to further their education by breaking down the financial barrier that existed between them and the rich.

In this regard, the playing field was evened and poor children could compete with rich children for educational opportunities, and ultimately employment opportunities. Though there are some traces of the former system still existent in the European society today, the latter scenario seems to be largely the case.

Gender Inequality As mentioned in earlier sections of this study, the 1944 education changes were partially aimed at eliminating the gender inequalities that existent in Europe during the 20th century.

There were very limited opportunities for women to pursue higher education (and in some cases, pursue education in totality) because of the existent socio-cultural barriers. Boys therefore had an upper hand in overcoming the educational barrier, especially among poor families because parents often preferred to educate their sons, as opposed to their daughters, through higher education (Jacob 1996, p. 160).

This inequality was evidenced because higher education was quite expensive for poor families and still, access to higher education was still limited for everyone. For the few parents who could afford higher education, there was a strong bias to educate the boy child as opposed to the girl child, while girls were majorly perceived as homemakers.

Statistics have even gone further to show that, gender was a predictor of the level of educational attainment a child was to attain because boys were more likely to attain higher levels of education than girls (Jacob 1996, p. 160).

The gender inequality existent in 20th century England also seems to follow the same pattern as the social class inequality that existed in Europe during the time. This is because few employment opportunities (especially in managerial positions) were given to women, and this implied that even women who had the opportunity to work could not work in high paying positions (Jacob 1996, p. 160).

Just like the poor, women worked in low paying jobs, and usually in semi-skilled or unskilled jobs, thereby denying them the opportunity to pursue the same employment opportunities as men. In this regard, only men were financially capable of educating their children and since they were gender-biased as well, they preferred to educate their sons as opposed to their daughters (Jacob 1996, p. 160).

The 1944 education act therefore evened the opportunity for both girls and boys to pursue higher education by removing the financial barrier that often, when coupled with socio-cultural factors, limited the girls’ access to education, past the elementary level.

In this regard, it is increasingly important to note that, the 1944 educational act was designed to provide an opportunity for women to pursue higher levels of education by empowering them through education. Since education was now free, there was no excuse for the girl child to shy away from pursuing higher levels of education.

The act therefore played a very significant role in the fight for gender equality in England because as noted in earlier section of this study, education is the key to success and denying the girl child an opportunity to pursue education amounted to denying the girl child the opportunity for personal growth, employment opportunities and an opportunity to grow spiritually, physically and mentally.

Though many strides have been made, with regards to gender equality (based on equal access to education) there is still much to be done to place women at par, in getting employment opportunities, especially in high positions of governance such as politics (BBC 2006, p. 1).

Conclusion This study acknowledges the input of the 1944 education act in revolutionizing England’s education system, but in the same regard, this study acknowledges that, the same legislation was a product of several injustices which existed in England at the time. The injustices varied from social to economic challenges, but collectively, they seemed to curtail the chance of every citizen to pursue a high quality of life through education.

Specifically, such injustices seemed to hit the girl child the hardest because she was subject to economic and social barriers. The poor were discriminated against in a similar fashion. The legislation was therefore designed to address these challenges and provide an equal opportunity for all citizens to have a high quality of life.

References BBC. (2006) Gender Equality ‘is Decades Away’. (online). Available at: http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/4582878.stm .

Graham, I. (1980) The Comprehensive School 1944-1970: The Politics Of Secondary School Reorganization. London, Taylor

[supanova_question]

Understanding the nature of motivation Term Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

Introduction

Experimental evidence

Implications of the experimental evidence

Limitations of the findings

Future directions

Conclusion

References

Abstract The paper dwells on motivation for addiction. A literature review reveals that most people will be inclined towards drug taking because of environmental factors like availability, genetic predispositions, developmental factors such as adolescence, personality components such as prevalence of psychotic traits like impulsivity, adaptations of the neurobiological system and its mechanisms as well.

Adaptations occur when conditioning of the external stimuli arises. The gap in literature review found that most papers did not link motivation for drug use with preventive outcomes. A multimodal approach to drug treatment and prevention has been proposed so as to offer more successful and accurate drug programs.

Introduction Addiction is defined as the propensity to indulge in strange and even destructive behavior; addicts will often lack the ability to control their habit and may continue to indulge in it even with external intervention.

Several studies have been carried out in the field of drug addiction to find out what motivates users to continue taking drugs. A literature review in this area reveals that almost all motivation falls in these six categories: genetic, environmental, neurobiological mechanisms, neurobiological adaptation, personality and developmental factors.

Most studies tend to focus on assessment of one or more of these factors but very few have found a way of relating these motivations to prevention and treatment programs thus minimizing the usefulness of their researches.

The present study will look at current findings in the field of addiction motivation and will eventually provide recommendations on how these findings can be translated into tangible prevention outcomes. In other words, the main purpose of this research is to suggest a multi – modal approach that will link motivation for drug taking to tangible prevention outcomes.

Experimental evidence Most analyses focus on collection of literature, analysis of drug addicts or experimentation with lab animals in order to unravel the nature of addiction. Crowley (1972) carried out a comprehensive study of addiction through the use of secondary literature and theoretical frameworks.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He found that drug reinforcers can either be primary or secondary in that they either cause the effect of the drug directly or they lead to an effect that comes to be associated with the drug. Secondary reinforcers may either be positive or negative. He suggested that a negative secondary reinforcement was one that was learned or conditioned.

In other words, if an addict experienced his or her first withdrawal effects in his parent’s house then chances are that the person would get the same feelings in his parent’s house even if he was not going through a withdrawal and this is called negative secondary reinforcement. Alternatively, conditioning or secondary reinforcement may also be positive in that it can be associated with particular peers.

Although Crowley (1972) called these conditional motivators secondary reinforcement, other researchers have given them a more scientific name known as neurobiological adaptation.

Examples here include Volkow

[supanova_question]

Patient Confidentiality Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents The Issue

Impact

Arguments and Facts Used in the Article to Support Solution

Ethical and legal issues reported

An Explanation of Managerial Responsibilities

Proposed Solutions

References

The Issue It is the duty of healthcare providers to sustain the confidentiality of their patients. However, healthcare practitioners face a huge workload and sometimes find themselves taking part in discussions about their patients. The code of ethics for all healthcare practitioners prohibits any discussion on the healthcare of patients without their knowledge. Today, there are new technologies that enable people to engage in conversations without physically being close to one another.

Such technologies include social networking tools like Facebook and Twitter that allow two or more people to have a conversation and share multimedia content. The presence and ease of access of such social networking tools make it possible for healthcare practitioners to ease their workload pressures by instantly connecting to their social circles. Unfortunately, the solution does not come without drawbacks.

Leach (2009) reports in the Telegraph that out of 78 US medical schools, more than half had cases of students sharing information online in an unprofessional way. Moreover, the Telegraph report indicates that the number of guileless violations falls within the ratio of one for every ten students.

The main online forums that medical students used to share content unprofessionally were blogs and the social networking site, Facebook. According to the article, violations reported were in the form of profanity and the use of discriminatory language while describing patients or their conditions. Additionally, the report notes that the medical students behaved in a conduct that could not be justified given the fact that they were training to become physicians.

Impact Behaviors such as being frequently drunk and disorderly contributed largely to the violation of patient’s trust and public trust in the medical students and the healthcare profession in general. Most of the information posted online breached doctor-patient agreement or expectation on confidentiality. Because of the violations of patient confidentiality, students receive informal warnings and when the violations become serious, medical schools have no other choice but to dismiss the particular students.

Arguments and Facts Used in the Article to Support Solution The article indicates that it is important to instill the discipline expected of a medical practitioner to students. Therefore, medical students need to know practically the disadvantages and consequences of being careless with the information they give out while contributing to social conversations.

Additionally, students need to be extra careful when using online media to communicate because the internet exponentially increases the speed and access to information. The article indicates that a possible cause of the high number of student misconduct cases is a result of the lack of sound policies that cover engagements in social network and blogging services online (Leach, 2009).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Ethical and legal issues reported The Telegraph article, discussed above, points out ethical misgivings that include the failure to ask for the patient’s permission before disclosing their status to other persons. Medical practitioners abide by the oath of Hippocrates that simply states that they should not speak of anything that they see or hear in the lives of their patients that is not acceptable. The US law protects a patient’s confidentially through the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA).

Under this law, medical practitioners and mostly physicians have to abide by requirements that regulate the handling and disclosure of patient’s health information transactions and their confidentiality. Moreover, the law protects a patient’s data through a number of guidelines directly related to the daily workings of a physician. The human rights act also assures everyone of respect to their personal lives together with their homes and correspondence (The UK Ethics Network, n.d.).

An Explanation of Managerial Responsibilities Physicians have a responsibility of using resources, supervising or leading teams and working in managed systems in various institutions. Practically, all practicing physicians act as managers in their respective capacities. Healthcare managers have the responsibility of raising concerns in public community risks only after they have done the same within their organizations without finding a solution. However, this does not absolve them of their responsibility of not breaching patient confidentiality.

Therefore, it is important that practitioners keep abreast with new ethical and legal requirements regarding patient confidentiality. Healthcare institutions have to manage patient confidentiality properly by using well-structured systems. The systems should follow the law requirements of storing, using and disclosing patient confidential information. Likewise, institutions need record managers with the adequate training needed to provide data protection.

These record managers do not work in isolation; they need adequate support and cooperation that will allow them to perform as required. Other than record managers, staff having access to patient records should also have a proficient training on discretion and decent record keeping (General Medical Council, 2006). Lastly, staff contracts need to state explicitly the importance of respecting and maintaining patient confidentiality.

Generally, a medical practitioner should listen to patients and respect their personal health views. In addition, patient’s descriptions handling should be serious and the feedback provided to the patient should be in an understandable way. When patients complain, they should receive a prompt answer form their physician.

Additionally, the answer should be frank and beneficial. A proper way to manage patient information would be to make timely reports for the organization, which may be shared with other relevant bodies. This ensures that any blame arising shifts away from the practitioner after the resolution of the case.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Patient Confidentiality specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Proposed Solutions A possible solution to the students’ case of breaching patient confidentiality would be to introduce safeguards on Clinical Data Management (CDM) systems to prevent leak of information. The law needs amending to include harsh penalties even for student doctors as a way to instill the discipline of respecting patient confidentiality.

One major form, in which patient confidentiality breaches occur, is through negligence of other structures necessary for guaranteeing it. One such case is on patient privacy. When patient privacy structures have a poor implementation record in an institution, likely due to lack of dedicated resources, then patient confidentiality tends to suffer (Manning, n.d.).

In the students’ case, outlined in this essay, Leach (2009) reports that most of the medical schools covered in the study did not have any policy covering the use of blogging and social media networks online. This is an example of a case where the disregard of patient’s privacy has negative externalities to patient confidentiality.

If the medical schools had policies protecting patient privacy by restricting the use of online media and other channels of communication, then incidences of student breach of patient confidentiality would not be as high as reported. It is important to strengthen warnings against breach of patient confidentiality by having robust systems.

To sum up, patient confidentiality is a fundamental requirement of patient-physician relationships. Medical practitioners have an ethical and legal obligation to adhere to patient confidentiality. Each practitioner assumes managerial responsibilities for their departments, teams or institutions. Having a well-structured system allows these practitioners to fulfill their responsibilities easily.

References General Medical Council. (2006). Management for doctors – guidance for doctors. Web.

Leach, B. (2009, September 24). ‘Tweeting’ breaches patient confidentiality. Web.

Manning, W. L. (n.d.). Privacy and confidentiality in clinical data management systems: why you should guard the safe. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Patient Confidentiality by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Alcoholism: The rough road Creative Essay scholarship essay help

Experiences in life can be a painful and wisdom is to learn from our previous mistakes and to avoid them in future. Ken was a kind of guy you would love to hang out with, he was full of life. Suddenly Ken lost interest in life and alcoholism took centre stage, he started taking alcohol daily because of various reasons like he wanted to relieve stress of his marriage and abusing alcohol.

Ken was a favorite colleague at the place of work. Alcohol started affecting his health; he could not take food when sober. He missed coming to work affecting his day to day activities, and his behavior changed from being the gentleman he was to some ragged person.

Ken lost it, and everything fell apart, from his marriage; his wife Cindy filed for a divorce and sole custody of his two children, he was laid off and this predicament made him worse off than he was. It saddened my heart to see Ken get wasted, he become emaciated and lost hope in life.

I was the only family he had and he had to move in with me in my apartment. Ken would find it difficult to make eye contact and would withdraw in a room and be alone. He started behaving like a baby sulking if he doesn’t get his way, all this time I tried talking to him to register in a rehabilitation centre but to no avail. He started lying, stealing and this made me upset because I couldn’t take it anymore. I was beyond breaking point and I had to do something

One rainy evening I was watching a TV show and there was a lady narrating how drug abuse has caused her marriage, I was shedding tears not realizing my friend was also in the room. Ken got very emotional as he who at the very bottom. Ken had nothing and he was willing to try anything to put his life back together. For the first time after so many months Ken went to bed sober. We talked about the choices he had; either to choose to live, or choose to die. He chose to live.

Alcoholism is the most serious form of alcohol abuse. Once the drinker reaches Ken’s stage, serious treatment should be considered. We enrolled in a rehabilitation center for three months, the first step was for Ken to apologize to all his friends and family members for any harm he had done and it was very painful to watch him apologize to his family.

Am praying that his family will find it in their heart to forgive him. He was introduced to a sponsor, a person who was an alcoholic but has sobered up, it to mentor and walk with him .lastly he joined an Alcoholic Anonymous (AA) program that helped him in his recovery.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More More people are dying of alcohol related deaths, families are disintegrating and the society is loosing morale standing because of alcoholism and it clearly shows the harmful effect of alcohol to an individual and a country as a whole.

Alcohol is a delicate subject, because you are affected emotionally, financially, seeing your loved one struggle with the ogre of alcoholism, or you are infected as an alcoholic. Alcohol is a disease that most people who have experienced alcoholism admit, it’s a disease that rarely goes away and needs ongoing treatment.

[supanova_question]

Japanese Manga Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Ideas regarding Women and the Development of 2-D Love

Changing Ideas Regarding Tradition

Fascination of looking less Japanese

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Japanese manga is one of the most pervasive and popular forms of modern day Japanese culture and as such enjoys a reader base numbering in the millions (Raiteri, 89). What must be understood though is that its pervasiveness is not isolated to one particular age group, rather, manga’s popularity reaches ages as young as 5 and as old as 60 and above (Lent, 38).

Another factor that must be taken into consideration is the fact that various studies have shown that people who read manga have a tendency to emulate ideas, concepts, practices and even attitudes based on what they have read (Lent, 41). This can be seen today in Japan’s otaku and cosplay sub-cultures which have only recently come about within the past 30 years or so as a direct result of the popularity of manga (Raiteri, 89).

It must be noted though that the influence of manga on Japanese society extends beyond the obvious sub-cultures that have developed as a direct result of its influence, rather, manga has been observed as enacting change in behavioral attitudes and created the development of new cultural norms which otherwise did not previously exist in Japanese society. This takes the form of the adoption of ideas related to individualism, non-conformity, rebelliousness and other forms of behavior that are distinctly alien to the conservative Japanese society.

In fact manga has been described as an art form wherein authors are able to express ideas, scenarios and various events that they wish they had done themselves if it were not for the oppressiveness of the conformist society of Japan (Ito, 456). Yet it must be noted that this method of expression has actually resulted in the development of social changes as a direct result of ideas that develop while a person is young and continues well into maturity.

As mentioned earlier, manga is not isolated to a particular age group and due to its popularity the result has been a proliferation of readers starting at early ages all the way till they reach adulthood. What happens as a result is that in certain cases such individuals are inherently influenced by the ideas they see and take note of in manga which they then tend to apply in real life situations.

Due to the fact that a large percentage of manga scenarios base themselves on real life this ends up resulting in people adopting behaviors, attitudes and styles which they become predisposed to as a direct result of being influenced by manga. As such it can be stated that distinct changes in the attitude and development of social ideas and concepts among the youth can actually be connected to the types of ideas they garner from manga.

Ideas regarding Women and the Development of 2-D Love One of the most popular themes in manga today has been the portrayal of a protagonist as an average everyday guy who suddenly becomes popular with women through some form of plot device (Lent, 40).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This results in situations of varying perverseness with the women involved in such events increasingly showing varying degrees of extreme sexuality or even mild to extreme eroticism. Based on current popular trends it can be seen that women in manga are increasingly being portrayed as being wild, sexually active, possessing an inherent desire to have sex and are supposedly attracted to normal guys (Ito, 470).

Interestingly this has actually resulted in the development of new systems of classification for women within the country wherein they are classified under character themes evident in manga such as “tsundere”, “yandere”, “bijiin”, “loli” etc. which are relatively new methods of classification that have developed as a direct result of the proliferation of manga culture (Ito, 456 – 475).

Going back to the topic at hand, while such plot devices are nothing more than the imaginative creation of the mangaka (author/artist of the manga) it has been noted by various social scientists that the proliferation of such themes in a large percentage of manga in Japan has actually brought about the social idea (notably from men) that girls are supposed to be like the characters in the manga (Ito, 471).

Such an assumption though is far from the reality of Japan’s conservative society which is far removed from the imaginative world portrayed in the manga.

This has actually resulted in the development of a distinct societal syndrome called “2-D Love” (the literature is vague on the exact terminology) where upon realizing that women in the real world are nothing like the characters they see in manga some men actually start to believe that 2-D characters as seen in manga and various erotic games based on manga style characters and plots are better than women in real-life (Ito, 473).

Such a distinct societal syndrome is evident in varying extremes in some groups within the otaku sub-culture which has led to some social scientists stating that some of the effects of manga are actually detrimental towards society.

Changing Ideas Regarding Tradition Japan has always been known as a conservative society that is well entrenched in its ideas of tradition, culture and the preservation of social institutions.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Japanese Manga specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It must be noted though that within the past 15 or 20 years a distinct shift has been noted within Japanese society wherein the youth has been less oriented towards tradition, conservatism and the value of the group but rather new concepts such as individualism, progression, liberal ideas and mannerisms have started to take root with manga supposedly to blame for this sudden shift (Allen and Ingulsrud, 674).

An examination of various manga themes and concepts dating back 15 years has revealed a certain shift in plot line and ideas wherein authors increasingly made the main characters less inclined towards tradition and more inclined towards the adoption of distinctly western ideas and concepts. This came in the form of the main characters in mangas openly fighting against concepts related to tradition, preservation and societal institutions (Allen and Ingulsrud, 674).

While such themes did not directly espouse going against the current societal culture evident in Japanese society they instead espoused such ideas indirectly by creating imaginative situations, events and ideas that made people question the validity of current social institutions (Adams and Hill, 99 – 105).

In fact social scientists agree that the distinct shift in the ideas of the Japanese youth today is a direct result of both distinctly western influences in Japanese society as well as the ideas evident in manga. This plotline trend of going against tradition is still distinctly evident in a majority of manga today which shows how far reaching and effective manga has been in changing the face of Japanese society.

Fascination of looking less Japanese One of the most curious influences manga has had on Japanese society has been the development of a strange fascination of looking less Japanese. When examining the character designs of manga for the past 10 to 15 years and their subsequent anime adaptations it becomes easily recognizable that few of the characters actually look Japanese (Welker, 841).

Aside from the fact that the eyes of most manga characters are far larger and western looking than that of the Japanese, the hair color, skin tone and overall look of the characters themselves are far from what could be considered even remotely Japanese.

While such a characterization can be justified as primarily being the result of fantasy rather than reality what must be understood is that a rather large percentage of manga actually use themes such as school life, normal life, or everyday situations as the basis for the entire plot of the manga (Adams and Hill, 99 – 105). Despite portraying the everyday life of people the characters themselves don’t look Japanese and in fact could be mistaken for western characterizations (Welker, 841).

Due to the influence of manga this has actually resulted in the development of a widespread societal trend in Japan wherein people are actually trying to look less Japanese. Normally this takes the form of either dyed hair (brown being a popular color), colored contact lenses and a variety of western style clothing and accessories however some individuals take this one step farther which has actually led to the development of even more sub-cultures in Japan (Welker, 841 – 844).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Japanese Manga by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More One such sub-cultures is the gyaru (patterned after the English word “gal”) where Japanese women tan themselves until they’re golden brown, put on excessive amounts of makeup and try to look as western as possible. This is similar to the yankii (patterened after the English word “Yankee”) sub-culture where people dye their hair orange or yellow and wear distinctly Americanized clothing styles and adopt distinct anti-conformist attitudes.

The connection between the development of these two sub-cultures and manga is believed to be the result of irrational exuberance wherein individuals tend to base their actions on the behavior of other people, in this case it is the looks and behavior of people in manga. The creation of such sub-cultures is for various social scientists the result of irrational exuberance in action wherein people take on a form of emulation resulting in the development of these rather unique if not weird sub-cultures.

Conclusion Based on what has been presented in this paper it can be seen that manga has had a definite impact on Japanese society and has affected it in a variety of different ways resulting in the development of new social ideas, behaviors and sub-cultures.

It is due to this that the ability of manga to enact social change should not be underestimated and as such this literary/artistic device should be thought of as not being the equivalent of the ordinary comics you see in the entertainment section of newspapers but rather as a literary/artistic instrument which creates social and cultural change based on its inherent ideas and themes.

Works Cited Adams, Kenneth Alan, and Lester Hill Jr. “Protest and Rebellion: Fantasy Themes in Japanese Comics.” Journal of Popular Culture 25.1 (1991): 99-127. Literary Reference Center. EBSCO. Web.

Allen, Kate, and John E. Ingulsrud. “Manga literacy: Popular culture and the reading habits of Japanese college students.” Journal of Adolescent

[supanova_question]

Argument Analyis of Racist Speech Analytical Essay custom essay help

Table of Contents Personal view

Racist speech on campus

Conclusion

Work Cited

Personal view In his writing titled ‘on racist speech’, Charles. R. Lawrence III clearly portrays himself as a dissenter probably setting the tone for his argument. It is indeed clear that Lawrence’s opening remarks already indicate the contentious issue at hand. As a renowned scholar, Lawrence addresses racist speech especially within the university and campus environment. There is no doubt that racism is the catalyst for racist speech that is; a conspicuous but silent issue as Lawrence puts it on college and university campus.

Racist speech on campus There is another angle to which Lawrence connotes racist speech. In introducing the rights as enshrined in the constitution, Lawrence’s intention is an attempt to qualify racist speech as a tenet within the constitution which guarantees freedom of speech. In his opening remarks, Lawrence proudly describes himself as a dissenter yet a consumer of the first amendment which also legally qualifies and legalizes his argument.

However, as Lawrence advances in his argument “the problem has been framed as one in which the liberty of free speech is in conflict with the elimination of racist speech” (61). It is indeed evident as the writing advances on that, the law and scholar contributions have so far been ineffective in providing protection to blacks and other minorities; as guaranteed in the constitution.

A case of segregated education system is the point of reference by Lawrence and the Brown versus Board of education case is used by Lawrence to amplify the conflict that exists between the first amendment and the racist speech. Lawrence’s opinion is that, the constitution remains lenient in as far as racist speech is concerned.

The contention as Lawrence asserts is that on one hand “we understand the necessity of eliminating the system of signs and symbols that signal inferiority of blacks … proclaiming that all racist speech that stops short of physical violence must be defended”(62). The tug of war in Lawrence’s mind is even clearer in his assertion that, “the Supreme court has held that words which ‘by their very utterance inflict injury or tend to incite an immediate breach of peace’ are not prohibited by the first amendment” (62).

However, on the other hand the first amendment gives leeway to colossal amount of speech which includes racist speech. While the case of Brown versus Board of Education on segregated system of education is worth revisiting. Lawrence points out that, “courts have held that offensive speech may not be regulated in public forums” (62).

Ironically the effect this has for example on the university campus is that minorities or blacks will confine themselves to common rooms or locations where they do not encounter racist speech. However, this silently promotes segregation on ground of race where one will now go to common rooms with people of the same race or minorities on campus.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lawrence’s dilemma advances is based on “commonly advanced argument against the regulation of racist speech…we recognize that minority groups suffer pain and injury as a result of racist speech but we must allow this hate mongering for the benefit of the society as a whole” (63).

In his strongest assertion yet in this argument, Lawrence concurs that “there can be no meaningful discussion of how we should reconcile our commitment of equality and our commitment to free speech until it is acknowledged that there is a real harm inflicted by racist speech” (64).

As far as it goes, there is a delicate balance between first amendment and racist speech as Lawrence puts it. On the surface racist speech has far reaching detriment to the society and its promotion in the name of upholding the first amendment is a great irony.

Albeit freedom of speech is upheld constitutionally, tenets within the same law appear conflicting and therefore the racist speech issue remains far from over.

It is without a doubt that policy makers at the university level continue to grumble with this issue. However, the skew that results from the interpretation of the law invokes in Lawrence’s mind the need to “strike a balance against the regulation of racist speech” (64). The understanding here is that, the cost of this balance should not be borne by a few as it presently is the case.

Conclusion The argument that racist speech should be handled in light with the first amendment leaves a lot at stake. Charles Lawrence has ingeniously considered this issue at the university and campus level though it generally covers the whole fabric of the society.

The initial conclusion to draw from this argument is that; racist speech will remain an emotive issue until a critical analysis of the present law is undertaken and amendments made. Lawrence proposes a dissenting stand to start with. This will be achieved through resistance of government regulation on speech.

We will write a custom Essay on Argument Analyis of Racist Speech specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As a reader I am fully persuaded that Lawrence’s argument was correct. This argument provokes a clear conclusion and also encourages everybody to re-think how democratic space has been used to ironically advance inequality.

Work Cited Lawrence, Charles. “The debate over placing limits on racist speech must ignore the damage it does to victims.” Chronicles of Higher Education. Chroninicles, 1989. Web.

[supanova_question]